Tips Category RSS Feed | Tips RSS Feed on en Launch Media Network Fallout 76 Power Armor Locations Fri, 16 Nov 2018 19:09:48 -0500 Stephen F. Johnston

Power Armor is all over the Fallout 76 map and is a bit different then Fallout 4. This article documents all of the power armor locations we know about. Do you know of another location? Send us a comment or a tweet and let us know the details and we'll add it and give you a shout out.

A couple of things you should know about power armor in Fallout 76. First, the armor spawns and respawns so if the armor isn't there, but the cage and related items are, check back later. Second, you can wear any frame, but you'll have to carry the pieces if you aren't high enough level to use them. For more info like how to farm power armor and fusion cores check out our Power Armor Tips for the Early Game

Power Armor Locations

1. Morgantown Train Yard

You can find the Morgantown Trainyard Power Armor to the east of Vault 76 and decently close if you want to get power armor immediately.

If you're looking on the map, it is almost directly on top of the icon for Morgantown Trainyard.

If you come in from the south, you will see some train cars and a big building. Directly to the right of the big building is an open train car that has "USA" painted on it. Inside this car is the power armor.

Power Armor In train Car Morgantown

2. Morgantown Mama Dolce's Food Processing Plant Power Armor

The actual town of Morgantown is slightly southeast of the trainyard.

You can find Power Armor in a booby-trapped shack down a hill behind the food processing plant. There are mines around the power armor, ground spikes at once entrance, and a doorway trap at another entrance.

Mama Docles Food Processing Power Armor

3. Eastern Regional Penitentiary Power Armor

The next location is a little further into the Fallout 76 map, but still not too far out if you don't want to go back to the first two locations or have already made your way past them.

This Power Armor is "guarded" by Super Mutants I've seen as high as Level 16, so you must be careful.

This is to the north of Morgantown trainyard/station. If you look on the map above, it's the blue icon toward the top, northeast of Highway 59 and west of the mountains, the dam, and the lake region in the northwest corner.

If you enter from the east side of the icon on the map, you will see an open gate area and a truck. Go this way in you will see the shack with the Power Armor slightly to the left as you pass another gate.

Power Armor in Eastern Pentientiary

4. Arktos Pharma

Arktos Pharms is northeast of Flatwoods at the top of a hill or mountaintop. The build has an entry way with wrecked trucks in it. A fusion core is through a hackable door to the back left. The power armor is upstairs on the third floor. The room with the power armor is actually visible from the front of the building on the side with the truck garage.

Flatwoods with Arktos Pharma to the Northeast

Fusion Core around that Corner

Power Armor Directly Above Garage

More to Explore and Find

Those are the locations we have confirmed for now. If you know of any send us a message on twitter or drop a comment below.

Fallout 76 Detailed Perk Cards Guide Fri, 16 Nov 2018 15:51:36 -0500 Synzer

Fallout 76 mixes up the established formula quite a bit, and not just because of multiplayer. The perk system works very differently than it did in the previous Fallout 4.

Perks in this game work by equipping perk cards, and they can be swapped out. They are also directly tied to your S.P.E.C.I.A.L. stats, so you need to be careful how you spend them. Perks can also have multiple ranks and different costs.

There is a lot to the system that may not be apparent at first, or confusing, so I'm going to fully explain the perk system in Fallout 76.

Stats, Perks, and You!

Let me first explain the basics of S.P.E.C.I.A.L. and perks in Fallout 76 and how they differ from Fallout 4.


There are seven categories you can put stat points in. You start off with one in each, and receive one every time you level up. These level up points can be spent on any of the seven stats.

  • Strength - Increases carrying capacity and melee attack damage.
  • Perception - Increases weapon accuracy in V.A.T.S. and your ability to detect stealth. Also gives the ability to pick locks.
  • Endurance - Increases total health, lowers AP drain from sprinting, and increases your resistance to diseases.
  • Charisma - Lowers prices from bartering, lets you share perks with others, and increases rewards from group quests.
  • Intelligence - Increases the condition of crafted items, amount of materials you get from scrapping, and gives the ability to hack terminals via a perk card
  • Agility - Increases your AP in V.A.T.S. and your ability to sneak.
  • Luck - Increases the recharge rate of critical hits and the condition and durability of items you loot.

In Fallout 4, you got some points to use at the beginning and could get more from leveling and finding bobble heads.

In Fallout 76, you only start with the initial one in each stat and cannot permanently increase them with bobble heads. You only get them from leveling until level 50. This means you have 49 points to freely spend, plus the 7 set points you get at the beginning.

Perk Cards

Perks do a wide variety of things. They can increase damage of a certain weapon, allow you to hack or pick locks, increase defense, and much more.

fallout 76 perk card requirements

Fallout 76 lets you choose which perks you want via perk cards. Each card correlates to a specific stat and has a cost, which is the number on the top-left corner of the card. Some cards also require you to be a certain level before you can equip them.

Your stat in that perk's category, must be at the same number or higher than the card's cost. For example, if you have a Strength perk card that costs 3 points, your Strength must be at least 3 in order to use it.

Each stat can only be increased to a maximum of 15. Also, there are no perk cards that cost more than 5 points.

Since you cannot currently reset your points, you must choose wisely. You can also hold off from putting in points if you aren't sure at the time.

You can equip as many or as few cards as you want for each stat, as long as they don't go over your current limit. The best part is that you can unequip any perk card if you want to use different ones. This is something you could not do in Fallout 4 without using console commands or a mod.

How to get more Perk Cards

When you level up and select a stat to increase, you will be able to choose one new perk card as well. You can select a new one, but you can also select one you already have. If you select an existing card, this will allow you to rank it up. More on that soon.

Starting at level 4, you will get a perk card pack every other level until level 10, then every 5 levels after that. Perk card packs give you 4 random perk cards.

Ranking up Perks

If you choose or receive a perk card that you already have, you can use it to rank up the perk.

Take the Rifleman perk card for example. It is a Perception perk that allows you to deal 10% more damage with non-automatic rifles. At the base level it costs 1 point.

If I get another one, I can combine them to increase it to rank 2. This will increase the damage bonus I get, but now it costs 2 points to use.

Keep this in mind when ranking up perks because you will need to also increase your stat or remove other cards if you want to continue using it.

fallout 76 rifleman perk card

Sharing Perks

If you play with others, you can also share your perks if you have a high enough Charisma stat. For every 1 point a perk costs, you need 3 Charisma to share it.

So a 1 point perk requires at least 3 Charisma to share and a 5 point perk requires the maximum of 15 Charisma to share.

That's everything you need to know about the perk card system in Fallout 76. Let me know if you have any questions, or need further clarification on anything!

Be sure to check out our other Fallout 76 guides, so you don;t miss out on any wasteland action!

Fallout 76 Holotape Locations Guide Fri, 16 Nov 2018 12:35:19 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are hundreds of holotapes scattered all around the post-apocalyptic landscapes of West Virginia in Fallout 76. These precious items reveal the lore of the world through the story of people who recorded them and left them lying for others to find.

Some of these holotapes are especially valuable and are parts of many side quests. If you don't want to waste time looking for these holotapes on your own, then just follow our guide below with corresponding location maps to each of them.

Alpine River Cabins Complaint

Find this holotape near one of the cabins the Forest region. This tape is not a part of any quest, but it will let you know that there is something weird happening in this area.

Blank Holotape

Here is a blank holotape if you need one at Sugar Grove located in the Savage Divide region.

This location also includes three other holotapes that carry recordings of the three monsters:

  • Grafton
  • Snallygaster
  • Wendigo

Christmas Plans

The holotape with a recorded conversation between Abigale Poole, the Speaker of the House for the Provisional Council, and Tanner Holbrook, the Majority Whip of the pre-War West Virginia State Government, can be found inside the office of Charleston Capitol Building in The Forest region of Appalachia.

Damaged Holotape

The Damaged holotape is a part of the Into the Mystery side quest, which can be obtained by finding a dead body body at the Tygart water treatment plant in the Forest region.

Flatwoods Tavern Purchase Order History

This holotape can be found inside a footlocker in the tavern kitchen of Flatwoods. Although this holotape is not a part of any quest, the data recorded on it is quite hilarious.

Gym Session Notes

Here is another funny tape, which can be found on top of a shelf standing next to a radio inside the workout room of the Green Country Lodge.


The holotape discussing the Mothman monster can be located inside an apartment across the bus stop at Point Pleasant.

Light Er' Up

This tape can be found at the end of the tracks directly across the T-intersection of the Gauley Mine in the Forest region of Appalachia.

Order of Mysteries

Riverside Manor is one of the most important locations on the map. It can be found northeast of Mount Blair in the Forest region. There you will find 11 holotapes that are parts of various quests.

Here is the complete list of holotapes, which you can find inside the Riverside Manor:

  • Infirmary Log
  • Pleasant Valley (Seeker of Mysteries quest)
  • Production Log 194
  • Production Log 209
  • Production Log 212
  • Rank: Initiate
  • Rank: Novice (Novice of Mysteries quest)
  • Rank: Seeker (Seeker of Mysteries quest)
  • Blade of Bastet (Forging a Legend quest)
  • Phantom Device (Chasing Shadows quest)
  • Voice of Set (Prototypical Problems quest)

Free States

Find this important lore holotape outside of Abbie's Bunker in the Mire region of Appalachia.


The tape discussing the madness of the mayor of Grafton can be found at Grafton Dam in the Toxic Valley region.


Go to the main building of Camp McClintock in the Forest and find the private holotape recording of the Overseer.


A recording of an attack at the Overseer can be located on a makeshift table on the porch of the Mountainside Bed & Breakfast.

Top of the World

Another important piece of lore can be seen at the elevator of the ski-resort Top of the World.

Personal Matters

Personal Matters is a side quest that requires you to find and kill Evan, a ghoul that creates a lot of trouble. In order to complete this quest you need to find 6 holotapes.

Vault-Tec Agricultural Research Center

The first holotape can be found at the front counter at Vault-Tec Agricultural Research Center.


The second one can be seen inside the blue house on the second floor of the Sutton building.

Morgantown High School

The third piece of tape can located inside the Morgantown High School.

Vault-Tec University

For the fourth tape you will need to travel to Vault-Tec University.


The fifth holotape can be seen inside the Evan's house in Welch.

Mount Blair

Find the last tape at the top of Mount Blair. This is also the location of Evan himself, so go ahead and kill him to complete the Personal Matters quest.

Safe for Work

The Safe for Work side quest requires you to find five holotapes scattered around the Morgantown Airport. Here are all five locations where you will find the required holotapes:

  • Training Exercise
  • Triage Center
  • Processing Center
  • Medical Center
  • Control Tower

The Mothman Cometh

Another piece of the Mothman lore can be seen on the front counter of the Mothman Museum in the Forest region of Appalachia.

Too Much Noise

Get yourself some fresh cream and a holotape discussing its origin at the Cow Spots Creamery.

Soldier's Story

The tape highlighting the encounter of a soldier with the Wnedigo monster can be seen at the entrance of the Wendigo Cave.


You can start the Cold Case side quest by listening to the holotape found at the underground maintenance area at Wavy Willard's Water Park.


Hopefully, these holotape locations helped you find more information about the game's lore and complete some of the most major side quest. For other Fallout 76 guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

How to Master the Kulve Taroth Siege in Monster Hunter: World Fri, 16 Nov 2018 11:28:57 -0500 Tim White

Monster Hunter: World typically rolls out content in stages. New hunts are available for a limited time at first, but usually show up again during subsequent events as well. Kulve Taroth came to PC recently and after November 21st, we don't know when she'll show up again on PC, so make sure you snag her killer loot now!

Kulve Taroth Mechanics

The Kulve Taroth siege works differently than any other Monster Hunter: World hunt that PC players have seen so far, and its mechanics can be a little obtuse. Fortunately, they're not as complicated as they might appear at first.

To take on this massive beast, you'll need to first unlock the quest Banquet in the Earthen Hall (requires HR 16, but 50+ is recommended). 

Doing so requires finding some golden monster tracks; they appear uncommonly during any high-level expedition. Once you've found some, you can report to the girl in pink in the Celestial Pursuit. Defeating the golden behemoth in a single run is possible, but very difficult, even with a well-equipped team that knows exactly what they're doing. Plan on attempting this repeatable quest multiple times before seeing any of the best rewards.

Once you see the screen above, you'll notice some terms the game has never thrown at you before.

Pursuit level: This parameter starts at 0 and maxes out at 6. This has a direct effect on the three sub-parameters under it: the scoutfly guide, time remaining, and part breakability. The pursuit level increases when you locate Kulve Taroth tracks, which appear far more frequently during the Banquet in the Earthen Hall quest than anywhere else. In a nutshell, Kulve Taroth becomes much easier to defeat at higher pursuit levels.

Scoutfly guide: At pursuit level 0, your scoutflies will be of no help in locating the boss. At pursuit level 1, they'll be able to sniff out her tracks, and by level 4 Kulve Taroth will appear on your map immediately.

Time remaining: Kulve Taroth is initially not thrilled about sticking around to fight you. At lower pursuit levels, she will flee from battle after about 15 minutes. Raising the pursuit level will buy you more time during each run to deal damage to her.

Part breakability: This is really what the Kulve Taroth hunt is all about. To get the best drops, you need to break her armor -- especially her horns. At low pursuit levels, breaking her horns is almost certainly not going to happen, but at higher pursuit levels, it becomes much more manageable.

Reward level: This will increase as you successfully deal more cumulative damage to Kulve Taroth and break various parts across multiple runs. Reward level XP is also awarded for various actions within the mission, such as driving Kulve Taroth into new areas of the map. It maxes out at 15 and determines the rarity of the drops you will receive when you best her (by completely breaking her horns—she can't actually be killed).

Here's a complete breakdown of actions that grant reward points:

  • Reach second map zone - 20
  • Reach third map zone - 40
  • Reach fourth map zone - 60
  • Reach pursuit level 2 - 20
  • Reach pursuit level 4 - 40
  • Reach pursuit level 6 - 90
  • Right foreleg gold plating broken - 90
  • Left foreleg gold plating broken - 90
  • Right chest gold plating broken - 60
  • Left chest gold plating broken - 60
  • Right hindleg gold plating broken - 30
  • Left hindleg gold plating broken - 30
  • Tail left gold plating broken - 30
  • Tail right gold plating broken - 30
  • Kulve Taroth released (all body armor destroyed) - 90
  • Tail broken - 120
  • Horn gold plating broken - 120
  • Giant horns chipped - 150
  • Giant horns completely broken - 500

What's more, Kulve Taroth is the first hunt in Monster Hunter: World that supports up to 16 players working together, though that's not obvious at a glance. Up to four groups of four can all join the same online session in the Celestial Pursuit, and when the mission starts, each group of four will be tracking the same instance of Kulve Taroth.

However, you'll only see three of your teammates, not the other 12. If someone not in your group of four breaks one of Kulve Taroth's parts or completes a reward point action, you'll receive partial credit; you need to complete the same action yourself for full points.

Lastly, it's worth noting that if all four groups complete the same reward point actions themselves, more and better rewards will drop once the siege is over.

Kulve Taroth General Stats & Pointers

Kulve Taroth is a tough monster to bring down. She's more defense than offense; even the hardest-hitting hunters won't be able to get through her armor without preparation and perseverance. See the screenshots below for detailed information on her resistances and weaknesses, as well as a complete listing of her break rewards.

Starting the Hunt -- Stage 1

Your first one or two runs should be entirely focused on finding as many Kulve Taroth tracks as possible. She will lumber around the map and you might even run into her -- don't engage. She won't be hostile unless you attack her first. Dealing significant damage to her becomes noticeably easier around pursuit Level 3 or 4, so try to get there before worrying too much about attacking her. Just gather tracks until she runs away, at about the 15-minute mark.

Your first few runs are also a good time to pick up some of the new materials and trade-in items available in this mission.

Research Points

  • Copper calappa are little golden crabs, found everywhere in the first sector of the map. Catch them with the capture net for 8 RP.
  • Gold helmcrabs are less common than copper calappas, but still easy to find all around the first area. Snag them with the capture net for 14 RP.
  • Scattered gold chips can be obtained by attacking Kulve Taroth until she drops them; they're fairly plentiful and worth 10 RP.

Trade-in Items

  • Gold chip fragments can be obtained by attacking Kulve Taroth's horns until she drops a large chunk of Kulve Taroth's gold. Any nearby copper calappas will harvest small chunks of it, and you can then steal the gold chip fragments from them.
  • Golden chunks can be broken off any part of Kulve Taroth's body or received as drops.
  • Golden fragments can be mined from mining spots or dropped by breaking any part of Kulve Taroth's body.


  • Kulve Taroth golden nuggets and golden scales both drop fairly commonly when you break any part of her body.
  • Kulve Taroth golden tailshells can be obtained by—you guessed it—breaking her tail.
  • Kulve Taroth golden glimstone is a rare drop (~3% chance) obtained by carving Kulve Taroth's gold when you manage to break her horns. There's also a small chance to receive one as a quest reward.

Continuing the Hunt -- Stages 2 & 3

Once you've achieved pursuit level 3 or higher, you'll notice a substantial increase in your ability to damage Kulve Taroth, as well as the length of time she's willing to hang around. As you exceed certain damage thresholds, she'll flee into new areas of the map. Here are some general tips and tactics to keep in mind for the second and third zones of the fight:

  • Thunder is your best bet for elemental damage as long as her golden armor is still mostly intact. Once it's broken off, ice will be the top choice. Dragon and water damage perform decently in all stages of the fight.

  • Always target her horns whenever possible; breaking them continuously yields substantial rewards and is the ultimate objective of the quest.

  • Most of Kulve Taroth's attacks aren't too dangerous for hunters above level 50, except for two: her massive AOE lava blast and her lava mouth beam. Both are capable of instantly knocking out even high-level hunters, but both are telegraphed well in advance.

  • Make good use of environmental tools and traps. Every area has at least one precarious boulder lodged in the ceiling somewhere; tag them with your slinger to drop them on Kulve Taroth's head for massive damage. There are also cannons in the first zone that will deal big damage to her head if aimed carefully.

  • Come prepared with as many large barrel bombs and mega barrel bombs as you can carry. Drop some next to her head when she falls over; explosions are a great way to deal large spikes of damage.

  • Bring plenty of cool potions and/or chillshrooms; the third and fourth stages of the fight take place in so much lava.

Finishing Her Off -- Stage 4

Keep wailing on her long enough and you'll eventually corner her in a large cavern past the gigantic lake of lava. She'll make her final stand here and become much more aggressive. Expect to see her two deadliest attacks executed more frequently. The good news is that by this point, her armor should be mostly or entirely gone, so your own attacks will be much more effective.

There's no real trick to this stage other than not dying. Remember to focus your attacks on her horns whenever you can. Keep it up and she'll fall sooner or later.

When Kulve Taroth finally lumbers off in shame, you'll get some materials and trade-in items as usual, but to get the loot you've really been working for, there's one final step to take. Head back to the Celestial Pursuit and talk to the girl in pink once more. Select "claim rewards" under the Kulve Taroth Siege menu—you'll get some rare materials, with more gold reward slots on offer the higher you managed to drive your reward level.

You'll also get some random relic weapons, which have to be appraised, can be any weapon type, and range from 6 to 8 in rarity. Finally, you might also score some Bushi tickets. These can be traded to the resource center along with Kulve Taroth materials and break drops to score the Homare layered armor set.

Note that when you claim these rewards, the siege pursuit and reward levels will reset to zero.

Regular Kulve Taroth armor can be crafted in the workshop and comes in α and β versions, like all other high-level armor sets. Many of its pieces enhance some of the rarer and more useful armor skills, like Critical Boost and Handicraft.

There you have it! Taking down Kulve Taroth is a lot of work, but once you get a feel for the routine, it should be smooth sailing.

Check out our Monster Hunter: World hub for more guides as Capcom rolls out new hunts.

Battlefield V Guide: Domination/Team Deathmatch Strats and Comp Thu, 15 Nov 2018 17:52:37 -0500 John Schutt

Battlefield 5's game modes are all fairly straightforward, with few wrinkles to muck up veteran players or confuse newcomers. Putting the small number of maps aside (even by a Battlefield title's standards), this you can see this best in its infantry focused modes: Domination and Team Deathmatch. 

The two modes are two sides of the same coin. One speeds up as you capture objectives while the other stays at a relative pace but rotates around a central, undefined point. The goal of both is to reduce enemy tickets to zero, and you cause ticket bleed in both by getting kills. 

Simple. Classic. Fun.

Getting the most out of "instant action" modes is a tale as old as the FPS, but because of the Class system and level design, it takes a little finesse.

The Road Less Traveled

Conventional wisdom for playing close-quarters, kill-based game modes is to stick to the outskirts, play the spawns, and always have a quick escape route.

In Battlefield 5, having an escape route is your best course of action. Here's why:

  • The outskirts of domination maps are dead zones: While they make a great place for Recon players to post up and cover a sight line, most class abilities favor a more in-your-face approach, Medics and Support, especially.
  • The center lane has many ways out: Running down the middle lane of a map still puts you in a kill box, but only if you do it for extended periods. With full destruction enabled, and easy access to every building on the map, there is always a way to move perpendicular to the center lane without actually being on it.
  • It's hard to predict a squad spawn: In Call of Duty, it's easy to predict where your enemies will spawn based on where your teammates are. Battlefield hasn't had that feature in a long time. Just because you have full control of one end of the map doesn't guarantee your safety. One second you're safe, the next an entire squad runs up behind you, guns blazing.

The best advice, then, is to move in the middle spaces between the outermost and center lanes. Cut from house to house, and be sure to check a window as you move through. Be aware than mantling is significantly slower over large obstacles now, so use doors whenever possible.

Or make your own. You can do that.

Funnel as You Fight

If you can get more than one or two kills per life, you can make a more concentrated impact on enemy troop movement by funneling them in a direction. You might want to just plow through your foes with as much prejudice as possible, but take a step back and consider each gunfight before it happens

  • Does killing this enemy help my team, or will it just get me and my squad seen?
    • Where is this enemy in relation to the objective?
    • How many of his friends might be around?
    • Am I otherwise in a position to capitalize on his death?

If you're uncomfortable with the answers to any of these questions, you should probably let the guy or gal pass. Your stats will thank you later.

Why? Because if you can get into a position to take out whole squads and keep them off of you for a little while, you create a funnel. In other words, you force your opponents to move in a direction of your choosing, either to remove you from your position or go around you altogether. 

In either case, you've put them out of position, which creates an opening for your teammates. Whether they take it or not is entirely on their shoulders, and I needn't tell teammate stories. There are simply too many of them

Funnels take many forms, but there are three primary ones to go for

First is traditional: You make your enemies move down a different line like they're moving down a funnel. To accomplish this strategy, you need to move along their flank, taking out one or two enemies at a time to make yourself seem like you're more than one man. If you can stay alive long enough, most foes will choose not to go down your lane, taking a safer path. And that's exactly what you want.

Second is what I'll term the "aggro-funnel." It's basically the same principle, but instead of misdirection, you want the enemy to know you're just a person who doesn't think they can be stopped, "So come and get me, you morons."

Make enough enemies mad and you can draw them away from whatever objective they had before. Keep it up and you might even call down the wrath of a tank or plane, denying important assets your opponents could use for other purposes.

Your biggest challenge with the "aggro-funnel" is your ammo supply, and therefore is probably best left to a Support. 

The third funnel is, for all intents and purposes, a suicide mission. You are the funnel. Your goal here is to punch through enemy lines with enough force to create a space behind you for your teammates to fill. You'll be running into and through hostile fire from every direction, but take out enough of them and if nothing else give yourself the satisfaction of a rampage well run.

Any class is capable of this last method, but Recon is challenge mode unless you're something of an FPS savant.

Class Composition

Let it never be said you can have too many Medics. Because you can't. Revive is as strong an ability as it ever was, and even though healing takes longer now, the fact you can dole it out and never run dry makes a single Medic the kind of force multiplier no squad should be without.

It helps that they can heal on the go no matter how much or little health they might have. And with guns built for close-range combat, you can be a constant thorn in your enemy's side until you run out of ammo. Add in some smoke grenades and you've got soft area denial.

Don't neglect the sheer power of the Assault class. What they lack in teamplay utility they make for in sheer force. They have the most versatile weapons in the game and enough explosives to make mincemeat out of buildings and the people camping inside them.

They need a squad to reach their full potential, but because they're not burdened by needing to heal, resupply, or cycle a bolt, they can get to power positions quicker than anyone else. And once they're there, the Assault can open up entire objectives, Domination or not.

Supports are a nice to have, but I don't think they're vital to squad success. That doesn't mean they don't have a place on the team, because keeping everyone stocked up and denying important lanes is an important trait. The problem is, much of what they do is better done by an Assault player.

The main reason to choose Support is the overall power of their weapons. While they're not as one-size-fits-all as assault rifles, their consistency across obscene ranges is something to be feared. 

Recons are situational, but they can make all the difference. One properly place flare or spawn beacon can and has turned the tide of a match. The ability to decide when and where your squad deploys opens up too many possibilities to name, and even teammates have a better shot at taking out enemies if they know where they are at all times.

Sniping can be fun too, I guess.


TDM and Domination might not be the most tactically complex modes in Battlefield V, but they can be some of the most fun. Use the tips and strategies presented here as guides, but feel free to invent your own crazy plays. That's what the "Battlefield Moment" is all about.

Fallout 76 Crafting Stations Tips Guide Thu, 15 Nov 2018 16:44:08 -0500 Synzer

Just as in Fallout 4, Fallout 76 lets you craft a wide variety of items. If you're a Fallout veteran, there's a good chance you're familiar with many of the crafting elements found in FO76. However, it's important you get a handle on the wrinkles in the system to get the most out of your efforts, and know that certain stations can help you get boosts. 

Since you can't craft everything in one place, this guide will go over the six crafting stations in the game and what general items you can craft at each -- some items can't be crafted at the station that seems most logical.

This will not contain recipes for all of the craftable items in Fallout 76. We are currently working on several guides that collect all of those into one spot. We will link to those here once they are completed. 

First, we will go over some important Fallout 76 crafting tips, then we will look at each crafting station. 

Fallout 76 Crafting Tips

Collect Everything -- and the Scrap

Since you will need a variety and large quantity of materials, you'll want to collect all the random stuff you see. These things will break down into materials you can use for crafting once you scrap them at any crafting station.

Since inventory can become a problem, I suggest that you scrap every time you see a station out in the wild (scrap goes to a "central location", meaning you don't lose it if not in your C.A.M.P.) or going back to your C.A.M.P. periodically. If you wanting to build stations for a camp, metal objects and aluminum is especially useful.

You can find aluminum in mountainous areas, fertile soil, and scrapped from things like cans and clocks. Metal objects and things that provide adhesive, like duct tape, are very useful for weapons crafting.

You can also find items in the world more easily by opening your Pipboy, going to "Junk", then switching to component view. From here, select the materials you want more of, then tag for search. This causes items to show a magnifying glass next to it if it contains anything you've tagged.

Scrap Higher Level Items and Duplicates

There is so much loot that you can't possibly hold or store it all. That's not a bad thing since you can safely scrap most high-level items to use the materials. You will end up getting more items like it or better later.

This lets you save a lot of room and have plenty of materials to craft. You can also learn how to make various items when scrapping armor and weapons that have mods on them.

You cannot scrap items with legendary effects on them.

Increase the Intelligence S.P.E.C.I.A.L. Stat for Better Crafting

Intelligence allows you to craft items with higher durability and lets you get more materials back when scrapping. This is extremely useful for anyone that plans on doing a lot of crafting.

Keep a Lookout for Plans

You can learn to craft new items by learning them from plans. You can find these throughout the game and can be used from the Notes section in your Item inventory.

Fallout 76 Crafting Stations

Cooking Station

The cooking station is the most basic, and arguably most important, crafting station in Fallout 76. Its importance is only (perhaps) outweighed by the Chemistry Station. 

The Cooking Station will allow you to make food and drinks. You will need to collect a lot of wood since most things I've seen require wood as a crafting material.

You can find wood in many warehouses that have logs and wood piles near camps and towns. You can also get it by scrapping wooden objects like pencils, which can be found in most buildings.

Food and drinks are important because you need to recover from Hunger and Thirst. Once your hunger and thirst meters drop, your Health and AP will begin to decrease -- and eventually start taking constant damage

Since these meters slowly drain over time, you will always want to have food and drinks on hand. You can eat and drink things you find in the wasteland, but you will be highly likely to get a disease and get much higher radiation doses.

Tip: Food and drinks can also give you temporary boosts to certain S.P.E.C.I.A.L. stats, as well as health and AP

Fallout 76 cooking

Chemistry Station

The chemistry station allows you to craft healing items, fertilizer, gunpowder, fuel, and fusion cores (no, you can't craft those at the Power Armor station). 

Gunpowder is needed to craft ammo, and fusion cores are required to use power armor. You can make these with Acid and Cloth

You can find Acid from Bloatfly glands, and scrapping items like Abraxo Cleaner, Batteries, and Coolants.

Cloth comes from breaking down things like clothing and armor, Pre-War money, and flags

However, some of the most important things you can craft at the Chemistry Station are stimpaks, healing salves, and disease cures. These are all helpful for PvP, but especially helpful if playing solo. 

You can also make boiled and purified water, though that's something you can just do at the cooking station.

Armor Workbench

This station allows you to craft, modify, and repair armor. It's in the name, after all. Most items crafted here will require at least cloth to make or repair armor.

Besides crafting armor for higher defense, you can modify/upgrade it. This allows you infuse armors with more defense, but also get other bonuses like increased carrying capacity.

When you start Fallout 76, the armor workbench only lets you craft leather armor. Leather can be found by scrapping items like gloves and baseballs, or by looting mole rats and radstags.

Of course, as you progress, you can craft bigger and better armor sets, such as the metal armor sets, the combat armor sets, and the robot armor sets. 

Weapon Workbench

The weapon workbench allows you to craft, modify, and repair all weapons. This includes melee weapons.

You can modify weapons to increase their damage and other stats. For example, you can put scopes or different barrels on guns to increase range and accuracy.

The materials you need depend on what you're crafting, but nearly all guns will need crafting items like adhesive, oil, gears, screws, springs, and steel

Most of these materials can be found in warehouses and other buildings, such as factories and diners) that have a lot of cans, fans, plates, clocks, and other common metal items.

Tinkerer's Workbench

After you've crafted and picked up all those weapons, you'll need to use the Tinkerer's Workbench to craft ammo for them.

All ammo that you use for normal guns will require gunpowder, so it's good to also have a Chemistry Station at your C.A.M.P. when trying to make ammo.

You can also craft grenades and mines from this station.

Power Armor Station

When you get your very own power armor, and the level required to use the armor pieces (which is Level 15), you can craft and modify it at a Power Armor Station.

This is very similar to normal armor, where you can increase defense and modify to get other benefits. The helmets are especially useful as they will let you stay underwater longer and reduce radiation.


Those are all the tips I have for crafting in Fallout 76. Let us know if you have any questions or extra crafting tips of your own! Be sure to keep a lookout for our other Fallout 76 guides and content.

Fallout 76 Guide: Power Armor Tips for the Early Game Thu, 15 Nov 2018 15:04:24 -0500 Synzer

Power Armor in Fallout 76 is similar to a mech suit. It's big and heavy but gives you great protection, ability to breath underwater if you have a helmet, and it just looks cool! If you've played Fallout 3, Fallout: New Vegas, or Fallout 4, you know what power armor's about. 

You can get power armor pretty early in Fallout 76 and at pretty much any time you wish. The only catch is that you can't use the actual armor pieces -- helmet, chest, arms, legs, etc -- until Level 15. The lowest level pieces are at Level 15, then 25, 30, 40, and possibly even higher (I've not finished yet, so can't confirm levels higher than 40 at the moment).

If you reach a set of power armor and you are not a high enough level to enter, you can still take it. You must select transfer and take all the armor pieces off and put it into your inventory

However, once you are high enough level to enter a Power Armor set, you'll need a fusion core. Fusion cores are required to use power armor, so be sure to save them. If nobody else has taken it, the power armors will have a fusion core in them already.

The power armor chassis is all that remains when you strip it of its parts, and there is no level requirement to enter these. You won't get the extra benefits the armor pieces give, but you'll still have increased Strength, Endurance, and carrying weight, and you'll be immune to falling damage.

Most power armors will be near a power armor station. This is a crafting station that allows you to build and modify your power armor if you have recipes and meet the level requirements.

Early Game Power Armor Locations

Fallout 76 early game map showing Morgantown Trainyard

For a full list of Fallout 76 Power Armor Locations checkout our power armor locations guide.

Although there are dozens of Power Armor sets throughout Fallout 76, it's important to know that you can grab everything you need very early in the game -- before you reach Level 15. Keep in mind that you may not see the Power Armor in each location when you go there. This could be because someone else took it or it hasn't spawned yet. 

How to Farm Multiple Power Armors and Fusion Cores

Early in the game, you don't need to go around to different locations to get power armors and fusion cores. Since Fallout 76 uses different world instances, you can use that to your advantage to farm the same power armor location.

Once you've taken a power armor chassis and/or its parts, simply log out of the game. When you log back in, you will most likely be in a different instance. This means you can go back to that same location and get another set of power armor pieces/chassis.

Depending on the location, you might want to build your C.A.M.P. close to the power armor spawn point. I had one set up next to the location near Mama Dolce's Food Processing Plant.

You won't always see it, and sometimes I only saw a chassis, but this is a much more reliable method than going around to different locations. If it isn't there, just keep logging out and back in until you see it.

Unlocking Excavator Power Armor and the Power Armor Station for your C.A.M.P.

When you reach Level 25, there is a side mission in the southern portion of the map that has you to craft the Excavator Power Armor. This is special armor that increases max weight by 100. There will be a more detailed guide that fully explains this quest in the future, but keep that in mind as you progress through the game.


That's all you need to know to get power armor early in Fallout 76. Now you can enjoy running around in a nice suit of armor, plus the invaluable extra carrying capacity.

Let us know if you have any questions, or found other early game power armor spots. Sound off in the comments below!

The Blackout Club Item Guide: Choosing the Right Hero Item and More Thu, 15 Nov 2018 11:41:58 -0500 RobertPIngram

The kids in The Blackout Club have no shortage of tools and tricks up their sleeve as they seek to find out the truth about the strange cult taking over their neighborhood.

With so many options at your disposal, it’s easy to feel lost about what the best options are in a given situation. This handy guide has everything you need to know to put your gear to use.

Choosing a Hero Item

Every player is given three options for starting weapons before departing on a mission, and each brings its own strengths and weaknesses to the table.

You should consider your teammates' selections, to choose a balanced squad before heading out of the cave.


The taser is a close-quarters weapon, capable of putting an enemy to sleep. It can be used when being attacked, as well as to assist a teammate who is being attacked. You can even zap an unsuspecting enemy if you get close enough.

In the current version of the game, the Taser feels vastly under powered and unworthy of selection.

Grappling Hook

The grappling hook is an effective tool for accessing places in town you otherwise could not. It creates a rope to climb, and can be used by every member of the team. It is also reusable, and can be picked up after climbing it. While a team of grappling hooks is under-armed in the field, having one player equip it increases your team’s options.

When starting in the lower cave entrance, you don’t have to follow the path past The Shape door if a member of your party has the grappling hook. Just toss it up over the ridge and climb up to change your entire approach angle to the mission.


Wouldn’t it be nice if you didn’t have to get right up on an enemy to take it out, and instead could shoot it from a distance? With the crossbow, you can!

Combining the close-range value of the taser with the ability to drop an adult from across the yard (into a blissful sleep, of course) makes the Crossbow the clear choice for offensive work. Anyone not on hook detail should choose the crossbow for their hero item.

Tip: The dart from your tranquilizer gun can also be used as an escape item when grabbed by an adult.

Foam is Your Friend

While a can of shaving cream may not seem like the most handy of items for a child to carry with them, there is no item in the game more versatile than a can of foam.

Keep Things Cushioned

Exploding a can of shaving foam may be a messy headache come morning, but at night it’s a useful tool for evading the adults wandering around town. Footsteps on non-grass surfaces are loud, and draw the attention of any sleepwalkers or lucids nearby. When you drop a layer of foam down, it muffles your steps, allowing you to sneak by unnoticed.

Tip: Foam also serves as a cushion during falls. If you need a backup route off a roof, or out of a tree house, throw some foam down and land on it to spare your health.

Take Their Vision

Your small town is home to a surprisingly high number of security cameras, seeking to catch you and your friends committing sins. They can’t catch what they can’t see, however, so peg the camera with a shaving foam can to take it out of commission.

When You Need to See, However…

Perhaps the most handy ability of a can of foam is making The Shape visible to the naked eye. If The Shape pursues you through a pile of foam, its footsteps become visible for you and your teammates to see.

Tip: Particularly brave players can try to hit The Shape with some foam directly. This covers The Shape in a layer of foam, meaning you don’t have to close your eyes to see it, a welcome, if temporary, relief.

Recovery Items

In an ideal world, every mission goes off flawlessly and the kids get in and get out without being discovered. More likely, you’re going to face some hairy moments. When those come, it’s important to have recovery items to help get you back to the clubhouse without becoming Shape-fodder. There are two recovery items each helping with a different key stat.

Chocolate Bars

When The Shape hits the fan, sometimes the only solution at your disposal is to leg it. Unfortunately, every kid can only sprint for so long, as doing so consumes stamina. If you’ve sustained damage already, your stamina will be even lower.

Chocolate Bars provide a quick stamina boost, and you can even consume them at a full sprint, adding valuable sprint time to your escape.

Tip: A well-timed chocolate bar can be the difference between escaping The Shape and going to sleep. Try to save your chocolate bars for when The Shape is after you, instead of wasting them fleeing common enemies.


While extended stamina is great, if your health has been so badly damaged by capture or falls that you’re barely hanging on, it’s not gonna do you any good.

Bandages patch you up and increase the maximum stamina capacity, while also increasing your ability to fight off grabby adults,

Misdirection Items

When all you have is a small team of kids taking on a whole community of evil and evil-adjacent adults, head on is rarely the best approach. These items let you use a little misdirection to get what you need.


Perhaps the most straightforward of the non-starter items in the game, they do exactly what they say. Throw them as a projectile and they explode where they land, drawing the attention of any of The Shape’s follower’s nearby.

Tip: Noisemakers are great for crossing open spaces, like the center of town or the main chamber of the caves, when you can’t find an opening. Toss a Noisemaker into a corner, or to another sector of the street, then scoot across the open space while the adults are distracted.


It’s probably best not to worry about just how the young kids in a small town got their hands on so many SWAT-ready devices, just be glad they did. Flashbangs are thrown to create a blinding light which incapacitates nearby enemies so that the kids can beat a hasty retreat.

Tip: Flashbangs also work as an escape item when an adult grabs you, so it’s always good to hold onto them. If your health is full and you’re nearing the end of the mission, however, you may be better off shoving to escape and taking the wound in order to keep the flashbang to open up an escape route back to the clubhouse.

Sleep Tripwire

When you need to prepare an escape route, you can’t beat a sleep tripwire. Simply deploy it across a hallway or stretch of yard, then the first enemy to pursue you past it will receive a tranquilizer to the leg which puts them down for the count.

Tip: You can place a tripwire directly over a particularly pesky enemy if your teammate has them pinned. As soon as the pin is released, the tripwire fires and puts the enemy to sleep.


Do you have any other tips or sage wisdom regarding item usage in The Blackout Club? Figured out something with your friends you want to share with the world. Drop your tips and experiences in the comments below!

Spyro Reignited Tree Tops Guide Thu, 15 Nov 2018 10:14:55 -0500 Sergey_3847

Spyro the Dragon is back in a new remastered trilogy Spyro Reignited. If you've played the original games, then you should be well aware of one of the hardest levels in the entire series -- the Tree Tops level.

It can be accessed through the portal found at the foot of the tree in the Beast Maker Home. Then, you will have the chance to climb up the tree using special supercharge ramps that allow Spyro to cover huge distances between the platforms.

If you're playing this level for the first time, and can't figure out how to move through this remarkable maze, then follow our guide below.

Rescue Isaak

In the Tree Tops level you need to find and rescue the three great dragons and open the Strong Chest.

The first dragon named Isaak is the easiest to find. You will start the level by going up the stairs and jumping over to the first arc. Flame all the chimps on your way there and collect gems.

Go upstairs from the arc where you will find Isaak. He will explode in light and tell you about the supercharge ramps that will help you cover larger distances.

Rescue Lyle

After you talk to Isaak you can use your first supercharge ramp and jump to the next platform. Go downstairs and flame all enemies until you reach the next ramp.

Jump onto the platform that has a Return Home portal. But you don't want to use it yet. Instead you will see a whirlwind on the side of the platform that will send you upwards.

You will find yourself on the previous platform. Use it to return to the very first one where you started this level. On this first platform you will see another whirlwind that will send you up once again.

Go upstairs and take the golden key. Keep moving upstairs and jump over to the next platform where you will find dragon Lyle.

Rescue Jed

Lyle will give you a hint that you can chain several ramps together for a really quick traverse of all platforms.

Use this trick to make a circle and get to the platform with the last dragon Jed. Refer to the map below for exact directions.

Then, return to the platform where you've rescued Lyle using the whirlwind. Use the ramps to return to the second platform and open the Strong Chest using your golden key.

Lastly, get back to the platform with a Return Home portal and jump on it.


That is all on how to complete the hardest level in Spyro Reignited Trilogy, the Tree Tops level, but be sure to come back soon for even more related guides here at GameSkinny!

Crusader Kings II Holy Fury: How To Use The New Shattered World Rules Tue, 13 Nov 2018 16:22:34 -0500 Fox Doucette

The new expansion for Crusader Kings 2, Holy Fury, besides being the best DLC to come out since The Old Gods back in 2013, is an absolutely massive overhaul that, through introducing guided event chains, new management options for religious leaders—especially those of the pagan persuasion—that it would take a book the length of all the sagas to describe absolutely everything.

So instead of trying to cover the whole DLC in one shot, let's focus in on the one mechanic that is absolutely the most literally world-changing one in the whole package: the Shattered World rules.

Let's start by making like a god and creating a world.

One Caveat!

Shattered and Random Worlds will not allow you to circumvent DLC restrictions that lock playable pagans behind the Old Gods DLC, Muslims behind Sword of Islam, and nomads behind Horse Lords, for example. Please bear this in mind if you're shattering the world (especially if you're randomizing the religions in the game) since you might just end up with nothing but unplayable factions all over the map.

Put simply, this game mode richly rewards the completionist above all. Luckily, these DLCs go on sale a lot. I have almost all of them myself (even bought The Reaper's Due just because it was there when I got back into the game recently), and I'll be writing with that assumption in mind. If you can't use something I suggest here, and you really want it, buy the DLC. You'll be generally glad you did.

Shattered Vs. Random

The biggest difference between a shattered world and a random one is the scope and scale of the duchies and empires that start the game. That is to say, simply generating a random world means you can make it a lot like the base game, only... different.

Three of the first four settings are for “number of dukes”, “number of kings”, and “number of emperors”, after all. The point here isn't necessarily to change the fundamental flavor of a traditional CK2 game, where vassals can break free of lieges or scheme to gain the crown for themselves and where one-province minors are limited to places like Ireland if they want to grow powerful extremely early in the game.

Sure, you can turn all of those settings way down or even off, but if you're going to do that, that's where the fourth setting, the one at the very top, comes in. You can assign a maximum number of counties for counts to own.

Put that number at 8 and the game will tend to generate multi-county realms more or less exactly at the maximum demesne size that the rulers of those counties can hold.

Put it down at 1 and every count starts as a one-province minor.

In-between, of course, generates results that lead to decent-sized realms to start. This is nice if you don't want to twiddle your thumbs before you start warmongering; you can pick a county that's a bit bigger than its neighbors and get to putting together those de jure duchies and kingdoms that allow you to play “the Irish strategy” anywhere on the map.

Shattered World, meanwhile, is a lot more balanced.

Set it to “counties only” (the setting on the left at the top of the menu) and everyone's a one-province minor.

Set it to “duchies only” (the setting on the right) and every duke will start with their own complete de jure realm, ready to start vying for power to see which of those petty warlords will become the king (this is absolutely ideal for a “Bretwalda”-like game in the British Isles.)

Set it in the middle and there will be dukes with count vassals, a bit more of a headache rulership-wise but which does tend to slow down the pace of advancing “blobs” ever so slightly.

If all you did was use these options to break up an early start, it would be a fine way to go about it. But there is so much more available to you, so let's dig deeper.

Let's start with the three game settings unique to the Shattered World.

How Fast Do You Like Your Blobs?

The “Consolidation” casus belli, available for a designated amount of time from the start of the game, essentially opens the “Become King of Norway” decision from Norse pagans up to the entire game world.

During that limited time, you'll have an all-you-can-eat right to use the “county conquest” casus belli when starting a war. This has the net effect of saving you a lot of time and trouble as a non-Germanic-pagan faction in getting rid of a pesky neighbor, since you won't have to fabricate any claims.

Settings include Disabled as well as Enabled for 25 years, 100 years, or Permanent. Permanent is... well, it's way too powerful in the midgame and beyond for warmongers. Doing this for longer than a century makes the game an absolute cakewalk.

Beware the Fallen Empires

If you've played Paradox's sister game Stellaris, you know what happens when the Awakened Empires and the event-generated conquerors start showing up to screw the galaxy with a light show of space lasers.

Well, put that on Earth (minus the space lasers) and you have the Great Conquerors, of which up to 12 can be designated. These will periodically spawn with large armies, a special Invasion casus belli, and a tendency to show up nowhere near the player so they can do the maximum amount of damage and consolidation before the player eventually has to fight them. This is the check on player power from all that free consolidation in the early game that a human can do.

The more of these you spawn in, the harder the game gets.

My Son, All This Shall Be Yours

There's an option to change the succession laws, but it's either bugged or just doesn't work with tribes. It's hard to tell with Paradox what's a bug and what's a feature since their games are so complex, and I did my test playthrough for this guide as the County of Agder with a 769 historical start in a counties-only Shattered World. After 20 hours, I've only scratched the surface.

If indeed it's a bug and Paradox meant to allow feudal succession for tribes, this massively curbs the frustration factor that is getting locked to Elective Gavelkind until you can warmonger enough Moral Authority and religious holy sites to reform your religion and adopt feudalism or merchant republics.

Setting Primogeniture early is a huge buff to unreformed pagans, nomads, and tribals.

Demographics Or: How To Game Over In Year One

The next group of settings: Female Ruler Percentage, Marriage Percentage, Age Span, and Number of Children (0-10), are all self-explanatory.

The temptation is to go hog wild here, but it is real easy to accidentally trigger a game over when you make a world full of small dynasties ruled by women and find you can't keep your family line going past the first generation.

Granted, there are always ways around this (a matrilinear marriage to a lowborn courtier is every countess's in-case-of-fire-break-glass option if you can live with the prestige hit, as is the Present Debutante option to magic a wife out of thin air for a male ruler.)

But do be careful with these sliders.

How Historical Do You Like Your History?

You can, in any kind of world, keep the cultures and religions as they are and where they are in the world. Norse stay in Norway and follow the Old Gods, Italians live in Italy and are Catholic, and so on.

You can also decide to randomize historical cultures so Norse people live in the deepest, darkest parts of sub-Saharan Africa if you like. The map does extend all the way to the Sahel region, from Mali in the west to Somalia in the east.

Or those same men of the north could find themselves on the western fringes of China! If you've got the Jade Dragon DLC, that means Vikings on the Silk Road getting chummy with the Cathay emperors in Nanjing, and the idea of a bearded, axe-wielding Genghis Khan in a helmet out of a Wagner opera? Sure, why not?

But if you really want to break your brain and make yourself feel like you're playing in a world that is not our own, try randomizing the culture and religion names. Half the fun then becomes just trying to suss out what it is your neighbors believe so that you can try and formulate a strategy against it.

The Gods Must Be Crazy

And, of course, Paradox provided a cheat sheet. As soon as you randomize religions, a little green arrow lights up in the interface allowing you to look at and alter the belief systems of every religion in the game. You can't do it with historical religions (Catholics are still Catholic, Germanic pagans still worship Odin and Thor, and whatnot), but anything goes with random religions.

Want to make the “Wienkeic Rites” (the version of Norse paganism the game whipped up for me when I pressed the button just now as I'm writing this guide) a peace-loving, non-aggressive religion rooted in meritocracy and stability? Go nuts!

Want to make historically Buddhist or Hindu lands fall under the sway of a warmongering religion with bloodthirsty gods and a faithful who believe that death in battle brings eternal rewards in the hereafter? Gandhi wants his nukes!

You can choose anything in between and modify the AI as well, giving you (pun fully intended) god-like powers over belief.

Imagine No Possessions, I Wonder If You Can

The next key piece in our world-building puzzle is how fleshed out (or not) the individual holdings are.

You can keep this historical, so counties that are rich in the base game will remain so, you can randomize it so you get an unequal world with obvious strategic targets, or you can ensure that every single province in the game gets the same number of holdings in it.

You can have as few as one available holding slot or as many as seven, assigned to every province, or as mentioned you can make it random. The choice is yours.

The next section of the menu, “Holding Types”, determines whether you have fully feudal holdings everywhere on the map, fully tribal ones, fully nomadic camps, or any mixing and matching to suit the flavor of your game.

Tribalism does tend to nerf looting for pagans pretty badly, but at the same time, tribal holdings are easier to conquer the old-fashioned way.

The next slider, technology, gives you three choices: Historical (tends to concentrate early game tech in traditional “civilized” centers of learning), Flat (everyone's on the same footing, based mainly around the historical start year you choose for your game), and Random (although it won't slide too far off the start year's level of tech, advances will be randomly distributed rather than concentrated historically.)

I Dub Thee Emir of Groove-Funkistan

The last set of sliders relate to de jure duchies and kingdoms. Do you want the Kingdom of Arabia to be in... well... Arabia? Or would you rather have something much wackier?

Note that if you randomize the de jure realms, you can choose how big they are, and therefore how much conquering you'll have to do before you can form one. Fewer is better if you don't want to rely too heavily on vassals; more is better if you want a challenge of keeping a realm from disintegrating while you vie for the crown.

The same warning applies here as applies to religion. If you want to spend more time playing and less time sorting out the Tower of Babel story you just inflicted on the world by randomizing all the names, it might behoove you to change the flavor of the game mechanics without necessarily changing so much that the world is too foreign for you to understand while you're already playing one of the most complex games this side of Dwarf Fortress.

But if you do become the Emir of Groove-Funkistan, don't forget the burnoose.

Actually Playing This Weird World You've Built

At the end of the day? This is still Crusader Kings 2. Absolutely everything in the game functions according to the same rules (including the new rules the DLC adds that will present themselves over the course of your playthroughs, which we'll cover elsewhere or which you can read about on the CK2 Wiki or the Paradox forums) as it always has.

The difference is that if you've just thrown yourself into a world of petty fiefdoms vying to become the emperor of the known world, you're going to actually have to formulate a fresh strategy that may have nothing at all to do with how a “normal” person plays the game wherever it is you've spawned.

That, ultimately, is the most fun and challenging part of Shattered and Random Worlds. The history books all burned. It's up to you to write a new one.

Taiko no Tatsujin: Drum 'n' Fun: How to Fight the Motion Controls & Almost Win Tue, 13 Nov 2018 15:47:00 -0500 Ashley Shankle

Any rhythm game fan has heard of the Taiko no Tatsujin series, whether they've played it or not. Arcade cabinets with huge Japanese taiko drums, loud music, and more BOOM BOOM BOOM BASS than pretty much any other rhythm game. That's the one. 

Recently, the West got its second-ever taste of this long-running series, with Taiko no Tatsujin: Drum 'n' Fun releasing on the Nintendo Switch and Drum Session! making its way to the PlayStation 4.

This is an exciting time for rhythm fans because both games have been minimally changed from their Japanese-release counterparts, unlike Taiko Drum Master on the PlayStation 2, which featured its very own tracklist of terrible covers of English songs... and the North American Dragon Ball Z theme. But hey, at least it came with a drum.

The Nintendo Switch's motion control option and the sheer nostalgia from the inclusion of Cha-la Head Cha-la from Dragon Ball Z pushed me toward purchasing Drum 'n' Fun over Drum Session! first.

This was probably a mistake.

The motion control issue

Drum 'n' Fun has three separate innate control options: pressing buttons on the Joy-Con, using the touchscreen, and using the Joy-Con motion controls. The first two are great, the third is almost torturous.

I've played a few Switch games that use motion controls before and it's gone fine, but not many titles -- or even genres -- require the sort of precise inputs and timing rhythm games demand. The Joy-Cons are not up to the task of accurately air drumming.

Three things happen on the regular with motion controls:

  • Phantom tapping, particularly after a drum roll or other rapid-note segments
  • The gyro not reading the direction the Joy-Cons are tilted when trying to hit Ka instead of Don
  • The Joy-Cons not reading an input even though you definitely made a motion

I do not know how some Japanese players are able to clear Extreme difficulty using the Joy-Cons, but after playing for a week or so, I'm fairly confident you either have to be in the top percentage bracket for wrist control worldwide or be some sort of Joy-Con wizard.

But enough complaining -- if you're like me, you may want to push forward with the Joy-Cons anyway, in part due to the challenge and perhaps, in part, because buying those drums costs over $100 and you don't have that kind of scratch right now.

Dealing with the Joy-Cons

So you're a masochist, huh? Cool.

Learning to play somewhat competently with the Joy-Cons takes form and practice. Drum 'n' Fun's built-in tutorials are basically useless, so you're somewhat on your own outside of this barebones text guide and some videos of players having at it.

Before I get to my personal tips, take a look at the tutorial video from the official Japanese website. You don't need to understand what's being said to get the gist.

If you're like most players, you're probably having a lot of trouble hitting Ka (blue) notes reliably. As you can see in the video above, to hit them on a regular basis you have to tilt/twist the Joy-Con to a 45-degree angle -- but, this isn't something you'll actually have to do in full once you're used to the Joy-Cons.

These bits of advice are supposed to help you acclimate yourself to drumming using the Joy-Cons, but in time, you will find your own methods that work.

When I first decided to learn to make the Joy-Cons bow before my will, I stuck hard to these rules. As I became more familiar with the overall wonkiness of the motion controls, I loosened up and found other methods and positions that worked better for me.

Here are some tips. 

Hold the Joy-Cons so they are fully in your hands to start

Don't grab half the Joy-Con, grab the whole thing like your life depends on it.

As you get better, you'll find holding positions that may work better for you but to start, grip the entirety of the Joy-Con to ensure there's no wobble to your hits.

Flick the wrist; don't move your whole arm

This gets painful if you've got the ol' carpal tunnel, but flicking your wrists is the quickest and easiest way to get the Joy-Cons to read your movement accurately.

The game will not ever accurately read wide, broad arm strokes, and on more difficult songs, you simply do not have the time for broad strokes. Stick to wrist flicking and move your way up to forearm motions as you become more comfortable.

Choose your resting angle

How do you hold your Joy-Cons when idle? One might say you can hold them in any position, but you have to think about how your wrists and arms are going to move and what angle they're coming from for semi-accurate motion readings.

After watching some videos, I started holding my Joy-Cons at a 90-degree upward angle. This did help, but over time, I've started being more relaxed and hold them tilted a little more forward. After all, your motions are what matter most.

You don't have to hold your Joy-Cons at a 90- or even 45-degree angle (you can hold them horizontally, even), but the goal is for you to learn to control your wrists and arms from a stationary position. Choose an angle and try to stick with it, but adjust if you don't feel you're getting accurate timings or are getting the wrong notes.

Ka woes, angle-swiping, and the game's newb-friendliness

As mentioned earlier, the only way to always get the game to recognize your Ka hits is to swipe the Joy-Cons at a 45-degree angle inward. You may have to do this particularly hard as you get used to hitting these notes but as with everything else mentioned here, your motions will become more fluid as you familiarize yourself with the control wonkiness.

There is one aspect the game fails to ever mention and may very well be a fun-killer: Drum 'n' Fun reads Don and Ka independently, but as one another.

What this means is, you can hit Dons for Kas and vice versa. You could theoretically play the game hitting nothing but Don notes and it will read them as Ka notes in the appropriate places.

I really dislike this "feature," but with the motion controls being what they are... I'll take it. If you don't believe me on this, go test it out. You'll find out pretty quickly the game does not care which note you are hitting, it only cares about timing. A bummer for sure.

Phantom notes, a.k.a. the drum roll plague, a.k.a. choose a character who will do them for you

If you have done a drum roll even once in Drum 'n' Fun, you've felt one or both of your Joy-Cons let off a phantom note. Clearly, they do not like being shaken.

In a game that requires such accuracy, these phantom notes are full combo killers. The only way to win versus these phantom notes is to cut out the middleman and not do them at all.

Luckily Drum 'n' Fun allows you to choose characters, each with their own skills. Currycutta is the first character you'll get who will take that burden off your shoulders as it will auto-drum roll and do balloons. That leaves only one rapid-drum variation left, and those are generally manageable.

This is kind of a crappy way to get around the game hitting phantom notes, but I will say that it has significantly increased my enjoyment of the game as phantom notes happen far less frequently if you just let the game do drum rolls for you. Again, this is kind of crappy because doing drum rolls is really fun and it's an integral part of the Taiko no Tatsujin experience.


I don't know if I'm crazy or I just hate myself, but I'm going to keep playing with the Joy-Cons until I either get Drum Session! with a PS4 drum and Switch adapter. I've never rage-played anything to this extent in my entire life.

Perhaps it's simply excitement or love for the Taiko no Tatsujin series, who knows. All I know is I can't stop playing regardless of the motion controls being less-than-desirable. Getting good enough to reliably play Hard or even Extreme with these things is going to require a lot more control than I have.

Hopefully, my advice will help you on your path to Taiko enlightenment, but let's be real: It's a lot easier and more fun to shell out $100+ for a drum than it is to even do halfway well in Drum 'n' Fun using the motion controls.

Fallout 76 Legendary Modifiers Guide Tue, 13 Nov 2018 15:26:37 -0500 Ty Arthur

The wait is over -- Fallout 76 launched early, so you can get in on the post apocalyptic multiplayer mayhem right now!

Just like in Fallout 4, special equipment can drop from enemies with a star next to their name that includes additional Legendary modifiers. These modifiers radically alter the equipment's base properties or give them huge advantages over standard weapons.

You'll know you've got a Legendary if you see a short word modifier before the weapon, like Acrobat's, Exterminator's, or Ghoul Hunter's. Below we cover all the effects current discovered.

It's entirely possible there are far more than these effects that just haven't been found yet, as the list is obviously much smaller than in Fallout 4 at the moment.

Have you seen any other Legendary modifiers not listed in the tables below? Let us know and we'll get them added!

Fallout 76 Legendary Armor Modifiers

Legendary Property Effect
 Acrobat  -50% falling damage
 Assassin  -15% damage from humans
 Auto Stim  Use stimpack automatically when below 40% health
 Bolstering  Increased damage resistance when at lower health
 Cavalier  -15% damage when sprinting or blocking
 Chameleon  Reduced enemy detection when stationary or sneaking
 Duelist  10% chance to disarm melee weapon from enemy
 Exterminator  -15% damage from bugs and mirelurks
 Ghoul Slayer  -15% damage from ghouls
 Hunter  -15% damage from animals
 Junky  Reduced damage when suffering from chem withdrawal
 Mutant Slayer  -15% damage from super mutants
 Sprinter  +10% movement speed
 Troubleshooter  -15% damage from robots
 Undying  50% chance to use stim pack while downed
 Weightless  -50% total weight
 Zealot  -15% damage from scorched


Fallout 76 Legendary Weapon Effects

Legendary Property Effect
Anti-Scorched   +25% damage vs scorched, -20% vs all others
 Anti-Armor  Ignore 50% armor
Assassin   +10% damage to other players
Berserker   Deal more damage if your Resistance is lower
 Bloodied  Deal more damage if your health is lower
Concussive   +33% hit chance in VATS
 Double  Double weapon magazine size
 Executioner  +50% damage if target is below 40$ health
 Explosive  Ammo explodes for 15 area damage
Exterminator   +50% damage against bugs and mirelurks
 Furious  Additional damage on subsequent hits against same target
Ghoul Slayer   +50% damage vs ghouls
 Hunter  +50% damage vs animals
  Instigating  Double damage when target is at 100% health
 Junky  Additional damage if you have chem withdrawal
 Medic  Heal your group when inflicting VATS crits
 Mutant  +10% damage if you have a mutation
 Mutant Slayer  +30% damage vs super mutants
Never Ending   Infinite ammo supply
 Nocturnal  Extra damage at night, less damage during day
 Quad  4X standard ammo capacity
Sacrificial Blade  Deals additional bleed and poison damage
 Stalker  +100% VATS accuracy at+50% AP cost if not in combat
 Suppressor  Target deals 20% less damage for 3 seconds after being hit
 Troubleshooter  +30% damage vs robots
 Two Shot  Fire one additional round per attack
 Vampiric  Heal after striking an enemy
 Zealot  +30% damage vs ghouls


Fallout 76 Unique Weapons

Weapon Special Effect
 All Rise (Super sledge)  -90% weight, +10 HP
Blade Of Bastet (Chinese officer sword)  Increased armor penetration
Black Diamond (Ski sword)  +1 Strength to wielder
Bunker Buster (Missile launcher)  +20% damage
 Guitar Sword (Sword)  Currently unknown -- let us know if you find this weapon!
 Makeshift Rifle (Assault rifle)  Bonus damage when HP below 40%
 Perfect Storm (10mm SMG)  Incendiary bullets deal damage over time
 Rose's Syringer (Syringe launcher)  Makes target extra powerful for 60 seconds, then extra weak for 60 seconds
 Voice Of Set (.44 pistol)  Bonus damage vs robots


Need more help getting started in the open world wasteland of this series spin off? Check out our other Fallout 76 guides here:

The Three Best Beginner Builds in Fallout 76 Tue, 13 Nov 2018 12:42:44 -0500 Sergey_3847

Fallout 76 is finally coming out in its full form, and if you didn't have the chance to try the game out during the beta test, then you will probably have a hard time getting to know all the perk cards available in the game from the start.

Having a plan before playing such a complex game as Fallout 76 is essential for effective survival gameplay. Fortunately, you can use helpful resources, such as Nukes and Dragons to pre-construct your SPECIAL builds and figure out beforehand which cards you want to use in your builds.

If you need help figuring out a powerful build for your first playthrough of Fallout 76, then follow our guide below for the three best beginner builds.

Best Strength Build

The first most logical build you can go for in Fallout 76 is the Strength build, which will give you a lot of APs to play with and a decent number of defense mechanisms.

At the heart of this build you will find three main perks: Strength, Endurance, and Agility. Strength will give you power to weild and damage opponents with melee weapons, while Endurance will let you withstand damage. Lastly, Agility is needed to create enough stamina for you to use during combat.

Here is a complete breakdown of the Strength build for Fallout 76:

  • Strength (15)
    • Gladiator (3)
    • Slugger (3)
    • Shotgunner (3)
    • Pack Rat (3)
    • Basher (1)
    • Sturdy Frame (2)
  • Perception (3)
    • Skeet Shooter (3)
  • Endurance (15)
    • Iron Stomach (3)
    • Natural Resistance (3)
    • Vaccinated (3)
    • Professional Drinker (3)
    • Hydrofix (2)
    • Aquaboy/Aquagirl (1)
  • Charisma (5)
    • Bodyguards (4)
    • Team Medic (1)
  • Intelligence (3)
    • First Aid (3)
  • Agility (9)
    • Action Boy/Girl (3)
    • Born Survivor (3)
    • Dodgy (3)
  • Luck (6)
    • Serendipity (3)
    • Junk Shield (3)

Best Agility Build

Strength is a powerful perk, but having a ton of APs and Luck can also bring some amazing results in the form of this Agility-based build. It is focused mainly on giving a massive advantage to your VATS and reducing any harmful effects that may come from either physical damage or radiation.

This build requires you to carry a good weapon, as it will significantly increase both the targeting precision and the critical hit chance. You can choose to become a very effective sniper or a gunner with the help of this build, so be sure to invest in all these cards if you are interested in this playstyle.

Here is a complete breakdown of the Agility build for Fallout 76:

  • Strength (5)
    • Pack Rat (3)
    • Sturdy Frame (2)
  • Perception (6)
    • Concentrated Fire (3)
    • Crack Shot (3)
  • Endurance (6)
    • Radicool (1)
    • Ghoulish (1)
    • Iron Clad (4)
  • Charisma (4)
    • Lone Wanderer (4)
  • Intelligence (5)
    • Gunsmith (5)
  • Agility (15)
    • Action Boy/Girl (3)
    • Adrenaline (1)
    • Gun Fu (3)
    • Gunslinger (1)
    • Expert Gunslinger (1)
    • Master Gunslinger (1)
    • Evasive (3)
    • Gun Runner (2)
  • Luck (15)
    • Four Leaf Clover (3)
    • Grim Reaper's Sprint (3)
    • Critical Savvy (3)
    • Better Criticals (3)
    • Class Freak (3)

Best Charisma Build

Many players would argue why would they need to play a Charisma build. But this is the type of build that is perfect for players who want to play a support role in their team. So, if you like to play in co-op, then opt for this excellent Charisma build, which also has a huge pool of APs due to several well-chosen Agility perks.

The most important perk card in this entire list is Team Medic, which fully heals your other team members when using stimpaks. This is highly important when your team gets engaged in a PvP combat, and in case the opposing team doesn't have a support player, then it will surely lose.

Here is a complete breakdown of the Charisma build for Fallout 76:

  • Strength (3)
    • Sturdy Frame (2)
    • Strong Back (1)
  • Perception (7)
    • Crack Shot (3)
    • Sniper (1)
    • Concentrated Fire (3)
  • Endurance (5)
    • Ironclad (5)
  • Charisma (15)
    • Team Medic (3)
    • Suppressor (3)
    • Tenderizer (3)
    • Quack Surgeon (1)
    • Squad Maneuvers (2)
    • Rad Sponge (1)
    • Magnetic Personality (2)
  • Intelligence (10)
    • Gunsmith (5)
    • Scrapper (1)
    • First Aid (3)
    • Pharmacist (1)
  • Agility (14)
    • Adrenaline (5)
    • Gunslinger (1)
    • Expert Gunslinger (1)
    • Master Gunslinger (1)
    • White Knight (3)
    • Gun Runner (2)
    • Marathoner (1)
  • Luck (2)
    • Luck of the Draw (2)


With the help of each of these three excellent Fallout 76 beginner builds, you will be able to explore the vast map of West Virginia either in solo mode or provide a real support for your teammates in co-op. Also, be sure to come back soon for even more Fallout 76 guides here at GameSkinny!

Hitman 2: 100% Challenges Guide (Nightcall) Sun, 11 Nov 2018 11:43:06 -0500 Tim White

Each of Hitman 2's missions offers a wide variety of opportunities to inflict creative carnage, but not all of them are easy to uncover. Unlocking 100% of the available challenges in a mission will require patience and planning across several runs.

Note: Each 100% challenge completion guide in this series will only cover mission-specific Assassinations, Feats, and Discoveries. "Classic" challenges are the same across all missions and are straightforward in nature, so they won't be covered here. These guides also assume you've played through the mission at least once and have a basic knowledge of the map and objectives. Since there is a good deal of overlap between many Assassinations and Feats, these guides will offer suggestions on how to complete several at once wherever possible.

Nightcall Discoveries

There are four Discovery challenges in this mission.

WOOD YOU BELIEVE IT? - Find the "driftwood" weapon

You can find several pieces of driftwood on the beach; there's a convenient one near the ruined boathouse due south of the house.

UNDER THE MAT - Find the hidden house key

The hidden house key can be found in this white vase next to the pool (shoot it). Note that the key only unlocks the door right next to it.

DON'T TREAD ON ME - Find a squeaky toy

The squeaky toy can be found behind the bathtub in the second floor bathroom. Another can be found on the floor next to Alma's bed.

DISCOVER HAWKE'S BAY - uncover all map areas

There are six map areas to discover in this mission:

  • Ruined boathouse (on the beach near the default starting location)
  • House exterior
  • House exterior, roof
  • House interior, main floor
  • House interior, second floor/master bedroom
  • House interior, panic room

Nightcall Feats

There are eleven Feats in this mission. Some of them are fairly specific, while others can be completed in a number of ways.

CHAMELEON - Acquire all disguises

There's only one disguise available in this mission, and it can be claimed from any of Alma's bodyguards (except for Orson or the "guard captain," the guy standing next to her when she first enters the house). If you hide in her bedroom as soon as she arrives and wait a bit, a bodyguard will come in shortly and make a convenient target of himself.

NO RUNNING ON THE TILES - Push someone into the pool

Once Alma and her goons come home, one guard will take up a post just outside the door to the pool at the back of the house. Toss a coin as close as possible to the edge of the pool. When he goes to pick it up, cross another Feat off your list. (Beware the patrolling guard who also sometimes comes into the pool area—don't let him see you wax his buddy.)

TASTELESS, TRACELESS - Kill a mission target with poison

There are a number of ways to do this one, and it's one of the five requirements for completing the VERSATILE ASSASSIN Feat. In any case, you need to first retrieve the lethal poison from the second floor bathroom medicine cabinet, which you'll need a lockpick to open. You can find one in the panic room, or bring one in your initial loadout if you've unlocked it.

Once you've got the poison, you can put it in the honey that Alma will eventually put in her tea...

...or you can sneak up to the roof and hide from the guards until Alma goes into the second floor bathroom to brush her teeth. Use the poison on the bathroom air vent to eliminate her; this will also complete the SMELLS LIKE NAIL POLISH challenge.

A third option is to throw a frag grenade on top of the bathroom skylight while she's brushing her teeth (make sure it doesn't kill one of the guards). This will drive Alma and Orson into the panic room, at which point you can use the poison on the panic room vent instead. This will also complete the LIKE FISH IN A BARREL challenge.

ORSON BATHES - Kill Orson with a kitchen knife while he showers

This one is relatively simple. Grab the kitchen knife from the kitchen before Alma and her entourage return home, then stash yourself in the laundry basket in her bedroom and wait. Get comfy, it will be a while.

Wait until Alma and Orson start to get ready for bed; Orson will shower while Alma brushes her teeth. Sneak through the closet and you'll come out right behind the shower stall. You can either stab Orson at close range or throw the knife at him from the closet doorway; the latter is louder and will likely alert Alma, but I nonetheless found it easier to avoid detection this way.

DEATH OF A STATESMAN - Kill Orson by poisoning his whiskey

Since there's only one dose of lethal poison in this mission, you can't do this and poison Alma in the same run. It's easy to pull off, though; use the poison on the glass of whiskey in the master bedroom, then hide in the laundry basket nearby and wait a while.

I recommend also closing the blinds in this room so nobody outside sees the mayhem you'll cause a bit later.

After Orson showers and Alma brushes her teeth, Orson will do some weird sit-ups while Alma goes outside on the balcony. Once he joins her, go hide behind the couch.

The two of them will chat outside for a bit. Orson comes back inside first, but Alma follows soon after, so you need to be quick here. As soon as he drinks the whiskey, drag his body behind the couch such that Alma won't see it when she comes back in—you only have about 3-5 seconds to do this.

STRAIGHT SHOT - Kill a mission target with a headshot

This counts for VERSATILE ASSASSIN and can be done in just about any way you please, but if you want to do it quietly, it's best accomplished right after completing DEATH OF A STATESMAN. Once Alma turns the lights off, no guards will come into her room again, so you can shoot her in the head whenever you like. (Hide the body afterward, because there's a chance one of the roof guards might see her through the skylight.)

If you're looking to be as efficient as possible, simply completing the MR. SANDMAN Feat will satisfy this requirement as well. You can also complete the Assassination challenges LIKE FISH IN A BARREL or A CLEAN KILL by shooting her in the head (through the skylight of the panic room, in the former case).

SOMEONE COULD HURT THEMSELVES - Kill a mission target via an accident kill

Nightcall contains fewer accident kill opportunities than most of the other missions do—I've outlined two possibilities here. An accident kill is also a requirement for VERSATILE ASSASSIN.

The easiest way to do this is to use emetic rat poison on the honey before Alma comes home, then hide in this closet outside the first floor bathroom and wait for her to drink the tea.

Once she enters the bathroom to puke her guts out, sneak up behind her and drown her in the toilet to complete this challenge and HOLD MY HAIR at the same time. Oddly enough, this still counts as an accident even if you hide her body afterward.

You can also complete this Feat by waiting until just before Alma goes to bed, then pushing her over the balcony railing while she leans on it to talk to the guards below. It's very difficult to do this without being detected, but if you can manage it (perhaps by throwing something behind the guards so they turn around), it will count as an accident.

PIANO MAN and/or HOLD MY HAIR - Kill Alma with the fiber wire/by drowning her

Both of these Feats are required for VERSATILE ASSASSIN and are easily accomplished by luring Alma into the bathroom after using emetic rat poison on the honey as described above. Once she stars throwing up, you're perfectly positioned to drown or garrote her, which will check off HOLD MY HAIR or PIANO MAN, respectively.

MR. SANDMAN - Kill Alma with a headshot from the roof while she's sleeping

This Feat requires the least work, but the most patience. Simply head up to the roof as soon as the gang gets home and wait until she goes to bed and falls asleep, which takes 5-10 minutes. Shoot her in the head through the skylight and you're done. If you care about doing this quietly, you may want to kill Orson and hide his body before Alma goes to bed. Completing this Feat also satisfies STRAIGHT SHOT and will count toward VERSATILE ASSASSIN.

VERSATILE ASSASSIN - Complete five other specified Feats

To complete this one, you need to do all five of the following:


Nightcall Assassination Challenges

There are five Assassination challenges in this mission.

SUGAR, HONEY, HONEY - Kill Alma by poisoning her tea

Use the lethal poison on the honey in the kitchen, then wait for Alma to drink the tea. This is the only way to complete this challenge, as she never eats or drinks anything else.

LIKE FISH IN A BARREL - Kill Alma from the roof while she's in the panic room

It can be tricky to drive Alma into the panic room; sometimes she will run for one of the vehicles outside, or simply summon all her guards to kill you. I've found that the most reliable method is to wait until she's brushing her teeth, then throw a single frag grenade on top of the bathroom skylight.

Once she's in the panic room, you can kill her any way you like: by shooting her through the glass, with a proximity mine placed ahead of time, or by poisoning the panic room vent with lethal poison. Get creative.

SMELLS LIKE NAIL POLISH - Kill Alma by sabotaging the bathroom vent system

Simply use lethal poison on the bathroom vent as described in the TASTELESS, TRACELESS section above.

A CLEAN KILL - Kill Alma while Orson is in the shower

This can be done in any way you like, as long as Orson is in the shower at the time.

SLEEP TIGHT - Kill Alma by smothering her in her sleep

If you care about doing this quietly, you may want to kill or subdue Orson and hide his body before Alma goes to bed. Once she does, simply sneak over to her and follow the prompt.

There you have it! It will take several runs, but you now know all you need to know in order to fully complete Nightcall.

Keep an eye out for more Hitman 2 guides right here on GameSkinny as we get them posted.

HellSign Early Access Beginner's Guide To Clues And Monster Hunting Sun, 11 Nov 2018 11:05:56 -0500 Ty Arthur

Paranormal investigation ARPG HellSign has finally hit Early Access, which means its time to start searching haunted houses for clues while avoiding grisly death at the hands of ghouls, shadow beasts, giant spiders, and other unpleasant creatures.

Having a hard time figuring out how to survive and make money as a scout? We've got you covered with a full run down on getting all the clues and making it out alive!

Important Note: All of the info below is based on the update after the initial launch of Early Access. Things are expected to change radically as development progresses. If you notice anything out of date or wrong, please let us know so we can update the article with new info!

Finding Clues

When searching for clues in a scouting mission, note that sometimes the clues are outside the house in the surrounding area (like the second EMF clue in the tutorial mission)

The best way to tackle each house is to sweep a room with your gun out in case enemies appear, then quickly switch to the EMF to hear if an object is nearby. If there's no sound, put the EMF away.

If there's a corpse in the room, pull out the blacklight and check for a blood trail. If there isn't one, switch to the gun again. Repeat the process with each room to most efficiently search a house in minimal time.

Using The Black Light

In theory, the black light should always start at a dead body and lead through a blood trail to a clue on the floor near where the trail ends. In execution, not every body has a blood trail, and sometimes the object isn't anywhere close to where the trail ends.

Don't forget the blood trail leads both directions. If you can't find the object at the end of the trail, go back to the body and search all the objects around it, as the body may be the end of the trail rather than the beginning.

This lack of clarity is particularly frustrating in the opening tutorial mission, as the final black light clue isn't outside where you use the EMF meter. Instead, the second black light tutorial clue is found back inside the house and doesn't have a blood trail at all.

To complete the tutorial, just use the black light on every object in the house (closets, drawers, paintings, etc.) until you hit the random object that has the clue.

The developer is currently compiling a list of issues with the black light and need info and screenshots to resolve the problems. If you've got a specific issue being unable to find a black light clue or where you can't see blood splatter, head over here and log a report.

Accessing Locked Rooms

Many players are reporting problems finding the last clue in a house, and that clue is usually behind locked doors.

This isn't explained anywhere in the game, but you actually can enter the locked rooms, and they aren't permanently closed by poltergeists.

You just have to upgrade to any weapon besides the nailgun. Hold right click with the weapon selected and aim at the doorknob to blow off the lock and enter the room. You'll know you have the aim right when a white circle appears.

Finding All Clues

Keep in mind that you can't always find every clue in a house with the basic starting equipment of all the game's classes.

Some clues require more than the EMF meter and black light. When you select a location to scout, the summary on the right lists what equipment is required to find all clues, with the parabolic mic frequently needed in addition to the starting equipment.


First and foremost -- in the early stages of the game you aren't meant to complete a full scouting mission and get every clue in a house. The enemies are too overpowering with your current equipment.

If you die constantly, just grab a single clue, then go back to your van and leave. Sell the clue to the fixer at the bar, then repeat the process again on another scouting mission.

When you have enough cash, go buy a better weapon before trying to seriously tackle the combat. The Poor Man's Colt is one of the best starting weapons to buy, as it deals enough damage to take out spiders in a single shot but can be purchased fairly early.

If you find you just absolutely cannot survive the early monster encounters, start over and pick the Stalker class, as you begin the game with a shotgun instead of the revolver.

Finally, remember that finding multiple clues in a house and using them in your Cryptonomicon gives you bonuses against enemies in the area, which will be a necessity to surviving the bigger creatures and the bosses.


The game again doesn't tell you this, but the powerful poltergeist attack can in fact be dodged! It seems like an unavoidable cut scene, but it isn't.

When the screen shakes, wait for an object in the room to rise up in the air, then dodge roll just before it flies at you and breaks. This saves you a ton of health for the rest of the house.


These are the bane of your existence until you figure out the wonky combat due to their skittering movement that makes aiming impossible.

To more easily manage the spiders, dodge roll away into an area with only one tight entrance, like a hallway, bathroom, or an outside area with a short deck. They will pop out one by one, and can easily be dispatched by aiming at the ground.


For the centipede, note that he can crawl under closed doors, so there's no point in trying to lure him into a tight space.

Look for an area where you aren't going to get stuck on a door or overturned piece of furniture. When he approaches, listen for the sound of his body cracking like a whip, as that's the exact moment you need to dodge roll away to avoid taking damage.

It's best to get off a single shot before dodge rolling, then wait for the centipede to run away and come back. Shooting while he's fleeing is just a waste of bullets in most cases.


Those are all the basics you need to know to get started and begin investigating areas on your own in the first chapter of the game!

Do you have any other combat or clue tips we missed? Sound off and let us know your strategy in the comments below!

Hitman 2: 5-star Silent Assassin Guide (The Finish Line) Sat, 10 Nov 2018 11:01:55 -0500 Tim White

Remember, there are nearly infinite routes you can take to attain a 5-star rating in Hitman 2. This is but one path of many, but it's one you can easily complete on your first attempt with basic equipment.

No time to waste—in order to secure a 5-star ranking on your first run through this mission, when you don’t have any extra items at your disposal, you’ll need to move fairly quickly. Immediately hang a left and head down these stairs.

Take the tunnel to the large plaza nearby and go to the water’s edge. Pick a bench and have a seat to blend in. You’re looking for this douchey military guy. After a moment, he’ll make a phone call. Once you’ve overheard the whole thing, a new Mission Story will be revealed.

Jog over to the outdoor maintenance area just down the sidewalk, where a guy in a white shirt and a security guard will be hanging around. Pick up the coconut on the ground, then head into the maintenance area and grab the shovel.

The military dude will be here momentarily. Once he arrives, toss the shovel against the far wall in the maintenance area. He’ll hear the racket and come to investigate. Bean him in the dome with the coconut once he’s out of the security guard’s line of sight. (I suppose you could just choke him out, but come on, a coconut to the brain cage is way funnier.)

Take his clothes, then drag his body to one side of the enclosure. There’s no container to hide it in, but that’s okay, nobody ever comes in here. Run over to the large building across the plaza, head inside, and check in with the receptionist. Be careful in the lobby and throughout the rest of the building—there are cameras here and there. Don’t get spotted by them.

She’ll direct you to the stairs on the right. Head that way, stopping on the first landing to snag the photo of Robert Knox from the magazine rack.

Check in with this woman at the top of the stairs and follow her all the way to the demonstration room.

Your first target, Robert Knox, will either already be there or he will arrive shortly. Hang around until he’s given his long sales speech, at which point he will scan a photo into the killer robot to make it shoot a dummy target. Wait for him to go downrange, then use the photo of Robert Knox on the killer robot to make it ventilate him.

This counts as an accident kill and an unnoticed kill, even though everyone else clearly saw you do it. Oh well, you know what they say about gift horses.

One down, one to go. Run all the way back down to the main lobby and find the expo room. It’s hard to see, but you’re looking for a staff area behind one of the displays—check the screenshot for reference.

Go through this door…

...then hang a left and go through this door at the end of the walkway.

Head down these stairs…

...and into the security room at the bottom. Be quiet—there’s a sleeping guard in here. Tiptoe past him and go through this door in the back.

Near the vending machines to your right, you’ll see a dude dressed as a flamingo, chatting on his phone. This is your second Mission Story opportunity.

Listen to the entire conversation, then approach him. He’ll ask you to go fetch his car keys from the end of the hallway. Be a good Samaritan and oblige him. Hand the keys over and let him start toward the garage.

Choke him out or otherwise knock him out non-lethally as he’s passing the security room. Take his flamingo suit and reclaim the car keys, then drag him to the dumpster in the garage and stash him there. (Unless you found a security keycard somewhere, in which case you can dump him in the locker in the security room.)

Head to the big black van in the garage and open it with the car keys. Grab the incriminating evidence within.

Double back to the main garage hallway and head up these stairs.

At the top, turn right and go this way.

These two guards will let you pass. Head down the stairs behind them.

Follow the tunnel all the way down. At the top of the exit stairs, look to your left. Go talk to this guy and show him the incriminating evidence.

Once he lets you inside, have a seat in this chair and wait for Sierra Knox to show up. It may be a few minutes, depending on whether or not the race is almost over. (This is why you’ve needed to move quickly until now—if you take too long to kill her father, the race will end and you’ll miss this convenient assassination opportunity.)

Once she arrives, she’ll blather at you a bit, then tell you to follow her. Cooperate. She’ll lead you down an alley with about five of her guards. If she were remotely intelligent, she would just have them kill you, but luckily, she isn’t. She will do the opposite of the smart thing and order her guards away.

Let her finish her speech, then hand over the incriminating evidence when she asks for it. She will step over to the edge of a very deep hole in the ground to burn the evidence and throw it away, still yammering. You know what to do.

After this, her guards shouldn’t be alerted. You can pretty much just walk right out of the mission using any unlocked exit you fancy—just make sure not to get spotted by guards in an area your current disguise doesn’t grant you clearance for.

Well done! There’s your second 5-star rating.

Check out our other guides on Hitman 2, including more silent assassin walkthroughs!

Fallout 76 Tips and Tricks Guide to Survive in The Wasteland Fri, 09 Nov 2018 11:00:34 -0500 Sergey_3847

In order to grasp the scope and complexity of all mechanics available in Fallout 76 players will need to spend hours upon hours of gameplay. The main aspect of the game is survivability and exploration, which may turn out to be not as simple as many players think, including the die hard fans of the franchise.

That is why it's so important to be prepared before venturing out into the unknown areas of post-apocalyptic West Virginia. Whether you played the beta or not, it is super important to learn as much as you can about Fallout 76.

So follow our beginner's guide below for some of the most essential tips that will help you survive the early game.

Basic Survival Tips and Tricks

Time to camp in Fallout 76

The very first thing you need to do in the game is to pick up your CAMP system in the vault and set up your CAMP outside of the vault. CAMP is your movable base, where you can rest, cook and craft all sorts of things in your Workshop.

You will need things like cooking pot for making food and bottles for keeping clean water, which can be obtained by a simple process of boiling. Don't eat raw food or drink water with parasites, as it may result in all sorts of negative effects on your character's health. Just take your time and eat well, drink well, and rest well, as these are the most important survival elements of the game.

Your CAMP also serves as the fast travel point, so place it somewhere safe. Set up a bed inside and take a nap whenever you need to restore health. Later on you will be able to regen health using Stimpaks, but in the early stages of the game sleeping is your best option.

When you have your CAMP all set up, your most basic needs satisfied, and your first melee weapon and armor crafted at the Workshop you can start exploring the map. This is important for gaining experience and leveling up your character.

Managing Your Loot and Inventory

Fallout 76 inventory management

Every single piece of loot in Fallout 76 is valuable, simply because every item is unique and spawns only once. For example, if you've picked up items from a certain place, the other player who comes across the same location will not be able to get that loot anymore.

That is why you should pick up everything you see, because next time it may not be there anymore. On top of that, every piece of junk can be turned into scrap, which in its turn can be used for crafting and repairing your weapons and armor or expanding your base.

So make sure to fill your inventory with as much loot as you can find. At one point, of course, you will find yourself overencumbered, and this is where you will need to use Workshop for utilizing all the junk you have picked up. This will lighten up you significantly, but that's not the only way to carry even more stuff.

Looting in Fallout 76

One of the best inventory management mechanics applied in Fallout 76 is the Stash system. You can find Stashes all over the map and keep valuable but not emergency stuff in them. Although Stashes are open for use to all players, you will find only your items inside them. Besides finding Stashes out in the open world you can build one inside your C.A.M.P. just like Workshop.

But Stash is not always available, so it's much better to carry as much stuff as you can on your own. For this reason you can put SPECIAL points into your Strength perk, which will increase your carrying capacity significantly. It also makes your melee attacks much more dangerous.

Lastly, there are certain mutations that can increase your carrying capacity even further than that. But that is not something you should rely on, and just use the safe methods described above.

Perks, SPECIALs and Mutations

FO76 Rad Sponge Perk

SPECIAL points and perks go hand-in-hand in Fallout 76. You will get points and packs of cards that define your perks when you reach a certain level. You can put SPECIAL points into your perks, thus increasing the number of active cards per slot.

The maximum number of SPECIAL points per one perk is 15, which means that you can have up to 15 active slots. However, slots are occupied not by single cards, but rather by the number of stars in the cards. They can have one or more stars in their right bottom corner indicating how many slots each card occupies.

For example, if you have five slots available in a perk, you can put either five cards with one star in them or one card with two stars and another with three, and so on. This means that you should pay close attention to which cards you include in your perk slots, as you will not be able to reset them later.

In addition to your perks you can get a mutation that may have either a positive or a negative effect on your stats. You can get a mutation by letting yourself get irradiated.

Here is the list of all current possible mutations and their effects in Fallout 76: 

Mutation Positive Effects Negative Effects
Chameleon Invisibility while unarmored and standing still N/A
Bird Bones AG +4, Fall from heights more gradual STR -4
Eagle Eyes Critical Damage +25%, PER +4 STR -4
Egg Head INT +6 STR -3, END -3
Electrically Charged Chance to shock melee attackers N/A
Unstable Isotope  Chance to irradiate melee attackers N/A
Empath  Damage taken by teammates -25% Damage taken by player +33%
Grounded Energy Resistance +100 Energy Damage -20%
Healing Factor Health Regeneration +300% Chem Effects -55%
Herbivore Vegetables provides x2 benefit and no disease Cannot eat meat
Carnivore Meat provides x2 benefit and no disease Cannot eat vegetables
Plague walker Poison aura scaling with your diseases N/A
Marsupial Carry weight +20, +jump height INT -4
Scaly skin Damage and Energy Resistance +50 AP -25
Shell shock N/A N/A
Speed Demon Movement speed +20, faster reload N/A
Talons Punching attacks do 25% more damage + bleed damage AGI -4
Twisted Muscles Melee damage +25%, better chance to cripple limbs Gun accuracy -50%
Herd Mentality All SPECIAL stats +2 when grouped All SPECIAL stats -2 when solo
Adrenal Reaction Weapon DMG and quick health regen at low HP Max HP -50


PvP Combat and First Build

PvP enabled at level 5

The pivotal moment of the game starts as soon as you reach level 5, which will opens up all the true dangers of Fallout 76. This is when you will get the option to either make friends or enemies.

Obviously, it is better to play in a friendly manner as in this way you will achieve much more together. However, you will meet players who will openly attack you or one of your teammates, which will indicate that the time for some PvP action has begun.

But you can avoid PvP and simply not engage. This simple action will protect you from getting a lot of damage, and even if the attacker will somehow manage to kill you, then the trouble awaits. Other players will be able to hunt them for a bounty.

If you're traveling alone, never engage in a PvP combat with a group of players, which will most likely not go too well for you. Unless you are very well equipped and trust your build. Below you can find one of the better builds for your character that will work great up to level 15.

Beginner Melee Build

It's important to note that melee combat in the beginning of the game is your best option. You will not be able to find or craft good ranged weapons early on, but you will get to hit people in close combat for a lot of damage using these perk cards for your melee build for Fallout 76:

Best Perks and Cards
  • Strength
    • Gladiator: increases one-handed melee weapons damage
    • Slugger: increases two-handed melee weapons damage
  • Charisma
    • Lone Wanderer: take less damage and regen AP faster in solo
  • Agility
    • Action Boy: faster AP regen
  • Intelligence
    • Makeshift Warrior: melee weapons break more slowly
  • Luck
    • Serendipity: take less damage at low health

You will be able to get all these cards before level 10, so if you are interested in building an effective early melee build, then take these perks into consideration.

Best Armor and Weapons

If you've played previous Fallout games from Bethesda, then you should be well aware that the best armor in the game is Power Armor. If you can find one early in Fallout 76, then you will be out of competition in both PvE and PvP combat.

The best two melee weapons are both two-handed: Machete and Fire Axe. Machete can be easily crafted in the beginning of the game. These two weapons work great with the Slugger perk, which will further increase their damage.


These beginner tips and tricks for Fallout 76 should help you start the game on the right foot, but be sure to come back soon for even more Fallout 76 guides here at GameSkinny!

Hitman 2: 5-star Silent Assassin Guide (Nightcall) Fri, 09 Nov 2018 10:23:23 -0500 Tim White

Achieving the highest possible mission ratings in the Hitman series has always been challenging, but flexible. In Hitman 2, 5-star ratings have several strict but general requirements:

  • No kills other than the main target(s)
  • Don't trigger any alarms
  • Never be detected by enemies
  • No bodies discovered
  • Never be detected by cameras
    • If you are spotted by cameras, you can still get a perfect rating if you manage to find and destroy the security hub somewhere in the mission

Beyond that, you're free to complete the missions however you choose—and there are a ton of ways to creatively dispatch each target. This guide will show you just one relatively easy way to guarantee a Silent Assassin rating in Nightcall, Hitman 2's prologue/tutorial mission.


You begin the mission on a windy beach with a ritzy house nearby. There's no need to sneak around just yet; there won't be any enemies around until a bit later on.

Make your way around the back of the house, taking care to avoid or shoot the cameras on the outside walls. You're looking for an open back door to the pool area.

Pick up the screwdriver near the diving board, then head around to the garage and use it on the breaker box nearby to open the garage door.

Gathering Intel

Once inside, you'll need to find four pieces of intel. Before you get too far into the house, though, be sure to snag the emetic rat poison from one of the shelves in the garage storage area. The kitchen is the next room you'll come to; use the rat poison on the jar of honey on the counter (you'll thank me later).

The first intel folder can be found on the coffee table in the living room.

From here, head up the stairs and grab intel folder #2 from the bedside table in the master bedroom.

Now head over to the office on the second floor and try to access the computer. You'll be told you need a password, and that there's a secret room somewhere nearby. Activate Instinct and look around to spot a suspicious-looking painting—go mess with it.

You'll find a room full of guns and goodies, as well as intel item #3: a whiteboard with some nefarious plans scribbled on it.

Grab some weapons if you'd like, but you won't be using them—we're after a perfect rating, remember? That means no non-target kills! Do grab a few frag grenades, though; they'll come in handy later. Be sure to snag the lockpick and the password dongle from the workbench in this room, then head back to the computer and try logging in again. (The security hub is also in this room, if you need to do any video editing.)

Dropping the Target

After a cutscene, you'll have the final intel item, but the homeowner (Alma) and her goons arrive to crash the party. She looks like a tea drinker, doesn't she? I think so too. Stay low behind the upstairs railing until everyone on the ground floor is facing away from you, then sneak down the stairs and hang a left into the first floor bathroom.

Pass through it into the den/storeroom beyond, and hide in the closet. Get comfy and wait just a few minutes.

Soon enough, Alma will ask one of her thugs to make her some tea—with honey. Stay patient and quiet; she'll make a phone call, then meander over to her tea, which you showed remarkable foresight in "modifying" earlier. Once she does, you'll hear her complain that she needs to find a bathroom. Wait until she enters the bathroom you just passed through, then sneak up behind her. You can either drown her in the toilet, or use the fiber wire to garrote her. Don't shoot her or use a bladed weapon—her guards might notice blood on the floor and raise an alarm. Be sure to hide her body in the closet you were just hiding in.

Clean Getaway

Now it's time to get out. The first floor has two or three dudes wandering around, but they're not very perceptive. Wait for an opening, then sneak past them to the garage hallway. Use the lockpick to open the back door, then quickly find some cover in the tall grass outside.

From here, it's a relatively simple matter of staying low and patiently making your way back to the boat. One or two guards may wander into your path; equip a coin and toss it away to distract them, then sneak past.

When you get to the boat, you'll find it guarded by three guys that never move. So close, and yet so far!

You could simply blast them, but then you'd lose your perfect rating that you've worked so hard for. Instead, equip a frag grenade. (You grabbed some from the safe room when I told you to, right?)

Toss one well away from your boat, then sneak over to it when the goons leave to investigate. If they start to move back toward the boat, be ready to quickly toss a second grenade to distract them again. Quickly approach the front of the boat and activate it to end the mission.

Congratulations! By the time the guards figure out their boss is toast, you'll be long gone.

Look for other Hitman 2 guides as we write them up here on GameSkinny.

Red Dead Redemption 2 Guide: All Legendary Revolvers Locations Thu, 08 Nov 2018 10:26:14 -0500 Sergey_3847

There is a fair number of really decent weapons of the Wild West era in Red Dead Redemption 2. But this wouldn't be a good game if it didn't offer a few unique legendary weapons that are very well hidden on the map.

Some of the legendary revolves that can be found in RDR2 not only look good, but also have stats that are generally much better than those of your ordinary in-game weapons.

If you want to find all the available legendary revolvers in the game, then follow our complete locations guide below.

Otis Miller’s Revolver

One of the most accurate and prettiest weapons in RDR2 made of ivory and gold is the Otis Miller’s Revolver, which can be obtained during the game's Epilogue only.

You will find it in the northern part of the New Austin region at the Cholla Springs. There go to Rattlesnake Hollow, which is located west of Twin Rocks.

Inside one of the caves you will find a chest with several items, one of which is the legendary Otis Miller’s Revolver. Since this is a unique weapon it cannot be customized.

Micah's Revolver

Before getting the Micah's Revolver you need to finish the game's main questline. After the game credits start rolling, you can continue playing.

Return to Mount Hagen, where Micah died at the end of American Venom mission. You should already know the location, but in any case here's the map below.

Mount Hagen is located in Grizzlies West in the southwest of the Ambarino territory. When you are back at the location, find Micah's body and you will be able to pick up his revolver.

Algernon's Revolver

This little fella can be obtained after completing the "Duchesses and Other Animals" side mission in Chapter 4.

Algernon Wasp is the owner of the shop that sells exotic plants and other items. The shop can be found to the north of Saint Denis in the Lemoyne region.

Talk to Algernon Wasp and he will ask you to bring him various eggs, plumes, flowers and other items, which can be found in the area around Saint Denis.

In the end, when you satisfy all his requests, he will give you his revolver and ask you to kill him because of his recent lost love who broke his heart. But instead of killing him you will just keep this unique weapon to yourself.

Flaco's Revolver

In order to get this revolver you will need to take on a quest "The Noblest of Men, and a Woman." Go to the Salloon in the town of Valentine located in the western part of New Hanover territory.

There speak to a man named Calloway, who will ask you to locate and kill five gunslingers. One of them is the name you're especially interested in -- Flaco Hernandez.

This time you will need to travel to the northern part of the Ambarino region. You need to locate the Cairn Lake, which is a frozen mountain lake, so be sure to take warm clothes.

At your arrival be prepared to fight Flaco's gang outside of the house, and then kill Flaco himself. When he's dead, you can pick up his personal revolver, which is engraved with two skulls on its back.

Granger's Revolver

This revolver is also a part of "The Noblest of Men, and a Woman" quest, in which you need to find and kill another gunslinger -- Emmet Granger.

If you've already talked to Calloway at the Valentine's Saloon, then you can go straight to Emmet Granger's hideout.

You can find him to the east of the Flatneck Station in the southwestern part of The Heartlands, New Hanover. When you meet him, he will give you a dirty job at his farm.

As a result, you will be able to fight him in a duel, in which you need to kill him. If you succeed, you will get his revolver engraved with a pig's head as a reward.

Calloway's Revolver

Finally, you can get the last legendary revolver of "The Noblest of Men, and a Woman" side mission, which belongs to Jim "Boy" Calloway himself.

Before duelling Calloway for his legendary revolver, you need to kill four of the five gunslingers given to you in the Valentine's Saloon. When you finish the job, you need to return to a saloon, but you will find out that Calloway isn't there anymore.

When you reach Chapter 5 of the main campaign you can return to the same saloon once again, and the bartender will give you the location of Calloway, who resides at the town of Saint Denis in the southeastern part of the Lemoyne region.

Find Calloway and speak to him. This time he will give you the task to kill the fifth gunslinger -- Slim Grant.

You will find Slim Grant by speaking to the sheriff of Annesburg, which is located in the east of New Hanover. Find him and bring him to Calloway at the north of Annesburg at Brandywine Drop.

At this point you will be able to duel Jim Calloway and take his finest possession -- the legendary Calloway's Revolver.


These are all legendary revolvers, which you can find in the game, and for other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides at GameSkinny, please see the list below:

Red Dead Redemption 2: How to Find Lost Horses and Guns Thu, 08 Nov 2018 10:10:30 -0500 Oscar Gonzalez

Players making their way through Red Dead Redemption 2 will comes across a wealth of horses and weapons. Of course, both are essential to completing the game and experiencing everything RDR 2 has to offer.

However, both can also be lost for various reasons. For those who have lost their favorite noble steed or six-shooter, there are ways to get them back.

I lost my horse in Red Dead 2; how do I get it back? 

Losing a horse in Red Dead Redemption 2 is usually due to it getting killed. Of course, this can happen in myriad ways, from getting shot in an ambush or rolling off the side of a cliff. If the horse in question is a pre-order bonus, such as the War Horse, players can find them again at a stable, like the one in Valentine.

However, since this is considered a new horse its bond with the players will be reset. For those who bought, found, or broke their own horse, a dead horse will not return to the stable so hopefully, you have some replacements.

What if I lost my horse randomly? 

Unfortunately for some players, they lost their horses randomly during the game, such as after a mission, loading up a saved game, or dying -- even though the horse was still alive when the player died. In these cases, there's a bug causing the horse to not load and sometimes replacing it with a default Tennessee Walker.

A way to try and get the horse back is to load a previous manual save

What if my pre-order horse gets replaced? 

Players have also noted that pre-order horses have been lost and replaced by Tennessee Walkers. If this happens:

  1. Take the default horse outside of the city
  2. Kill it (however you like)
  3. Return the saddle to the stables

This could respawn the pre-order horse in the stable again. 

If that doesn't work, then you're simply out of luck. Players affected by this bug have let Rockstar know about the problem, but the publisher has yet to comment about any fixes.

I lost my gun in Red Dead 2; how do I get it back? 

Like horses, weapons can also disappear randomly. Usually, this happens during a mission when a weapon is forced upon the player, such as when you're forced to pick up a revolver from a dead NPC, etc. 

When a player loses a weapon in Red Dead Redemption 2, check for the weapon on your horse's saddle. Call your main horse over after the mission is over and check the saddlebag. Scroll through your weapons, and the one dropped during a mission should be available.

As is the case with horses, if this does not work, then you're out of luck. Hopefully, Rockstar will address these glitches in a future update.


Although these methods aren't hard and fast ways to get your guns or horses back, with the chance you might not being able to do it at all, they're at least worth a shot until Rockstar officially patches the game. 

Looking for more tips on Red Dead Redemption 2 guides? Head over to our RDR 2 guides page for more. 

Scum Wild Hunter Update Guide: How to Craft Bow and Arrows Wed, 07 Nov 2018 09:59:49 -0500 Sergey_3847

The wait for the new SCUM content is over, as the developers released a new update -- Wild Hunter. The most significant feature of the new update is the ability to craft a bow and arrows. Now you can hunt animals or other players using this primitive but highly effective ranged weapon.

There are a few other items that have been added to the game with the Wild Hunter update, so if you want to know how to craft them, then follow our quick guide below.

How to Craft Bow and Arrows in SCUM

There are two types of bows in SCUM: Improvised bow, which can be crafted, and Recurve bow, which can only be found as an item on the map and cannot be crafted. The only difference is that the Recurve bow has a higher durability.

Here is the recipe for the Improvised bow:

  • 1x long wooden stick
  • 1x rope
  • 1x stone knife

Before crafting the Improvised bow you need to craft the rope. It requires 5x small wooden stick, which can be acquired by cutting down bushes and small trees. Long wooden stick can be acquired in the same way.

  1. Go to your Crafting menu
  2. Select and craft the rope in the Items tab
  3. Select Improvised bow from the Weapons tab
  4. Press the Craft button

Arrows are also available in the Weapons tab and require only small wooden sticks.

Primal Crafting Items and Other Changes

Besides the bow and arrows you can now craft new masks: Boar and Goat. These are very simple to craft: all you need is either a boar's head or that of a goat. You can also put these heads on a spike, but these items can be crafted only through the blueprint system.

And if you're not into all this scary stuff, then you can just take your guitar, banjo or harmonica, which were all added to your inventory.

The loot system has been revamped as well. Now players will find 50% less military loot and 25% less other loot. Also, all the food received from chopping animals, puppets or players is reduced by 50%, too.

Some of the disappearing bugs and glitches have been fixed in the Wild Hunter update, and a new server optimization fix has also been deployed.


These have been all the major changes and additions in the Wild Hunter update, and for other SCUM guides at GameSkinny, check out the related content below:

5 Pixel Starships Tips for Getting Ahead Early Tue, 06 Nov 2018 11:09:10 -0500 Synzer

Pixel Starships is a unique online mobile game that is part spaceship sim, part strategy, part RPG. The basics of the game are easy enough to understand, but there are a lot of little details you may not notice as you begin your space odyssey.

I'm going to go over some helpful tips that will have you winning fight after fight and building the best ship you can.

Pixel Starships Tips

Aim for the Reactor and Shields

Your first instinct may be to aim for the guns to stop them from firing. While this is a good strategy in general, it can be much more effective to shoot down their reactor and/or shield generator.

The reactors give energy to ship, including the guns and shields. If you destroy their reactors, they can't use any weapons or put up shields. Early in the game, ships will usually only have one reactor, and it may be unguarded. If you take that out immediately, they will be completely defenseless.

Pixel Starships space combat

As you progress, enemies will have harder to destroy shields, and more reactors. You will want to concentrate fire on shield rooms as well, so you can spend more time taking out their rooms and less on trying to get through their shields.

Build and Upgrade Mineral and Gas Storage early

In order to upgrade your ship's level, and unlock pretty much anything, you need a lot of minerals and gas. You have a low maximum you can hold at the start, so you need to increase it.

As you increase the storage, you'll be able to make all your other ship upgrades.

Pixel Starships mining

Build and Upgrade Reactors Early

Remember how important reactors are to your ship? Well, you will want to upgrade early and get more than one when you can. Not only will this allow you to keep power to your weapons and shields, you will need higher level reactors so you have enough power to begin with.

Early on if you don't upgrade your reactor and you have multiple weapons, you won't have enough energy to power all your weapons, the shields, and the engine. All that fire power and defense means nothing if you can't use it!

Get Crew with High Skills in an Area and Assign them Correctly

If you tap on a crew member, then profile, you can see their stats. You will want people with high science, engineer, and weapon stats. You will want to get at least one for each category.

During a fight, make sure you assign them to the appropriate station.

  • If you assign someone to a weapon room, it will reload faster, even more if they have a high Weapon stat.
  • Assign someone with a high Science stat to the shield room, to put the shields back up faster.
  • If someone with a high Engineer stat is in the engine room, you will be more likely to dodge missiles that fire on your ship.

Pixel Starships crew stats

Remember, these rooms need to be powered up during battle for them to work.

Be Careful when Fighting while you Build and Upgrade Rooms

If you are building or upgrading a room, it cannot be used when you go into battle. You also cannot go into it or pass through it to another room.

So if you are upgrading your missile room for example, you can't fire any missiles until the upgrade is over.

If a room is in between you and other rooms, it effectively blocks those rooms off.

One way around this is to temporarily move the room under construction to an isolated location, so that you can move freely about the ship. 

Those are my 5 tips for getting ahead early in Pixel Starships. Pop in the comments below if you have any tips of your own for new spacefarers!

Red Dead Redemption 2 - Gang Hideout Locations Mon, 05 Nov 2018 10:56:06 -0500 galacticfreds

Red Dead Redemption 2 has rival gang hideouts scattered throughout the map for you to find. I'm going to go over both the unmissable and hidden gang hideouts for you to discover.

There are a total of seven hideouts, with four being unmissable by playing through the story, two are hidden in the state of New Austin, and one is only accessible by owning the special edition of the game.

The unmissable gang hideouts:

  1. Six Point Cabin: Automatically in Chapter 2
  2. Shady Belle: Automatically in Chapter 3
  3. Beaver Hollow: Automatically in Chapter 5
  4. Hanging Dog Ranch: Automatically in Chapter 6

The secret gang hideouts:

Keep in mind these are only accessible after finishing the game.

Thieves Landing 

Fort Mercer

The special edition hideout:

If you go here the standard edition random NPCs will spawn and won't count as a gang.

Twin Rocks

There you have six Gang Hideouts total (seven with special edition). If done correctly, it will check off the “Gang Hideouts” in your 100% Completion Checklist.

If you found this guide useful, check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides here on GameSkinny.

How to Get & Use the Lock Breaker in Red Dead Redemption 2 Fri, 02 Nov 2018 21:20:13 -0400 Jonathan Moore

One of the better ways to get money in Red Dead Redemption 2 is to steal things. From money clips and gold bars to pocket watches and pearl necklaces, lootable items can be found in pockets, desks, cabinets, and whatever else -- you have to steal to eat.

But just like in real life, not everything is left out in the open. Some items are locked away behind doors or in chests. To get into these silently and without alerting your victims to your thievery, you'll need the lock breaker

Yes, you could just shoot the locks off of doors and chests, but since that's not always an option, the lock breaker is your second best bet. 

Where to Get the Lock Breaker in Red Dead 2

You can find the lock breaker at any fence in Red Dead Redemption 2. I picked mine up from Seamus, the first fence in the game for $22.50. You can find Seamus after completing the "Spines of America" mission, which you get from Hosea

If you've already completed the quest but don't remember where Seamus is, you can find him at the barn at Emerald Ranch.

Here is a complete list of fences in the game. 

The prices for the lock breaker vary from fence to fence as well. However, it costs $25 from each of them. If you get the lock breaker from Seamus, not only will you get it first, you'll save $2.50

How to Use the Lock Breaker in Red Dead 2

This might seem simple, but it's been stumping quite a few people, even myself. 

To use the lock breaker, approach a locked chest or door and interact with it by pressing "Square" on PS4 and "X" on Xbox One. It's that simple. If you are having trouble with it, it's because the door or chest you want to open can't actually be opened. In my 15 hours with the game, I've only found 3-4 locked chests, and I haven't found any locked doors, so they're few and far between it seems. 


That's all you need to know about how to get and how to use the lock breaker in Red Dead Redemption 2. If you have other lock breaker tips -- or want us to cover other guide topics on RDR 2 -- let us know in the comments below. 

For other tips and tricks for the Wild West epic, head over to our Red Dead Redemption 2 guides page

Red Dead Redemption 2 Jack Hall Gang Treasure Map Guide Fri, 02 Nov 2018 15:43:57 -0400 Oscar Gonzalez

When you're not hunting animals, catching bad guys, or investigating your horse's "reproduction organs" in cold weather, you might be on the lookout for Red Dead Redemption 2's many treasures. 

One of those treasures is, in fact, three different treasures hidden by the Jack Hall Gang. You'll need to get two treasure maps to get to the booty. Here's how to find them. 

How to Find the Jack Hall Gang Treasure

When Chapter 2 starts and you can freely explore New Hanover, go west from Flatrock Station and look for a hill north of the railroad.

When close, a stranger named Maximo will begin to talk loudly.

Speak with him and buy the treasure map for $10. Of course, you can rob him of it or kill him and steal it, the method is up to you. However, with the map in hand, it's time to find the hidden treasure of the Jack Hall Gang.

Jack Hall Gang Treasure Map 1

Treasure Map 1: Climbing the Seat 

The first stop on the map is Caliban's Seat, which is south of Valentine. Head to the "A" in "Caliban and look to the east. There is a path that goes up the cliff. Climb up the cliff and halfway up you'll see a path on your right that will lead to the side of the cliff.

The walkway here is incredibly narrow, so move carefully. Down the path will be a gap you'll need to jump in order to continue.

Once you reach the end of the walkway, there will be a crack in the cliff that can be searched. Inside you'll find the second Jack Hall Gang treasure map and a pearl necklace.

Jack Hall Gang Treasure Map 2

Treasure Map 2: Spring Into Action

The second map will lead players to Cotorra Springs, which is northwest of Fort Wallace. Between the "O" and the "R" on the map are several rock formations. One of the larger stacks of rocks will contain the final treasure map.

Jack Hall Gang Treasure Map 3

Treasure Map 3: A One-Tree Island

For the final stop, head east from Fort Wallace and go to O' Creagh's Run.

The treasure will be on the island in the middle of the lake. Swim or paddle to the island and look for a rock near the water on the south side.

Search there and you'll find the Jack Hall Gang treasure, which consists of two gold bars worth $500 each.


That's all you need to know about getting the Jack Hill Gang treasure in Red Dead Redemption 2. If you're looking for more RDR 2 tips and tricks, head over to our Red Dead Redemption 2 guides page. 

11 Best Easter Eggs in Red Dead Redemption 2 Thu, 01 Nov 2018 12:31:06 -0400 Sergey_3847


Undead Nightmare Easter Egg


Last but definitely not least, this Red Dead Redemption 2 Easter egg references one of Red Dead Redemption's most popular DLCs: Undead Nightmare.


To find the mask, go to the southeastern part of Lemoyne, near Saint Denis. There, you'll find a souvenir shop with some really cool items.


On the shelf behind the seller you will see a green mask, which looks exactly like the mask from the end of Undead Nightmare expansion.




These were the 11 best Easter eggs in RDR2, and for other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:


Meteorite Easter Egg


Well, this Red Dead Redemption 2 Easter egg is rather ... gross. 


If you manage to get to Roanoke Valley in northeast New Hanover, then you will find a house full of burned bodies.


It turns out the house was struck by a meteorite that killed every person inside. You can even see the hole in the roof and the floor.


The piece of meteorite can be picked up as an item. Later, you will be able to sell it, for it's worth. 


Crashed Airship Easter Egg


This historical Red Dead Redemption 2 Easter egg can be seen in the northern part of West Elizabeth, west of Little Creek river.


When you get there, look up on the hill and you'll find a crashed glider -- one of the very first flying machines created by Jean Marie Le Bris. Unfortunately, most of these experimental flights were completely disastrous, and many men died trying to fly them.


This Easter egg shows exactly why these machines were unreliable with their fragile wings and unsafe cabins.


Bonnie MacFarlane Easter Egg


Here's an Easter egg for those who've played and love the first Red Dead Redemption. Bonnie MacFarlane was one of the main characters back then, and she's referenced in RDR 2 in this short scene.


You can find this Easter egg by traveling to the western border of New Hanover. Locate Flatneck Station in The Heartlands and go south from there until you reach the river.


There, you will see a dying, love-sick man who asks you to give a letter to Bonnie MacFarlane. 


Hobbit Easter Egg


Now that we've got the creepier Easter eggs out of the way, here's a fun one that's a real precious (ahem) find.


Referencing The Lord of the Rings, this Red Dead Redemption Hobbit-hole can be found in Ambarino, northeast of Fort Wallace.


Basically, a hole dug in the hillside with a front door and maybe a window or two, this structure would make even Bilbo proud. 


unfortunately, you can't enter the house through the door or any other opening. Clearly, Rockstar just dropped this Easter egg in RDR 2 for fun.


Manbearpig Easter Egg


If you're a fan of South Park, then you'll know what the mutant creature monster found in Red Dead Redemption 2 refers to.


To find it, you first need to travel to the eastern border of New Hanover.


Once there, stop at the house across from the Van Horn trading post. Inside the house, you will see a mutant creature chained to the wall. It has the body of a human, the head of the pig, and arms of the bear.


This is a slightly darker reference to Manbearpig from South Park's episode 6 of season 10, in which Al Gore tries to warn children about this monster, which is an allegory for a global warming.


Ghost Lady Easter Egg


In the same area as the last Easter egg (Hill Haven Ranch), you can find another creepy event unfolding. This time, however, you'll find a ghost lady haunting the swamps. 


She appears and disappears randomly, but she can be found mostly at night. So if you want to meet her and hear her story (yep, she speaks), then come to the marsh after sunset.


You will hear her talking to either her lover or husband. She just keeps repeating the same phrase: "I always loved you. She never loved you... she never did."


That's something right out of a gothic horror novel. 


Ku Klux Klan Easter Egg


Rockstar is also (in)famous for putting rather scandalous references in their games. One such Easter eggs in Red Dead Redemption 2 comes in the form of the understatedly nefarious Ku Klux Klan.


You can witness the meeting by traveling to Hill Haven Ranch at night. The ranch is located east of Scarlett Meadows at Lemoyne region. The best part about this Easter egg is that you can interact with the Klan, killing them all.


Giant Snake Easter Egg


Snakes can give you a lot of trouble in Red Dead Redemption 2. But encountering a giant snake would be a completely nightmarish scenario, one your horse might soon like to forget.


Fortunately, you will find out that this Easter egg is all show since the snake's already dead. Based on what we know about Rockstar's quirky sense of humor, it's safe to say this Easter egg was put in for scares, and not much else. But in any case, a giant snake is a sight to behold.


You can find it by traveling to Lemoyne region in the forest south of Pleasance. It will be hanging from a tree at the edge of the forest


UFO Easter Egg


Rockstar loves putting UFO references into their games, and Red Dead Redemption 2 is no exception. To find this Easter egg, you first need to find Hani Methel's house, which is located north of Heartland Overflow in New Hanover.


When you arrive at the house, you should find a message on the table, which says that you need to come back at 2 a.m. for "some event" to happen. If you have enough patience and can wait until 2 that time, you will see an alien ship hovering over Hani's house.


It's a short scene but something you will definitely want to show to all your friends -- and a tale to tell around the Van der Linde campfire. 


Bigfoot Easter Egg


The Red Dead Redemption 2 map is loaded with unique vistas, sprawling forests, and towering mountain ranges. Some are stunning, while others are a tad bit creepy (Stillwater Creek, anyone?). If you travel to Big Valley located in West Elizabeth, you'll find one of the game's more unsettling Easter eggs.


Located on Mount Shann, which is one of the most mysterious locations in RDR2, you'll find a creature that cryptozoologists have been chasing for years: Bigfoot. 


Known for strange signs on the rocks and other unusual stories surrounding it, it's no wonder that a giant Bigfoot skeleton can be found on Mount Shann.


When you approach the skeleton, you will find a short message saying that it might not even be the Bigfoot, but a man with unusually large proportions.


Yeah ... sure. 


Red Dead Redemption 2 has quickly proven to be one of the finest games Rockstar has ever released. It has a complex story, amazingly realistic gameplay mechanics, excellent writing, and of course, a ton of exciting Easter eggs.


In this guide to RDR 2 Easter eggs, you will not only find references to some of your favorite characters from the first Red Dead Redemption and other popular media, but also a few completely surprising facts from history and beyond.


It's going to be a real ride, so unhitch your trusty steed and let's ride into the sunset. 

How to Get the Leather Working Tools in Red Dead Redemption 2 Wed, 31 Oct 2018 15:09:01 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Theoretically, you could play the entirety of Red Dead Redemption 2 using your original satchel. However, that doesn't mean you should. 

As with any game in the past, oh, forever, it's a good idea to upgrade your base satchel (read: gear) as soon as you possibly can. In RDR 2, that means getting the leather working tools as soon as you possibly can. 

Aside from opening up gear upgrades, the leather working tools also let you upgrade the Van der Linde camp at Horseshoe Overlook. Once you get the tools, you'll be able to add new seat covers, grounds covers, and more to the community camp fire area, camp tables, and other areas. 

Sure it's only an aesthetic upgrade, but if you're into that type of thing ... 

How to Get the Leather Working Tools

In short, you need to get the ledger to get the leather working tools. You can find out how to do that in this guide

However, if you just don't feel like clicking, here's the gist: 

  1. Find Leopold Strauss at Horseshoe Overlook
  2. Accept the Money Lending and Other Sins side quest
  3. Collect the debt from Wrobel
  4. Return to Strauss
  5. Find the ledger at Dutch's tent next to the contribution box

Once you get the ledger, flip to the last page. You can buy the leather working tools for $225. The cost will come out of the camp's savings first, your pocket second. 

This will allow let Pearson at the food carriage to upgrade your equipment. Here are the satchel and camp upgrades you can now get, plus the extra steps required after getting the leather working tools: 

Satchel/Camp Upgrade Benefit Recipe How to Get Recipe
Tonics Satchel Increase tonics carrying capacity x1 perfect deer pelt
x1 perfect buck pelt
x1 perfect elk pelt
Upgrade medicine wagon 2 times
Ingredients Satchel  Increase edible ingredients capacity x1 perfect deer pelt
x1 perfect badger pelt
x1 perfect squirrel pelt
Donate 5 animal carcasses to
Kit Satchel Increase kit
equipment capacity
x1 perfect deer pelt
x1 perfect elk pelt
x1 perfect panther pelt
Donate 3 valuables
to the contribution box
Provisions Satchel Increase provisions carrying
x1 perfect deer pelt,
x1 perfect bison pelt
x1 perfect raccoon pelt
provisions wagon
2 times
Materials Satchel Increase materials
carrying capacity
x1 perfect deer pelt
x1 perfect boar pelt
x1 perfect iguana skin
Craft 3 recipes
at scout fire
(Van der Linde camp)
Valuables Satchel  Increase valuables
carrying capacity
x1 perfect deer pelt
x1 perfect beaver pelt
x1 perfect rabbit pelt
Donate $50 to
contribution box
Legend of the East Satchel  Increase
capacity of all types
x1 perfect deer pelt
x1 perfect cougar pelt
x1 perfect wolf pelt
Craft all other satchels
Cougar Pelt Covered Chest N/A x2 perfect cougar pelts N/A
Bear Skin Table Cover N/A x1 perfect board pelt N/A
Ox Hide Rug N/A x2 perfect ox hides N/A
Boar Skin Rug N/A x4 perfect board pelts N/A
Pronghorn Leather Table Tops N/A x2 perfect pronghorn hides N/A
Campfire Seat Cover N/A x1 perfect beaver pelt,
x1 perfect muskrat pelt,
x1 perfect fox pelt
Campfire Log Seat Cover N/A x2 perfect wolf pelts N/A
Lean-to Cow Hide Ground Cover N/A x1 perfect cow hide N/A
Scout Fire Ground Cover N/A x2 perfect goat hides N/A

That's all you need to know about Red Dead Redemption 2's leather working tools and the upgrades they bring with them. 

If you're looking for more tips and tricks, be sure to head over to our RDR 2 guides page

Fortnite Guide: How to Destroy Cube Fragments Wed, 31 Oct 2018 13:36:08 -0400 Sergey_3847

Fortnitemare challenges in Fortnite continue this week in part 4. One of the hardest and most mysterious challenges listed this week is for players to destroy at least three cube fragments.

If you want to know what are cube fragments in Fortnite and how to destroy them, then follow our quick guide below.

How to Destroy Cube Fragments in Fortnite

What are Cube Fragments?

Cube fragments are alien objects of purple color that are reminiscent of the purple corrupted zones. Unsurprisingly, the seven corrupted zones on the map are the places where cube fragments will spawn.

Search around these seven locations to find the three required cube fragments in Fortnite:

  • South of Lazy Links
  • Wailing Woods
  • South of Pleasant Park
  • West of Dusty Divot
  • South of Retail Row
  • West of Shifty Shafts
  • North of Fatal Fields
How do Cube Fragments Look Like?

It is easy to identify them as they will spawn unique cube monsters of five different types:

  • Cube Fiend
  • Elite Cube Fiend
  • Cube Brute
  • Elite Cube Brute
  • Mega Cube Brute

Each of them is stronger than the previous one, and that's why it's a good idea to destroy as many cube fragments as you can.

Best Weapons Against Cube Fragments

When you find a cube fragment, you will first need to eliminate cube monsters that it spawns. The two best weapons that deal the most damage to cube fragments are SMGs and Shotguns.

Each cube fragment has a certain amount of health, and it will keep spawning those pesky monsters up to the moment of its destruction. So focus on destroying the fragment first, and if there are too many monsters around, you can eliminate a few to free some space.

Sometimes, smaller cube fragments may randomly appear on the map. They are easier to destroy, but the game will count them  as well. So don't ignore the smaller fragments!

Cube Fragments Rewards

When you destroy a cube fragment it will drop some loot. Usually, it's a very good legendary weapon or any other exclusive item that you are probably looking for. Also, each destroyed cube fragment will add 500 XP to your score.


That is how easy you can destroy three cube fragments during Fortnitemare event this week, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, please follow the links below:

How to Get the Ledger in Red Dead Redemption 2 Wed, 31 Oct 2018 12:57:06 -0400 Jonathan Moore

As you play through Red Dead Redemption 2, you'll quickly find that upgrading your camp is a necessary task. Not only will upgrading your camp give you access to fast travel, it will also give you access to other necessities, such as better provisions, more potent medicines, and better gear

However, you can't simply upgrade your camp at will -- at least not at the beginning of the game. Instead, you first have to gain access to the ledger. Much like everything else in the game, RDR 2 doesn't tell you how to get the ledger, even though it's rather simple. 

How to Get the Ledger

To get the ledger, you'll first have to start the Money Lending and Other Sins side quest, which you can get from Leopold Strauss (Herr Strauss). 

You will find Herr Strauss at the Horseshoe Overlook camp. From Arthur's tent, go past the community camp fire and toward the bluff overlooking the valley below. Strauss will be sitting on a rock

You will automatically start the quest when approaching him. 

Completing the Money Lending and Other Sins Side Quest

Strauss will task you to collect three debts. However, you only need to collect one of them to gain access to the ledger. 

The easiest and quickest debt to collect is from Wrobel, who is a few miles west of the camp. Once you get to his house, question him about the debt. When he tells you to "take anything" from the house as payment, simply loot the two armoires in the corners and the desk by the door.

Going into the bedrooms is pointless because there's nothing of value in them. 

Return to Strauss at Horseshoe Overlook

Once you return to Strauss and speak with him. After, you can find the ledger to the right of the contribution box at Dutch's tent

Now, you can buy upgrades for the camp, including those for fast travel and upgrading Arthur's equipment. 

If you're looking for other tips and tricks for Rockstar's Wild West epic, be sure to head over to our Red Dead Redemption 2 guides page

Red Dead Redemption 2 Guide: Fence Locations Wed, 31 Oct 2018 12:22:33 -0400 Synzer

Living the life of an outlaw in Red Dead Redemption 2 can be a profitable one. Besides the money you rake in from train and bank robberies, you will come across plenty of valuables. These stolen goods can give you a small fortune -- if you know where to unload them.

There are five Fence locations you can sell these good at in Red Dead Redemption 2. I'm going to go over the details and locations of each so you can turn better profits on your thievery. 

Red Dead Redemption 2 Fence Locations

Although you can sell these goods at your camp, yo won't get nearly as much as you would at one of the Fence locations. If you're looking to make good money, sell all of those unsavory finds at a Fence location.

All of the Fence locations also have a store to buy from and a crafting option.

The store sells throwing weapons, provisions, masks, crafting recipes and more. All of them sell the same things, so no need to go to a specific location.

red dead redemption 2 fence vendor

You can craft trinkets and talismans at Fence locations as well. These give permanent boosts when you make them, such as increased stamina experience, or receiving higher quality skinned animal parts.

Most require at least one kind of legendary animal part. The good thing is that you don't have to bring them to the location, you just need to have skinned it before.

You can also buy the Lock Breaker at a fence location, which allows you to silently break locks.

Emerald Ranch - Wagons and Stage Coaches

red dead redemption 2 emerald ranch fence location

This is the first location you will likely come across. Emerald Ranch is slightly northeast of Horseshoe Overlook in New Hanover. It is unlocked after doing the Chapter 2 mission, "The Spines of America", for Hosea. This mission is available after you do his first mission where you hunt a legendary bear.

In addition to the normal goods, you can also sell stolen stage coaches and wagons at Emerald Ranch.

Van Horn Trading Post

red dead redemption 2 van horn trading post fence location

This location is to the far east of Emerald Ranch, in New Hanover.


red dead redemption 2 rhodes fence location

This location is just north of the town of Rhodes, which is southeast of Horseshoe Overlook in Lemoyne.

Clemens Point - Horses

You must complete the Chapter 3 mission, "Horse Flesh for Dinner". to unlock this location. It is to the northwest of Rhodes, near the Clemens Point camp. You will be able to sell stolen horses here.

Saint Denis

red dead redemption 2 saint denis fence location

This big city in Lemoyne has a great fence location as well. Saint Denis is just east of Rhodes. You can find the Fence location on the east side of town, near the trapper's location.

Those are all the Fence locations in RDR2. Let me know if you have any questions! For more help and info on the game, please check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides.

Red Dead Redemption 2: Gold Bar Locations Guide Tue, 30 Oct 2018 16:23:17 -0400 Ty Arthur

Money is hard to come by in the early stages of Red Dead Redemption 2 as your ragtag gang of outlaw misfits ekes out a sorry existence.

If you want to earn some quick cash to upgrade your camp or buy a better horse, gold bars are the most cost-efficient way to do so. Besides offering up an unbelievable $500 each, they can be used to exploit the RDR2 gold bar infinite money glitch.

Below we cover all the different gold bar locations discovered across the game world so far.

Red Dead Redemption 2 Gold Bar Locations

Keep in mind that if you want to sell the bars directly for cash (rather than donating them to the camp for upgrades), you have to first finish The Spines Of America quest to unlock the Fence.

To start this quest, you have to complete the first Hosea mission where you go hunting for the legendary bear. Later, Hosea will move over to Emerald Ranch and pop up on your map as a yellow icon.

Talk to him at that location to start The Spines Of America. With that out of the way, now its time to start earning some easy money!

Limpany Gold Bar

Limpany gold bar location

This one is super quick to pick up and is available as soon as you leave the mountain and enter the open world area of the game.

Travel southwest from the Horseshoe Overlook camp until you find Limpany, a tiny little burg that burned down.

Head into the burnt out Sheriff's Office at the northwest end of Limpany and look for a desk in the corner. The gold bar is inside a lock box under the desk (along with a horse pamphlet).

Strange Statues Quest Gold Bars

Strange statues gold bar

To kick off this odd puzzle, first head to Window Rock, which is northwest of Fort Wallace and immediately south of Granite Pass. At the top of the area Arthur will note a cave painting about strange statues.

After that is done, head northeast of Fort Wallace to a map location just to the southeast of the giant letter "I" on the map. Enter the cave in the rock wall to find the room filled with strange statues.

Press the buttons on these statues to complete the puzzle:

  • 2
  • 3
  • 5
  • 7

Now you can access the middle statue to find three gold bars ready for the taking!

Braithwaite Manor Gold Bar

Braithwaite Manor gold bar

You can pick up this gold bar starting in Chapter 4 of the main story by heading to Lemoyne's Braithwaite Manor found south of Rhodes.

Head into the main burnt down building and go into the room just beyond the dead body. In that room, turn around and look in the corner to find a lockbox with a gold bar.

Treasure Map Gold Bars

Finally, you can pick up gold bars by following the treasure map bought from (or looted off the body of) the treasure hunter Maximo, who is available in Chapter 2 northwest of Flatneck Station.

The first two treasure stashes each contain a new map leading to another stash with yet more gold bars! After picking up the first map, you can follow the clues to the stashes at these locations:

  • Caliban's Seat (south of Valentine)
  • Cotorra Springs (southeast of the second giant letter "A" in Ambarino on the world map)
  • The O'Creagh's Run lake (south of the giant letter "O" in Ambarino on the world map)

Those are all the gold bars we've found so far! Have you come across any others? Let us know and we'll add them to the list.

Need help with the rest of the open world wild west adventure? Check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides here:

Call Of Cthulhu 2018 Guide: Defeating The Dimensional Shambler Mon, 29 Oct 2018 19:15:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

The 2018 rendition of Call Of Cthulhu features a variety of creatures from across the mythos, including two battles against a Dimensional Shambler -- once as the detective Pierce and the later as a different character (who we won't spoil).

Its that first battle that will cause some serious headaches for players, as there aren't a lot of clues as to how to complete this puzzle / fight hybrid section. You can't fight the Shambler, but you also can't escape the area and there are only so many places to hide.

We've got you covered with the quickest way to get through this section and move onto the next chapter!


How To Beat The Shambler In Call Of Cthulhu  

As soon as you interact with the painting at the back of the art gallery (after questioning the dead collector's wife), the Dimensional Shambler puzzle fight immediately begins.

The game switches into hide and seek mode, just like during the asylum section where you had to hide from the orderlies. In this section, the Shambler notices you very easily in the main room, even if you are crouched and sneaking behind objects, so stealth is less useful than you'd think.

There are two closets for hiding, but the Shambler can still kill you if he sees you enter one. It isn't hard to outrun him by looping through the two side rooms and going around the display tables, however, and this is your best tactic to stay alive.

During the chase, you can't open either set of doors, so the only option is to deal with the Shambler somehow. To beat the Shambler and escape the art gallery you need a dagger... but not for wielding in combat! This isn't an FPS or adventure game, so don't expect to kill this beast that way.

Instead, you need to find the right dagger keyed to the Shambler's dimension and wield it to tear apart the painting he uses as an anchor point to stay in stable reality.

There's just one problem... there are literally dozens of daggers in the display cases, and you've got an unholy beast chasing you around the room while you peruse the arcane arsenal.

Picking The Dagger Of The Ancients


While facing away from the painting (towards the entrance doors), enter the room on your right. If you are instead facing away from the entrance doors towards the painting, the room will be on your left.

Head into the back corner and look for a display case up against the wall. While looking at the case, activate your lamp (if you've run out of oil, there are two oil refill spots in the gallery).

Examine the dagger that looks like an entwined branch with an elder sign at the middle (shown in the two images above). Smash the glass, grab the dagger, and run back to the painting. As soon as you interact with it, the battle is over.

Note that turning on the lamp and breaking the glass both attract the Shambler, so its a better idea to just run full speed towards the painting rather than trying to hide in the closet.

Due to the huge number of daggers in the two side rooms, it seems likely the location of the Dagger Of The Ancients may vary between playthroughs. If it doesn't show up in the corner of the right room for you, note that Pierce will actually say "this dagger seems different" when you've picked up the correct one.

Did you finally find the right dagger and send the Shambler back to its vile home dimension? 

Sound off in the comments below, and be sure to leave a note if you want us to cover any other puzzles in this new digital rendition of the tabletop Call Of Cthulhu game. Be sure to also check out our Call Of Cthulhu guides here.

Call Of Cthulhu 2018: Nameless Bookstore Safe Code Guide Mon, 29 Oct 2018 19:15:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

While most of Call Of Cthulhu revolves around using your skills in dialog to gather information, there are a few puzzles where you've got to figure out solutions on your own without a dialog wheel.

After his encounter with the Dimensional Shambler, doomed detective Pierce heads off to the Nameless Bookstore to find information from an occult specialist.

Upon arriving its clear there's been a break-in, but the thief couldn't crack the safe code in the back of the store. Maybe you can do better than the clumsy burglar?

Nameless Bookstore Safe Puzzle Solution

If you just want to jump straight to the solution, the answer to the safe code puzzle is:

5 - 3 - 9

Change the three safe numbers to 5 - 3 - 9 (from left to right) and choose Validate to open the safe and find the Necronomicon. Now the real question... how did we get to the answer?

If you pick up three cylinders hidden across the bookstore and play them on the phonograph in the side room with the chess board you get some clues, although they don't fully reveal the answers.

The first cylinder mentions red stones on a chalice. On the opposite side of the room, pick up the gold cup and rotate it around. This one is sort of annoying, because the angle of your rotation makes it look like there's only 4 rubies, but there are actually 5, which is the first number of the safe combination.

The second cylinder mentions white soldiers defending a queen, which leads you to the chess set on the table in the phonograph room. While there are 7 white chess pieces, you actually only want to count the number of pieces on the board defending the white queen, which is 3

Finally, the third cylinder references a book named Azathoth & Other Horrors. If you check the books sitting under the shelf in the bookstore's main room, you will see that is volume 9 of the series.


Did you have trouble with this safe combination, or do you need guidance on any of the other Call Of Cthulhu 2018 puzzles? Let us know where you've gotten stumped and we'll write up a quick solution! You can also find the rest of our Call Of Cthulhu guides here.

Red Dead Redemption 2: Infinite Money Glitch With Gold Bars Mon, 29 Oct 2018 19:05:09 -0400 Ty Arthur

Players are consistently surprised at how many new elements and areas there are to discover while exploring the Red Dead Redemption 2 map, but one of those most surprising is an unexpected glitch that lets you earn infinite money.

By taking advantage of a save/load bug, you can sell a huge number of gold bars and then easily fully upgrade your camp.

Exploiting this glitch very much goes against the spirit of the game, since it is intended that your gang struggles to survive in the early portions of the story.

If you get tired of being poor all the time though, we explain how to get an unlimited amount of funds below. Note that this will very much be a limited time option, as there's no question it is going to get patched out at some point down the line!

If you've already nabbed the gold bar shown below, check our gold bar locations guide to find more. 

Exploiting The RDR2 Infinite Gold Bar Bug

The quickest and easiest way to exploit the Red Dead Redemption 2 infinite money bug is to head to the burned down village of Limpany, which is found just to the southwest of the main Horseshoe Overlook camp.

Before heading there though, note that this glitch only works if you turn autosave off. You can do that by heading into Settings, then General, and turning off the autosave feature.

Be sure you also aren't currently wanted by law enforcement or being chased by enemies, as these will both screw up the whole process and prevent the glitch from working.

With that out of the way, head into the burned down sheriff's office and look for the desk in the corner. Inspect the lockbox found beneath the desk but don't open it or take anything out of it yet.

When the "Take" option appears for the box to grab a pamphlet or a gold bar, head to the game's main menu and select Story and then Save Game. Save in any slot and select Yes when the Alert appears on the screen.

While still in the Story menu, back out one screen and head over to Load Game and then load the save slot you just created. You will spawn randomly at a location near Limpany (usually on the bluffs just above or by the river just to the west).

Note that if you didn't turn off auto save, you will get a new Alert asking you to overwrite your data. If this happens, choose No and then Yes to prevent the autosave feature from ruining the glitch.

This part is critical -- do not open the map or menu in any way, and walk or ride back to the sheriff's office in Limpany. Walk up to the lockbox so the menu appears in the lower-right corner. Choose the Take option repeatedly to pick up an endless supply of gold bars.

The number of bars you can carry at one time via this glitch is dependent on your satchel, so this is more efficient later on when you've crafted some upgrades.

Now go sell the gold bars at the Fence (or contribute them directly to the camp) for $500 a pop.

You can then repeat the process again by returning to the box. Close the box (rather than taking anything) and then re-open it. You should now see an option to take a pamphlet instead of a gold bar. Simply save, reload, and do it all over again.

Although this Red Dead Redemption 2 cheat is easiest to perform at Limpany due to its close proximity to Horseshoe Overlook, you can take advantage of this glitch with any gold bar found in the game (or nearly any item found in a lock box in a similar fashion).


Need help with the rest of the open world wild west adventure? Check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides here:

Red Dead Redemption 2 Beginner's Tips & Tricks Guide Sun, 28 Oct 2018 17:29:38 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Editor's note: Updated 11/15/18 with more tips.

Red Dead Redemption 2 is a behemoth of a game. When you first begin, you'll find yourself essentially on rails for about two hours or so. Here, the game teaches you many of its basic mechanics, priming you for the massive open world to come. 

But when you reach Horseshoe Overlook near Valentine, the training wheels come off ... mostly. The game does provide you with more tips and tricks as you discover new things, but you have to discover them before it will tell you how to do them -- or if you can even do them at all. 

That's why I've whipped up this beginner's tips and tricks guide to Red Dead Redemption 2. After about 10 hours with the game, it's obvious there are a few things -- even those as simple as "how to reload" or "how to upgrade stamina" -- that aren't clearly explained or can be easily overlooked if you're not seeking them out.

Below, we'll cover: 

  • How to reload
  • How to fast travel
  • How to upgrade your abilities
  • How to understand cores
  • Why upgrading your camp is important
  • Why you should keep your horse clean
  • Why you should clean your guns regularly
  • How to pay a smaller bounty
  • How to auto-hogtie NPCs
  • And more

Arthur Morgan shoots a bandit with a Cattleman Revolver on a grassy knoll

How to Reload in RDR2

OK. Let's start with something relatively simple: reloading. 

Red Dead Redemption 2 doesn't tell you how to reload your weapon, and if you're like me, you won't really notice it doesn't tell you until you're in a firefight pressing the wrong button. 

To reload, press "Circle" on PS4 and "B" on Xbox One. Being that most games map reload to either "Square" or "X" respectively, you'll probably find you're hopping around while bullets fly instead of reloading -- at least once or twice in your first encounter. 

Do Missions Before Exploring the Open World

This is something I learned the hard way: do missions before exploring Red Dead 2's open world. 

You can start exploring as soon as you reach Horseshoe Overlook. However, you might find that you can't do certain things, like fishing, or that it's pretty damn hard to get money for camp upgrades. 

The secret is this: Red Dead Redemption 2's early missions either unlock specific items and services or provide a good source of income

For example, here's what you can unlock just in by completing missions in Chapter 2 (alongside the mission's name): 

  • Exit Pursued by a Bruised Ego: Horse Brush and Legendary Animal map
  • Money Lending and Other Sins: Ledger and Camp Upgrades (see below)
  • The Spines of America: Fences (to sell loot)
  • A Fisher of Men: Fishing Pole (Fishing)
  • A Strange Kindness: $300 Gold Bar

Unlock Fast Travel Early

It's possible to ride anywhere you want on Red Dead 2's expansive map. But for certain things, like picking up bounties, getting a haircut, or selling skins to the trapper, you'll just want to get to city hubs as fast as you can, which means fast travel. 

To pseudo fast travel, you can set a waypoint on the map, engage cinematic camera mode, and start riding: your horse will take you to the destination (or in the vicinity of your destination) by itself. There's no need to hold "X" (PS4) or "A" (XB1). Note that this system is a bit fickle: start on roads and your horse will automatically ride; start off-road, and your horse will only gallop while you press or hold the ride button. 

However, the game doesn't tell you that you can unlock true fast travel very early on. Here's a guide on how to unlock fast travel as soon as possible. 

  • Complete the first part of the first quest from Leopold Strauss
    • Collect the debt from Wrobel first since it's the fastest
  • Unlock the ledger (automatically happens after completing the above)
  • Spend $325 (after spending $220 on the first upgrade) to unlock fast travel from Arthur's tent to anywhere you've previously visited

Arthur Morgan buys a train ticket from the post office in RDR2

Use Stagecoaches and Trains to Travel Faster

Another thing the game doesn't tell you is that you can also travel by stagecoach and train from the beginning of Chapter 2. 

Open the map and look at Valentine -- or any other major hub -- and look for the signpost symbol and envelope symbol, which denote the town's stagecoach and train respectively. 

Trains will take you to all the major hubs on the map immediately, and they are typically cheaper and faster than a stagecoach. However, stagecoaches will take you to smaller areas, such as ranches not near rail tracks, that trains won't go. 

If you find that the stagecoach symbol is locked, it's because of one of three things: 

  • You're riding a horse and opened the map
  • You're wanted and have a bounty on your head
  • You're currently in a mission

Note: Stagecoaches won't appear next to the stagecoach sign until after you've designated a destination by purchasing a ticket. Your horse will also appear once you've reached your destination. 

Increase Abilities by Using Them

Red Dead Redemption 2 doesn't have a skill tree system. That means you won't get experience points for taking out lawmen, hunting legendary animals, or dominating at poker. 

Instead, you will upgrade your abilities by actually using them. The game hints at this and mentions it in places, but doesn't outright tell you early on. With so much going on, it's easy to miss that by riding your horse, you're increasing your bond with it, for example. 

So, if you want to upgrade Dead Eye, use Dead Eye -- a lot. If you want to increase your horse's stamina, ride it -- a lot.

Arthur Morgan, with a bloody shoulder, looks out at the Horseshoe Overlook camp next to a fire

Don't Neglect Your Camp

When RDR 2 starts in earnest, you'll get a camp at Horseshoe Overlook. Here you can sleep, eat, cook, shave, change clothes, craft upgrades, and more.

You can even grow the camp by getting the ledger.

But you also have to keep it stocked with ammunition, food, and medical supplies. You can donate money or luxury items such as stolen watches and belt buckles to increase your camp's savings. When you buy upgrades or restock from the ledger, the cost first comes out of the gang's savings; whatever else is needed comes out of your pocket. 

So why contribute your own money to the savings? Isn't it the same as buying out of your own pocket? Well, not really. Giving to the savings and upgrading your camp incentivizes NPCs in the camp to contribute to the savings as well. This is essentially giving you "free" money, so it's worth doing. 

You can also donate items to each of the camp's "vendors" to increase morale, such as giving a freshly killed deer to the butcher. 

Do Chores Around Camp to Increase Abilities, Morale

Doing chores around the camp also increases morale. For example, chopping wood increases morale, honor, and Dead Eye. The game doesn't tell you that you can do this until, well, you actually do it -- and fully complete the task in question.

Arthur Morgan rides a Kentucky Saddler in the woods with sunlight filtering through trees

Explore Off the Beaten Path

Explore off the beaten path to find ingredients, natural food items, challenges, side-quests, encounters, rare wildlife, camps, and much more. 

A lot of Red Dead Redemption 2's gameplay lies outside of the main missions. If you stick to the road, you're bound to miss a lot of it. 

Look for Gang Camps to Loot

Although mostly few and far between, you will occasionally come across gang camps and bandit camps while exploring the wilderness. 

You can often find them by looking for smoke from their campfires. You can either climb to a vantage point and scan the horizon for smoke, or you can also look up toward the tops of trees, where you can sometimes see smoke rising into the sky.  

Usually, the outlaws in these camps will warn you to stay away or else they'll shoot. Use this as an opportunity to get the jump on them. Use Dead Eye to quickly take out the (usually) three to four men in the camp. 

Loot their corpses and camp, the latter of which has the chance of containing expensive valuables and precious resources for your abilities.  

Study Animals While Hunting

This might not seem necessary at first, but studying animals in RDR 2 is important for several reasons. 

Studying animals puts them into your compendium. Here, you will learn valuable information about them, such as:

  • Where you can find them on the map
  • What types of foods they like (for bait)
  • What weapons you should use to hunt them
  • What types of ammo to use when hunting them
  • What tactics you should use when hunting them

To study animals, press and hold "R1" on PS4 or "LB" on Xbox One when you get close to them to add them to the compendium. You can also study animals from farther away by using your binoculars

To access the compendium, open the game menu and go to "Progress". Then choose "compendium" in the middle. 

Arthur Morgan stands next to his horse in a field after picking a Yorrow plant

Pick Flowers and Harvest Plants for Ingredients

While hunting provides you with skins for crafting, meat for eating, or both for selling, there are tons of flowers and plants in the wilderness that will fulfill all three needs as well -- and don't require stealthy hunting to acquire. 

For example, wild carrots are a perfect food for both Arthur and his horse, while American Ginseng can be used to craft health tonics and Violet Snowdrop can be consumed to increase stamina

Some can be immediately eaten or used when harvested, while others have to be combined with other ingredients before being used. 

Your compendium tells you where to find and how to use each plant, just like it does for animals while hunting. 

Loot Carriages and Rob People

As you ride through the world, you'll inevitably come across carriages and lone riders.

Carriages are great sources of income throughout the game, and especially after you unlock fences in the Chapter 2 mission, The Spines of America. First of all, carriages often have lock boxes on the back. You can shoot the locks off or use the lock breaker to open them silently. Inside, you'll find loot and, sometimes, money

You can also sell carriages to Seamus at Emerald Ranch after completing The Spines of America. Average, less ornate carriages sell for less money than their more grandiose counterparts. 

On the other hand, robbing people and lone riders can also be lucrative, if also more dangerous. Often, riders won't go down without a fight, so be prepared to shoot. One of the best ways to avoid a shootout is to lasso your victims before they see you coming or have a chance to draw their weapons. 

Also, try to rob people at night or off the road. Any witnesses will alert the law -- and some witness might even be the law. 

Buy Masks From Fences and Wear Them

After you unlock fences, you'll be able to buy masks. These are especially useful when holding up carriages, robbing people, and clearing out banks. 

Your bandanna works well, but masks hide your entire face -- and look terrifying to boot. Wearing masks will also still allow you to wear your bandanna and not be recognized by the law. 

Arthur kneels next to a campfire in a field near a farmhouse in RDR2

Camp in the Wilderness

Sometimes it's easier to camp in the wilderness than travel all the way back to Horseshoe Overlook. To camp anywhere on the map, open your item wheel and select the campfire under the "items" tab

You can craft, cook, and rest after you've made camp. This is a good way to pass time if you want to stay in the same area, change time of day, or craft certain items such as coffee or potent bitters.  

Be Careful Trimming Your Hair or Beard

Hair grows in Red Dead Redemption 2.  

When you first get to Horseshoe Overlook, you might be enticed to use the shaving station by Arthur's tent to change his look. However, shaving or cutting your hair means you will lose access to hair and beard styles at the barber

If you cut your hair or beard too short and want a specific style that requires a longer cut, use a hair tonic. You can find these at vendors and in the world as loot. Hair tonics will increase the rate at which your hair grows

You can also sleep to increase the length of your hair or beard, although this method is slower than using a hair tonic. 

Cores, Cores, Cores

We have a whole guide on cores, but the idea behind them is worth repeating because their importance can't be overstated. 

Both you and your horse have bars and cores. Arthur has bars and cores for health, stamina, and Dead Eye, while horses have bars and cores for stamina and health. 

The bar around the core is your "temporary health": this bar depletes first when taking damage, running, or using Dead Eye. When the bar around the core depletes, the core begins to deplete. 

Bars regenerate over time, but cores do not. You must use tonics or provisions to refill cores. 

Lose your health core and you die. Lose your stamina core, and you can't run. Lose your Dead Eye core, and you can use Dead Eye. 

Cleaning a double barrel shotgun in first person mode in Red Dead Redemption 2

Clean Your Guns Regularly

Like in other games with weapon durability, Red Dead Redemption 2's weapons degrade the more you use them. Cleaning your guns with oil will make sure their stats stay at maximum -- or return there. 

The more you use your weapons, the dirtier they'll become. This contributes to wear, meaning you'll be less accurate or you won't be able to reload as fast. 

You can find oil on corpses, in camps, and at gunsmiths. You can even get the gunsmith to clean your gun(s) for you and grab oil to take with you. You can also buy accessories, such as holsters, that will decrease degradation over time by a certain percentage. 

Visit the Gunsmith 

Aside from cleaning your gun(s) and selling items, guns, and ammunition, the gunsmith provides a few other services you'll want to take advantage of. 

You can find all the weapons you've purchased in the game at the gunsmith, and you can also customize your weapons at the gunsmith. Note, they do have to be clean before you can customize them. 

Customize Your Guns

Some gunsmith gun customizations are purely for aesthetics, such as gun grips, engravings, barrel colors, etc. However, other options make your gun(s) better. 

Grips, barrels, sights, and more improve accuracy or range. Some improve damage output and rate of fire. Just know that upgrades like these aren't necessarily cheap, with some going for $15 a pop. 

Ammo Types Matter

Not all ammo is created equal.

For example, regular revolver ammo is simply your standard ammo. It deals good damage and has decent range. However, buy express revolver cartridges and you get around a ~10-15% increase in damage.

Get high-velocity rounds and you get about the same increase to range

You can find these ammo types and more on corpses, in shops, in lock boxes, on shelves, etc. Essentially -- and like with other items in Red Dead Redemption 2 -- always be looting; there's nothing better than getting ammo for free. 

To change ammo types, simply bring up the weapon wheel, highlight the gun you want to change the ammo of, and press "left" or "right" on the D-pad

A cattleman revolver with a long barrel sits on a counter at the gunsmith for upgrading

Keep Your Horse(s) Clean

There's a lot that goes into bonding with your horse(s). Aside from keeping them fed and riding them, you need to keep them clean. 

There are two ways to do this: brush them and wash them. Both are relatively simple tasks. The first requires you get the horse brush and the second requires you simply find an area of clean water (rain will even work). 

However, they're both important because your horse(s) won't recover health and stamina as quickly if they're dirty

Save Money By Getting Caught by the Law

As outlaws tend to do, you'll eventually get a bounty on your head. To pay it, you can do one of two things: you can go to one of RDR 2's post offices, which are typically located near stagecoaches or in train stations, or you can get caught by the law

In every single case, getting caught is cheaper. For example, a $15 bounty can turn into a $13 payment by getting caught. I'm not sure there's an exact ration, but you will always save money by surrendering to the law. 

What's more, you don't lose anything by spending a night in jail, other than your wanted status. Sitting through a short cutscene is well worth the money you save. 

However, this doesn't work with bounty hunters

How to Surrender to the Law

Surrendering to the law is easy. All you have to do is go into the red area on the map (this will either be a bubble or an entire territory, depending on how wanted you are), keep your guns holstered, find a lawman, look at them using "L2" or "LT" and choose the "surrender" option. 

Automatically Hogtie NPCs

There are myriad reasons why you wouldn't want to kill an NPC. Whether it's for a mission or your own nefarious (or hilarious) purposes, there are times you'll need to capture someone instead of offing them. 

You probably already know you can equip your lasso, hold "L2" or "LT", and then press "R2" or "RT" to wrangle them. If they're on a horse, this is really the only option you have. 

However, if they're on foot, you can run after them and auto-hogtie them. All you have to do is equip the lasso, run at them, and tackle them with "Circle" or "B". When you tackle them, Arthur will automatically tie them up. 


Hopefully, this beginner's guide will make your first few hours of Red Dead Redemption 2 more enjoyable, as well as more focused on killing lawmen than on wondering where something is or how to do something. 

Be sure to check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides

Red Dead Redemption 2 Guide: How To Customize and Get New Guns Sun, 28 Oct 2018 11:19:24 -0400 David Jagneaux

There are lots of guns in Red Dead Redemption 2. In the first few hours you’ll spend much of your time with revolvers, bows, and basic repeater rifles, but you eventually come across pistols, long-range rifles with roughly attached scopes, and all-powerful shotguns.

All together there are close to 60 guns in Red Dead Redemption 2 and each of them can be tweaked, customized, and upgraded to your heart’s content.

Gun Customization

To customize your weapons all you have to do is head to a nearby Gunsmith. The first one you find in the game is in Valentine, but most proper cities have stores as well. Just walk up to the shopkeeper and you’ll be able to browse the weapons you have already and purchase upgrades.

For example, on a shotgun that could include improving the barrel or stock, adding iron sights, and on rifles even adding scopes. You can also do things like engrave your weapons and change colors.

We’d advise focusing on high accuracy over high damage because a lot of the deadliest firefights you find yourself in tend to be on horseback. Well, that and ammo capacity. Buy upgraded bandoliers and upgraded gunbelts as soon as you can.

Gun Maintenance and Favorites

Gunsmiths also let you clean weapons, but we’d actually advise just buying oil and cleaning them yourself out in the field. Weapons can get dirty and worn over time and that can lead to things like jammed guns or lower accuracy because of wear and tear. Just like real life, maintaining your guns is crucial.

And the more you use a weapon, the more Arthur grows accustomed to it. If you use a specific gun enough, it can be assigned as one of his “favorites” which unlocks better accuracy and other perks with that specific weapon.

The Best Guns

If you’re aching for a bump in your firepower and effectiveness in combat, it could be wise to purchase some new guns from a gunsmith. We recommend the Schofield Revolver, Volcanic Pistol, or Lichefield Rifle as good, relatively inexpensive options. But you can actually loot weapons in the world and find rare and unique guns -- these are always the best options.

For example, if you do the Gunslinger side quests you can track down Billy Midnight and kill him for his high-fire rate and high-accuracy Mauser Pistol. Other weapons are tied to specific missions and challenges in the world.

Check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides here on GameSkinny.

Red Dead Redemption 2: How To Bond With Your Horse & Customize It Sun, 28 Oct 2018 11:13:06 -0400 David Jagneaux

Horses are extremely important in Red Dead Redemption 2. Not only will you likely spend just as much, if not more, time on your horse than compared to on-foot, but they are living, breathing creatures in the game world that must be taken care of carefully.

No matter how much time you spend with a horse, bonding with it, and upgrading everything, if it dies then it’s gone forever if you can’t revive it. I’ll never forget when I lost Bullseye on a mission that went bad.

How To Bond With Your Horse Quickly

If you’re not too far away, you can press up on your d-pad to whistle and call for your horse.

The more you ride your horse and spend time with it, the higher your bond level will go. The higher your bond level is, the higher your horse’s health and stamina will be. Plus, you’ll unlock new abilities with your horse as the bond level increases.

Once you’ve got a horse that’s saddled up, there are six main ways to keep your horse happy and increase your bond with it:

  • Feed your horse: Feeding your horse hay, carrots, and other items is a sure-fire way to heal it in the heat of battle (hold L1/LB then cycle to horse items) but when you’re on the ground you can hold L2/LT and select “feed” for some casual eating, which is great for bonding too.
  • Brush your horse: While standing next to your horse, hold L2/LT and select “brush” to clean it off. Keeping your horse clean is important for not only bonding, but a dirty horse suffers from lower stamina as well.
  • Pat your horse:  Finally, when on the ground you can hold L2/LT and select “pat” to give your good little horsie a loving pat on the side of the head to soothe it and build your bond.
  • Ride your horse: Spending time on your horse, galloping around and traveling slowly increases your bond over time.
  • Ease your horse: While out riding your horse may get upset, start bucking, or grunting with anxiety. Press L3/LS to soothe it and ease it with some kind “it’s okay there boyyyy” from Arthur’s soothing deep voice.
  • Protect your horse: Similarly, steer clear of dangerous areas and predators to decrease the chances of your horse getting spooked.

Basically my routine is I go up to my horse or call it to me then I feed it, brush it, and pat it before riding. If you just do this every time, it’ll be at a much higher bond level in no time.

How To Get New Horses

There are two main ways to get new horse in Red Dead Redemption 2.

The most obvious way is to buy them from stables that you can find in towns or peppered along roads. Typically these horses are not cheap and generally we wouldn’t recommend buying a horse unless you’re in desperate need of one or one of the horses up for sale has amazing stats.

The other way to get a horse is to just steal it. You’ll find horses all over town, on roads, in the wild, and with bandits that can be taken as your own. There is a bit of work to be done in terms of easing it and getting it to bond with you, but you can totally do it. Or, after killing someone, you could always hop on their horse and ride it into town to stable it as a backup or sell it.

How To Retrieve Your Horse

If you get separated from your horse you either have to whistle for it and hope you’re close enough or go to the nearest stable and retrieve it. Using some video game magic, it will teleport to the stable you’re at for free.

How To Customize Your Horse

Finally, there’s also horse customization in Red Dead Redemption 2. It’s extremely thorough and feels reminiscent of the vehicle customization options you’re probably familiar with from the Grand Theft Auto series.

To customize your horse all you have to do is find one of the many stables and go inside just like you would if you wanted to buy a hose.

Customization options on horses are broken down into two types: cosmetic and functional. For example, things like the length and color of your horse's mane and tail are purely cosmetic customization options. But change out the stirrups can actually increase speed and stamina and upgrading to larger saddlebags will expand the inventory.

That's it for the basics of RDR2's horses. Be sure to check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides here on GameSkinny!

Red Dead Redemption 2: Legendary Bear Pelt Location and Tips Sat, 27 Oct 2018 16:27:19 -0400 Synzer

One of the early missions in Red Dead Redemption 2 has you chasing a legendary bear with Hosea. During the mission you come literally face to face with this monster of an animal, but you can't finish the hunt during the mission.

I'm going to go over everything you need to know to take this bear out and what to do with the legendary pelt you can skin from it.

Preparation and Hunting

The first thing you'll want to do is come prepared. If you didn't succeed the first time, or went back to camp instead, that's perfectly fine! Here are a few things I suggest before going on the hunt:

  • Repeater or Rifle - You can put a scope on it, but it is not necessary.
  • Provisions and Tonics to increase Dead Eye - You'll want to finish the bear while using Dead Eye if possible.
  • Patience and Perseverance - Things can go south pretty fast. So you may need to retry.

Now for the actual hunt. If you open your map and look towards the Grizzlies and zoom in, you'll see a bear icon with a crown over its head. This means it is the legendary bear.

red dead redemption 2 legendary bear pelt location

The Grizzlies is located north of Emerald Ranch, or northeast of Valentine. I already had Emerald Ranch discovered so I found it easiest to take the train from Valentine to Emerald Ranch once I had my supplies.

Once you reach the location, look to the top-left of your screen. You will see a message that says you've entered the legendary animal's area. Then it will say you can either track it, you can't track it because there is too much activity in the area, or it won't be back for some time.

You will need to leave the area, pass time by sleeping at a camp, and come back until you get the message that says you can track it. Once you're ready, just turn on Eagle Eye and follow the yellow clues until you reach the bear. I've always seen it in the same spot, between some trees.

  • Start by using your rifle from a far distance, then wait for it to get in clear sight.
  • Now, just use Dead Eye and target the head as much as possible.
  • As soon as it run out, just activate it again. Doing this two or three times should be enough to kill it.
  • If it reaches you, you can attempt to escape by pressing "B" or "O", but I was not able to escape in time on my first attempt.

Congratulations on your first legendary animal kill! Now let's go over what you can do with the pelt that you skin from it.

Crafting at the Trapper

You will need to take the legendary bear pelt to the Trapper to be able to craft anything. The easiest way to find him is to open the map, choose locations, and scroll down until you reach Trapper. Now, just set a way point and make your way to him.

If he is far away and you are near a train, you can use this to get closer. If you keep the pelt on your horse and use a train, the horse will show up at your destination and still have the pelt!

When you reach the Trapper, take the pelt and sell it to him. You will get $60, and have the option to craft special clothing. Below is a list of what you can craft.

red dead redemption 2 legendary bear pelt crafting

  • Legendary Bear Head Hat - Requires legendary bear pelt.
    • Provides some warmth.
  • Legendary Bear Coat - Requires legendary bear pelt and perfect bison pelt.
    • Provides much warmth. Too warm for hot weather.
  • Legendary Bear Roper - Requires legendary bear pelt and perfect bull hide.
    • Provides no warmth, good in hot weather.

The last item doesn't require the legendary bear, but I will list it anyway since it is part of the set.

  • Boar Riding Gloves - Requires perfect boar pelt and two perfect rabbit pelts.

Luckily, you only need one pelt to craft all three items. You will only need to get the extra materials for the coat and roper. 

That's all there is to know to hunt the first legendary bear in Red Dead Redemption 2 and what to do with its pelt. Be sure to check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides. Leave a comment down below if you have any questions or need more help!

My Hero One's Justice Beginner's Guide Tips & Tricks Sat, 27 Oct 2018 15:47:32 -0400 RobotsFightingDinosaurs

Having trouble going PLUS ULTRA in My Hero One's JusticeIt's fine now. Why? Because GameSkinny is here! Whether you're having trouble with the game's combo system or struggling dealing with counters and unblockables, our My Hero One's Justice beginner's guide will have you fighting like a UA student in no time flat.

My Hero One's Justice can seem a bit daunting when you pick the game up as there's no real tutorial save for a few missions in the story mode where you learn what all the buttons do. No, you're generally on your own learning the ins and outs of every character -- the way they work, their strengths, and their weaknesses.

The game also hides a whole lot of key tips in its loading screens, so this guide is meant to collect all these necessary strategies in one place. Think of it as one of Midoriya's notebooks! By the end of this My Hero One's Justice beginner's guide, you'll have all the strategies necessary for taking your game online and competing.

Getting Started

Though it's been compared to Naruto Ultimate Ninja Storm at length, in order to really get to grips with My Hero One's Justice's mechanics, it's helpful to keep Pokken Tournament in mind, given that there's an attack triangle mechanic that you must master in order to keep from being absolutely stomped at close range.

You have normal attacks, counter attacks that turn your character yellow, and unblockable attacks that turn your character red. Your target combo will always be comprised of normal attacks, while quirk attacks can sometimes be either counters or unblockables depending on the character.

The Attack Triangle
  • Normal attacks interrupt unblockable attacks
  • Unblockable attacks and throws interrupt counters
  • Counters are effective against normal attacks

Of course, you can guard against counters and normal attacks, but guarding too much leaves you open to mind games and mixups. It's usually best, when someone commits to an attack with a long startup animation like a counter or an unblockable, to punish them for it by launching a combo of your own -- especially since combos in My Hero One's Justice can routinely eat up 1/3 of a player's health bar. It's just not optimal to sit in guard when you could be on the attack.

That said, unless you're using a character like All Might who has no real projectile options, you won't want to be the person that closes the distance unless you're doing it while your opponent is in hitstun.

Optimal Strategies for Zoners

Image via Youtube

The current online competitive meta for My Hero One's Justice revolves around mid-range zoning and projectile spam (much like the meta for Pokken Tournament does) but as you can imagine, that alone won't get the job done. Simply keeping your opponent at range won't get you much if you fail to convert.

If you're using a projectile based character, know that in almost every case, a projectile hit can be followed up with a dash that brings you in range for a target combo -- meaning that it's feasible to start a huge combo even when you're at range, especially if you're playing as a character like Kyoka Jiro or Denki Kaminari who can stunlock folks with their projectiles.

Once you've closed the gap that way, launch into the combo of your choice, making sure to hold that dash button whenever you knock your opponent out of range to extend the combo. When the combo is over, don't rush in again, just rinse and repeat. Keep poking away with projectiles until you feel comfortable starting another combo, ideally one that can lead to a wall stun.

If you're battling a melee character, just remember your sidekicks! If you have good timing, you can break out of almost any combo with a little help from your friends.

Optimal Strategies for Melee Fighters

Image via Youtube

Whether you prefer characters like All Might or Muscular, or simply want to get up in your opponent's face, there are plenty of ways of dealing with projectile spam in My Hero One's Justice.

Luckily, unlike Pokken Tournament, most projectiles don't hone in on the opponent, so as long as you're closing distance while spiraling towards them, you'll be relatively okay. Just don't be afraid to guard against bigger projectiles like Momo's grenades or Jiro's heartbeat pulse if you don't have the room to hop over them. 

Once you've closed the distance, you'll really want to play it smart. Most of the time, your online opponent will try to open the brawl with a counter or a throw, so be ready and watch for the color. React accordingly, and if you can, use that punish to start a combo of your own.

Again, it's important to rush your opponent down with the dash move as much as you can during a combo -- and especially as a melee-focused fighter, you want to stay on your opponent and not give them an inch even after the combo finishes. Try to force them into a corner and not give them anywhere to go and you'll be fine.

Final Tips

Regardless of your playing style, if your character has a chargeable quirk move, you will need to make it a priority to charge it all the time. Not only does it give you more offensive options, it also gives you a huge opportunity to play mind games if you pocket the charge for a while and let your opponent forget the ace up your sleeve. 

As with any other fighting game, the best thing you can do to get good at My Hero One's Justice is just spend a bunch of time in practice mode, seeing which moves cancel into which other moves, maximizing the damage potential of each of the combos you'll have up your sleeve.

In addition, given the fact that the Plus Ultra move input is so simple, you'll really want to be ending every combo you can with a powerful finishing move. Practice the timing in single-player mode, and you'll be ready for anything that online play can throw at you.

Make sure you check out our tier list and at-a-glance character guide to take your game to the next level! PLUS ULTRA!

How to Get the Horse Brush in Red Dead Redemption 2 Sat, 27 Oct 2018 13:54:55 -0400 Jonathan Moore

There's a lot that goes into taking care of your horse in Red Dead Redemption 2. Aside from feeding it, one of the most important things you can do is keep your horse clean. That doesn't just mean keeping mud off its coat by washing it, that also means brushing it regularly

Doing both of these things is important for maintaining the bond with your horse, as well as keeping its health and stamina bars full. 

Of course, you'll actually need a brush to keep your horse's coat clean of dust and dander. However, you can't just go into any store and buy a brush. Instead, you have to complete a quest to get it.   

Luckily, that quest is pretty easy -- and it's one you can start and finish very early in the game. Here's how to complete it and get the horse brush. 

Complete the Quest: Exit Pursued by a Bruised Ego 

To start this quest, you'll need to find Hosea Matthews in your camp. From your tent, head toward the horse hitch near the edge of the camp (the one where you almost always leave your horse when entering the camp). He'll be sitting on a rock cleaning his gun

Once you start the quest, Hosea will ask you to help him hunt a Legendary Bear. In fact, this is the first Legendary hunting quest in the game, and it's also how you gain the ability to find other Legendary animals on the map. 

However, before you head off to kill the bear, you'll need to take a horse to the Valentine stables. Once you get there (it's on rails, so you won't have to look for it), sell your horse and purchase another one. 

I'd suggest just buying the $13 horse, since all of the others are priced too high this early in the game. That especially true if you haven't unlocked fast travel yet and need that precious $325. 

Once you buy the horse, you'll automatically get the horse brush. 

There are two ways to use the horse brush: while riding or while standing. While riding, simply open the item wheel with "L1" on PS4 or "LB" on Xbox One and go over to the horse tab. Select the brush and Arthur will automatically start brushing.

While standing next to your horse, hold "L2" on PS4 or "LT" on Xbox One and then press "right" on the D-pad


You can brush your horse as much as you want, but you will only increase your bond every few brushes. Essentially, you can't spam it for bonding points. 

Be sure to check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides while you're here. 

How To Fast Travel in Red Dead Redemption 2 Fri, 26 Oct 2018 22:27:29 -0400 Zack Palm

Red Dead Redemption 2 features a massive map for you to explore, with plenty of secrets waiting for you to discover. Though, getting around this environment takes quite a lot of time.

As with most modern-day games, RDR2 has a method to make things go quicker: fast travel. However, it's not immediately apparent of how to gain access to this feature in RDR2. Depending on how you play, you may miss it for quite some time.

In this guide, we break down the quickest way to unlock fast travel in Red Dead Redemption 2.

How To Unlock Fast Travel in Red Dead Redemption 2

To begin the quest that ultimately unlocks fast travel, you want to proceed to the western side of your camp and look for Leopold Strauss. You can find him sitting on a rock, overlooking the valley.

Speaking to him unlocks a long quest line -- Money Lending and Other Sins. Luckily, you only have to complete one of the various side quests to access what you need: the ledger (the video above shows you the fastest way to unlock it). 

The ledger will give you access to camp upgrades. These additions add things like medicine carts and ammunition crates to your camp, increasing gang morale. The ledger also gives you access to the lodging upgradeFirst Things First

This upgrade costs $220. The funds will come out of both your pocket and the camp's savings. You will then need to purchase the Next in Line upgrade, which costs $325, to get access to fast travel from Arthur's tent after being unlocked.

That's no small price. It takes a bit of time to gather this up, and here are some great methods to do this.

How to Get Money Fast in Red Dead Redemption 2

The $545 you need won't come out of thin air. There's plenty of methods for you to earn the cash, though.


Your first choice should be to check out the bounties available in Valentine. Although you can find bounties listed in a variety of sheriff's offices in towns around the map, the bounty in Valentine is the closest for this quest. 

Bounties offer a quick influx of $50 or more to get you started quick. However, bounties aren't as plentiful as you might expect, so you'll have to shift to other money-making methods quickly. 

Side Quests

After you've exhausted bounties, your next step may be to see what side quests you can tackle located nearby. This money stacks up over time, though you might feel you can earn more faster if you're willing to risk the law.

Robbing & Stealing

Robbing people always provides a high rate of income, and with that high rate, you have to endure the consequences. Choose your targets wisely, and make sure you have your bandanna on your face to hide your identity. You don't want the law on your back before you're ready to jump around the map like a jackrabbit.

You can also steal things from people's homes or businesses -- then resell those items for profit. 


The last method you can use to acquire funds is by hunting the local wildlife. You can skin these animals and sell them in town to the populace. You can also sell the meat to the local butcher.

If you study this path, you'll need to return to the city quickly after your kill to make sure the creature does not start rotting. When it starts decomposing, it'll lose value on the market. 

Playing Poker and Dominoes

Depending on your skill and luck, you can also play NPCs in games of chance and skill, such as dominoes and poker. Both of these can net big winnings, but the thought of grinding $220 at one time, getting close, and losing it all is a waking nightmare. Only go this route if you feel lucky. 


After you've acquired your hard-earned cash, return to camp and find the ledger once again. You can purchase access to the fast travel system, and now getting around the map became so much easie.

Enjoying your time in Red Dead Redemption 2? Let us know in the comments below and make sure to check out these helpful articles to make your time in the west so much easier.

Check out our other Red Dead Redemption 2 guides

Red Dead Redemption 2 Cheats: A Complete Guide Fri, 26 Oct 2018 22:03:47 -0400 David Jagneaux

Red Dead Redemption 2 is an enormous game. In many ways, it’s the most ambitious game of the generation and certainly the deepest and most lifelike of Rockstar’s stellar list of open world games. If you've played many Rockstar games in the past, such as Grand Theft Auto III, Liberty City, and San Andreas, then you might remember the prevalence of cheat codes. In fact, in past generations, cheat codes were prevalent across pretty much every game genre.

Everyone remembers the Konami code and until very recently, my fingers were ingrained with the muscle memory for spawning a jet in San Andreas. Back then, you had to input a complex series of buttons in rapid succession to activate cheats, but just like the waning days of the Wild West in Red Dead Redemption 2, times are changing.

We’ve put together this list of cheat codes in Red Dead Redemption 2, as well as details on how to enter them, so that you can have Infinite Stamina, Infinite Ammo, and the War Horse whenever you want it. Read on. 

How To Find Cheat Codes in Red Dead Redemption 2

Not all cheats in Red Dead Redemption 2 are created equally. What we mean by this is that some of them have prerequisites in-game that need to be fulfilled before they will fully unlock -- even if you know the proper code and type it in.

For example, you’ll see in the list below that some of the cheat codes require you to purchase in-game newspapers to fully unlock them. You can find newspaper sales people by looking for the little newspaper icon on your map when in a town.

Open up your inventory, go to the Documents tab, and look for purchased newspapers there. If you use the newspaper, Arthur will pull it out and you can inspect the text yourself. Check the margins, edges, and bottom borders to find phrases that stand out by themselves to locate different cheat codes. Once you spot the cheats, go enter them in the menu by following the directions below.

So if you want, you could go about getting cheat codes manually through playing the game. However, not all cheat codes are tied to newspapers. Some of the cheats are phrases you’ll just find in the game world itself, like those scrawled across ice or carved into objects.

Since the game world is so vast, it’d be quite daunting to only find them this way. Just checking our list down below is much easier!

How To Enter Cheat Codes in Red Dead Redemption 2

Entering cheat codes in Red Dead Redemption 2 is super simple. All you have to do is pause the game, navigate to the Settings menu, then press either triangle on PS4 or Y on Xbox One to bring up the Cheats interface.

From there, you should see a long list of locked “Unknown” cheats that you can’t see yet. Press triangle again (or Y) if the prompt doesn’t automatically open to bring up the entry pad. Now all you have to do is type in each code exactly as it’s spelled (capitalization doesn’t matter) to unlock each corresponding cheat.

Once a cheat is unlocked, it will appear in the list where you can quickly and easily toggle it on or off as you see fit.

If any cheats are activated in Red Dead Redemption 2, you cannot save any single player progress, and you cannot collect Trophies and Achievements for the duration of your playthrough. So you should only use cheats for fun to mess around since nothing else will count. It’s also wise to save your game before enabling any cheats.

Keep in mind that, as explained, some cheats require you to purchase in-game newspapers before they will fully unlock.

List of Red Dead Redemption 2 Cheat Codes

The below list is not complete as codes are still being uncovered, but all of the codes listed here have been tested and confirmed to be working:

Cheat Code Requirement
Infinite Ammo Abundance is the dullest desire   Get New Hanover Gazette No.27 in Valentine during Chapter 1
Infinite Stamina The lucky be strong evermore   New Hanover Gazette No. 33 after the completing "Urban Pleasures" mission in Chapter 4
Get Heavy Weapons Greed is American Virtue   Purchase newspaper after completing the “Advertising, The New American Art”
mission in Chapter 3
Refill/Fortify Health, Stamina, Dead Eye Your flourish before you die Purchase newspaper after completing the “The King’s Son” mission in Chapter 6
Show entire
Red Dead Redemption map
You Long for Sight by See Nothing Purchase newspaper after completing the “Blood Feuds, Ancient and Modern”
mission in Chapter 3
Set Dead Eye to Level 3 I shall be better  N/A
Set Dead Eye to Level 5 I seek and I find  N/A
Raise Honor Rating Virtue Unearned is not virtue   Purchase newspaper after completing the “Urban Pleasures” mission in Chapter 4
Create Horse Wagon Keep your dreams simple  N/A
Create Circus Wagon Would you be happier as a clown Purchase newspaper after
completing the Epilogue
Instantly Get Drunk A fool on command  N/A
Increase Horse Whistle Range Better than my dog    N/A
Create Race Horse Run! Run! Run!  N/A
Create War Horse You are a beast built for war Purchase newspaper after
completing the Epilogue
Create Carriage Keep your dreams light N/A


And that’s all of the cheat codes in Red Dead Redemption 2, plus their requirements, that we know about so far. If you know of any others feel free to let us know. Have fun out there in the Wild West!

My Hero One's Justice Tiered Character Overview Fri, 26 Oct 2018 16:03:36 -0400 RobotsFightingDinosaurs

My Hero One's Justice has finally hit the store shelves! Fans of the anime nationwide have been waiting patiently for the My Hero Academia fighting game, and now that it's out, the next step is to enroll in My Hero Academia Academy.

That's right -- we've put in work with the game, and we're happy to be your teacher, giving you the ins and outs of the characters in the game. Use this My Hero One's Justice character guide to see who's in the higher tiers, and find a character that works for you!


Tier: S

The current meta in My Hero One's Justice favors heavy zoning with projectiles before getting way up close and personal, and that's what Todoroki does best. Don't be afraid to stay rooted to a spot and spam ice stalagmites and flame breath, forcing your opponent to come to you. 

Then, once they do, show them how fearsome Todoroki can be up close. His ice moves make it super easy to string together insanely long combos. You can button mash your way into a 1/2 health combo. Imagine what you can do when you know what you're doing!


Tier: S

Kaminari's combos don't last super long, but they are incredibly powerful. He's also a versatile character, comfortable at range with projectiles and up close in melee fights as well.

Zone your opponents, then move in for the kill with your target combo. Cancel that into your electro-dash, then use the electo-dome attack. If you're feeling frisky, keep tapping in order to electrify yourself and boost your attack power for the next go-around. Just be aware that just like the show, if you overdo it, you'll be helplessly giving your rival the double thumbs-up for a while.


Tier: A

All Might plays similarly to Deku (appropriate, given that they share a quirk) which means that, like Deku, All Might is a great character for beginners. But while Midoriya is more of an all-around fighter, All Might excels up close.

He's one of the few My Hero One's Justice characters that doesn't have a projectile attack in his arsenal, so you'll really need to familiarize yourself with his counters and throws since your opponent will likely be spamming counters and throws at you in order to break through your flurries of blows. Keep the pressure on and watch your opponent, and you'll be fine.


(Image via Youtube)

Tier: A

Midoriya is a pretty basic all-around character with no glaring weaknesses and no huge strengths. Though Midoriya has a few projectile attacks, he excels most in melee range as his target combo cancels seamlessly into each one of his quirk attacks.

This makes Deku (Midoriya) a great My Hero One's Justice character for beginners -- and it's why you play as him in the tutorial. Getting good with Deku will make you good with every other character in the game, but don't let that turn you off the character. If you guard smart and master the game's countering techniques, he's a monster to fight against. 


Tier: A

Momo can be finicky. She has probably the best mid-range projectile in the game in her flashbang grenades, and if you time it just right, you can combo it into the laser move.

Her combos do a lot of damage, especially with the spear out, and her shield move offers her a reliable combo starter that can negate oncoming attacks. She just struggles mightily against strong zoners, and once she's interrupted by a sidekick move, it can be tough to get all your equipment back.


Tomura Shigaraki

Tier: A

Tomura Shigaraki would be one of the most powerful characters in the game even if he didn't have a move that, when repeated 4 times, results in an automatic K.O., or even if that move wasn't easily linked to in combos. 

So yeah, that's what you're going to want to be going for with Shigaraki. Target combo into Quirk 2 into Quirk 3. It's a true combo, and if you can land Quirk 3 (AKA Death Penalty) 4 times, the round is yours. As long as you can close the distance, you'll be okay. 


Tier: A

Jiro's moveset is one of the most versatile in the game. Her main quirk attack is one of My Hero One's Justice's best projectiles.

The sound waves she shoots are ginormous and have sneaky hitboxes that are a bit bigger than it seems like they should be. They also stunlock your opponent, making the move an ideal combo starter as well as a viable pester option. Pair that with the fact that she can follow up her target combo with both of her other quirk attacks and Jiro becomes a true terror.


(Image via Youtube)

Tier: A

Speaking of zoning, if you're the kind of fighting game player who likes to hang back and spam Hadoukens in Street Fighter, pick Dabi and never look back. He's the game's purest long-distance fighter, with an array of attacks from ground traps to lasers to fireballs.

You'll be able to get a ton of mileage out of being that annoying player who hangs back and throws out ranged attacks. Dabi can be absolutely devastating in close range combat if you place your traps right, stringing together combos linked by traps or projectiles. Just don't let your opponent close the distance before you've set your traps.


Tier: A

Eraserhead is one of the more annoying characters in the game to play against. His bread and butter is his erase grab, which is unblockable and prevents opponents from using any quirk attacks, making it almost impossible for them to string together literally any kind of powerful combo.

Troll your opponent and keep them quirkless for as long as you can by any means necessary, because if you're able to do that, you'll have the upper hand.


Tier: B

Everyone's favorite froggy waifu is a pretty solid choice given the fact that Froppy has unblockable throw moves that can hit from a distance.

It really makes fights against folks like All Might and Iida a whole lot easier when you can intercept them as they're trying to close the distance. That's where Tsuyu excels, in interrupting attacks and turning the tables. So be patient and wait for your moment to lash out with that sticky frog tongue!


Tier: B

It's odd that in the story mode, you play as Bakugo in the earlier stages given that he's a more complicated character to master.

Making Bakugo's quirks work in his favor is really tough, as they're all close-range attacks (unless you charge his Quirk 1 attack, which you should absolutely be doing at all times). If you're having trouble learning how to cancel target combos into quirk attacks, give Bakugo a try in practice mode.

One of his quirk attacks is an insanely powerful launching attack that has a generous timing window after your target combo hits. That'll be your bread and butter with Bakugo -- a target combo into the launcher into an air combo (and hopefully a wall stun.) Having said that, what you'll really be going for with Bakugo is cornering your opponent.

If you can position your opponent against the wall, all you have to do is tap that Quirk 1 attack and you'll effortlessly be able to chew up at least 1/3 of your enemy's health bar in one combo. Just watch out for grabs and ranged attackers -- Bakugo doesn't close distance well.


Tier: B

The bet that you're making when you pick Kirishima is that you'll be able to super armor your way through your opponents' combos and knock them out before they put you in the garbage can. Use your headbutt to activate your super armor and then just go at it for as long as you can, linking your target combo in with your dash attacks.

This wouldn't be an issue if he could close distance with any consistency, but he's really slow, and will be vulnerable to long range attacks along the way. Put on the pressure and never stop, or you'll lose in the battle of attrition.


Image via Youtube

Tier: B

Muscular's whole playstyle revolves around comboing into his charge move, and then afterwards, once it's been fully charged, comboing into his super-powerful punch move. It's simple and effective, but it's also easily countered by, well, folks who know how to counter.

Use your throws and don't be afraid to go for the mixup in order to get into your opponent's head. 


Tier: B

How good you'll be with Uraraka will depend on how many times your opponent has lost to Urarakas that use the spin move and nothing else. Uravity's combos make heavy use of that move, so try not to rely on it too much or you'll become predictable. Make sure you always have your boulders out and look for your opening, just be aware that folks will be expecting your combos so try and play some mind games with them.


Tier: B

In theory, Tokoyami operates kind of like Rosalina and Luma do in Super Smash Bros. for the Wii U, but much less annoying.

Most of your fighting should be done in solo mode, since this allows you to cue Tokoyami and Dark Shadow's attacks separately, allowing for even longer combos. That said, if you've backed your opponent into a corner, switch to team mode and have Dark Shadow just swipe away. 


Tier: B

Iida is another all-around melee attacker like All Might, but, understandably, with more of a focus on speed.

To be effective with Iida, you're going to need to commit to rushdown tactics using his quirk attacks. Be on the offensive at all times, since your special attacks close the distance between you and your opponent very effectively, even against zoners.

Watch out for characters like Kaminari and Jiro who have area of effect attacks -- they'll be really tough matchups.


Tier: B

I'm not really sure why they gave Stain a counter when every character already has counter attacks, even though it is a whole lot more powerful. Either way, Stain is another beginner-friendly character, with easy cancels into quirk moves.

It's a bit tough to string together insanely long combos with Stain so you'll need to rinse and repeat a bit, but just keep mashing that stab button and it'll all work out. Unless you're up against Dabi. Then you're on your own.


Image via Youtube

Tier: C

Gran Torino, as you might expect, is one of the speedier characters in the game. In most fighting games that would make him into a force to be reckoned with, but given the way My Hero One's Justice's engine works, it doesn't really give Gran Torino that much of an advantage since nearly every other character in the game is better at zoning than Gran Torino is.

The saving grace here is that if your cancels and followups are on point, Gran Torino can string together some insanely long combos. It's just kind of a shame, since almost every other character in the game can deal more damage with their combos with a whole lot less effort.


Tier: C

In any other game, Himiko Toga would be an incredibly formidable character, given that she can both copy her opponent's moves, but also steal her opponent's sidekicks for a short period of time. It sounds interesting and powerful, but unfortunately, it's more of a gimmick than anything else.

Copying your opponent essentially takes away all of your quirk moves, meaning that you can't really string together the kinds of huge combos that every other character in the game will be relying on. It's super disappointing, because Toga's base quirk moves are pretty great -- they cover a huge distance and stunlock opponents. It's just that there's no real reason to pick her over someone like Asui or Aizawa, unless you're a fan of the character.


How have you been enjoying My Hero One's Justice so far? Let us know in the comments below!

How to Manually Save Your Game in Red Dead Redemption 2 Fri, 26 Oct 2018 15:24:20 -0400 Zack Palm

When you first start playing Red Dead Redemption 2, it's not entirely clear how to manually save your game. Yes, there's an autosave feature that will keep you from starting all over if you die or make a mistake, but if you want to manually save at a specific point, you'll have to dig through the menu just a bit. 

Unlike most AAA games of the last, oh, decade, RDR 2 doesn't have its save function clearly listed in the menu. This part's obvious, but when you're in game, hit Start on Xbox One or Options on PS4 to jump into the main menu.

Once in the menu, hit the tab labeled 'Story'. From there, you'll see 'Save', 'Load', etc., and you can manually save your progress. 

You may also want to know how RDR 2's autosave feature works. Essentially, the game autosaves right before a mission, after a mission, when you bathe, sleep, shave, buy or sell an item, or travel a certain distance (although this last part is a little unclear).

Corrupted Red Dead 2 Saves

Plenty of people in the comments below have shared their issues with Red Dead Redemption 2's saving, and many have reported dealing with corrupted save files. Unfortunately, beyond starting a new game, there's little you can do to solve this issue, as of yet.

One of the things you can do to help Rockstar learn about and deal with these issues is by contacting them an leaving a ticket. To do so, reach out here: Rockstar Support Page.



Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more on Red Dead Redemption 2, and be sure to check out our RDR 2 guides for beginner's tips and tricks, how to exploit the game's gold glitch, and more. 

Red Dead Redemption 2 Guide: Cores and Bars Info Fri, 26 Oct 2018 15:12:13 -0400 Synzer

Red Dead Redemption 2 has a slightly different system of Health, Stamina, and Dead Eye management. You will need to keep and eye on these, particularly your health, as you play through the game. If you happen to forget after a while, don't panic -- you'll live. Let's start by fully explaining Cores and Bars.

Cores versus Bars


First the easy mechanic to understand, Bars. These are the rings around your Health, Stamina, and Dead Eye icons on the bottom-left of your screen above the mini-map. For simplicity, I'm going to describe just the Health for now, and get to Stamina and Dead Eye later.

Your Health Bar/Ring can be thought of as your temporary health. As you take damage, this will deplete. It will also refill over time. Once your bar is gone completely, that's when the Core comes into play.


Cores are basically your overall/emergency meters. These are indicated by the icons themselves. For health, that is the heart icon above your mini-map. Once your bar runs out, your heart core icon will begin to deplete. Once that is fully gone, you die. These also determine how fast your bars refill. If your core is mostly full, your bar will regenerate quickly.

red dead redemption 2 core info

Cores will not regenerate over time. Your Health Core also automatically drains over time, even when you do nothing. You can open the menu, select player, then select Arthur to see the remaining percentage and time on your Cores.

Stamina and Dead Eye

Stamina icon is the lightning bolt, and Dead Eye is the, you guessed it, "X" eye icon. 

Stamina gets depleted when you sprint and Dead Eye gets depleted as you use Dead Eye. The only difference between Dead Eye and the rest is that you must actively refill both the Bar and the Core.

Horse Cores and Bars

Your horse also has Health and Stamina Bars and Cores. These look like Arthur's, but they have a horseshoe icon and are to the right of his icons.

red dead redemption 2 horse cores and bars

Refilling Cores and Bars

Since Cores are very important and don't regenerate over time, naturally you will need to know how to refill them yourself. Bars can also be refilled in a pinch. All of these can be restored through specific items called, Provisions and Tonics.


These are the most important as they restore your Cores. There are some that restore multiple types at once, like Health and Stamina for example. Others will damage a Core and restore one or both of the others.

Be sure to pay attention to what each Provision does so you don't end up doing more harm than good. It's better to be safe than sorry.


These restore your bars and some can also restore multiple at once. There are certain Tonics, signified by a yellow color, that can also give a Fortify effect.

Fortify means the bar will become a complete circle and not drain for a short time. This can greatly help in dangerous situations, or just make completing missions a lot easier.

red dead redemption 2 provisions and tonics

Increasing Your Bar Max

If you notice early on in the game, your bars/rings are not complete circles. You can increase the length of each by doing certain activities. Below are examples of how to increase each ring.

  • Health - Hunting and skinning
  • Stamina - Running and swimming
  • Dead Eye - Hunting and skinning
  • Horse - Riding, grooming, petting, etc.

That's all you need to know about Cores and Bars in Red Dead Redemption 2. Hopefully this game mechanic makes perfect sense to you now. If not, feel free to comment down below and I'll happily help.

Be sure to check back at GameSkinny for more guides for Red Dead Redemption 2 guides!

Starlink: Battle for Atlas Weapon Guide Thu, 25 Oct 2018 11:29:34 -0400 William R. Parks

Starlink: Battle for Atlas is a game built around customization, and there are 15 weapons to tinker with and take into battle.

However, if you have decided to pursue the game's physical release, you are going to be paying a premium to add new ones to your collection.

In this guide, we will cover powerful combinations and combat approaches that we hope will help inform those purchases.

Further, if you are a digital player, hopefully this information will assist as you select your loadouts.

Weapon Functionality

Every weapon in Starlink is fired in one of three ways:

  1. Hold down the trigger to deal continuous damage.

These are low damage, low energy cost, high fire rate weapons, and include:

Shredder Mk. 2.

  2. Press the trigger once to fire a single shot.

Typically, these are low fire rate, high energy cost, middling damage weapons, and include:

Frost Barrage
Iron Fist

  3. Hold down the trigger to charge a single shot, and then release to fire.

These are low fire rate, high energy cost, high damage weapons, and include:

Freeze Ray Mk. 2
Gauss Gun Mk. 2
Meteor Mk. 2

Selecting Weapons Based on Functionality

I believe that the interplay of firing methods is the most important factor to consider when selecting weapon combinations; remember, while the base stats of a weapon can be adjusted with mods, the way a weapon fires cannot.

I recommend always keeping one weapon from the first category equipped.

With one weapon doing consistent, maintenance-free damage, your attention is free to focus on precision with a charge or single-shot weapon on your second trigger.

While there may be more raw power in combining two weapons from categories two and three, I find that needing to actively monitor both triggers decreases overall DPS and reduces survivability in the harder difficulty settings.

Elemental Weapons Vs. Kinetic

Simply, Elemental weapons provide powerful status effects and damage boosting combinations, and Kinetic weapons do not.

Additionally, some mods grant valuable perks for executing Elemental Combos (increased energy, damage, etc.).

While some of the Kinetic weapons offer slight base stat increases over their elemental counterparts, the loss of status effects and Elemental Combos is simply too significant.

That said, I still believe that adhering to a weapon setup that consists of one weapon from category one and the other weapon from category two or three is more important than both weapons dealing Elemental damage.

This primarily comes into play when selecting your category one weapon, as there are only three, and just one does Elemental damage.

Recommended Weapon Combinations

To summarize, I recommend prioritizing weapon configurations that provide the outlined firing setup (one category one weapon, and one weapon from category two or three), and then giving preference to Elemental weapons over Kinetic.

Here are the weapon combinations that I find allow for the most consistent damage and maximized survivability:

  • Levitator & Volcano

This is far-and-away the combination I use most frequently.

As mentioned, the Volcano is a continuous fire Elemental weapon, and I always want it equipped.

The Levitator's Status Overload effect (which incapacitates enemies by levitating them) is extremely powerful on its own, and these two weapons combined are the most dominate, catch-all combo I have found.

  • Frost Barrage & Shredder Mk. 2

This is the combination I use if I am facing off against fire enemies that are immune to the Volcano.

The Frost Barrage is a solid category two weapon that targets their weakness, and the Shredder Mk. 2 is essentially a non-elemental Volcano with an additional Amplifier slot.

  • Gauss Gun Mk. 2 & Shredder Mk. 2

As the game reaches its conclusion, you will increasingly encounter groups of enemies with multiple elemental immunities.

In these instances, a Kinetic weapon configuration is preferable, and the Gauss Gun Mk. 2 is my go-to compliment for the Shredder Mk. 2 (though the Iron Fist is another appealing option).

With end-game mods equipped to the Gauss Gun, you will hardly miss status effects and Elemental Combos at all.

Final Thought

If you have Starlink: Battle for Atlas Digital Edition, you have all of these weapons, and I would recommend giving these combinations a try.

If you are the owner of a Starter Pack, picking up the following items will give you access to them, and I can say with confidence that they will be great assets on your way through the game:

Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starship Pack - Pulse ($25)
Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starship Pack - Neptune ($25)
Starlink: Battle for Atlas Weapon Pack - Shockwave ($10)
Starlink: Battle for Atlas Weapon Pack - Crusher ($10)

Weapon List

For those that would like to see full stats on all 15 weapons, here is a complete weapon list:

Heat Weapons

Damage: 18
Range: 33
Fire Rate: 16
Energy Cost: 74
Status Effect: Fire
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: The Flamethrower is a fuel-injected weapon that spits fire in a wide arc, continuously dealing damage that overheats targets and weakens their defenses.

Damage: 10
Range: 74
Fire Rate: 100
Energy Cost: 10
Status Effect: Overheat
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: The Volcano is a tri-barrel Gatling gun that fires heat-activated molecules. The gun gets deadlier as it gets hotter, so hold down the trigger and start melting your enemies' defenses.

Meteor Mk. 2
Damage: 100
Range: 33
Fire Rate: 10
Energy Cost: 11
Status Effect: Overheat
Amplifier Slots: 4

Description: The supercharged Meteor Mk.2 projects an intense field of heat around its user, turning them into a flaming ball of fiery death for anyone unlucky enough to get in their way.

Cold Weapons

Freeze Ray Mk. 2
Damage: 24
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 14
Energy Cost: 52
Status Effect: Freeze
Amplifier Slots: 4

Description: This advanced weapon is souped-up with extra mod capacity. Charge up and release a high-intensity cryolaser that encases targets in ice.

Frost Barrage
Damage: 19
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 16
Energy Cost: 41
Status Effect: Frost
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: When it's time to chill your enemies out, there's the Frost Barrage. Its volley of guided missiles spreads frost over a target, helping to slow down the fast or evasive ones.

Damage: 21
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 23
Energy Cost: 56
Status Effect: Frost
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: Hailstorm adapts the four barrels of the Shredder to deliver cryo-enhanced projectiles, firing in short, accurate bursts that Frost the target with deadly precision.

Kinetic Weapons

Damage: 18
Range: 15
Fire Rate: 15
Energy Cost: 47
Status Effect: Kinetic
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: Initially designed as a non-lethal crowd dispersal device, the intensity of Shockwave's concussive blast wave became much too dangerous for use against anyone except those the user would like to see shattered into a million pieces.

Damage: 10
Range: 74
Fire Rate: 83
Energy Cost: 13
Status Effect: Kinetic
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: Based on human military designs, the Shredder is an all-purpose rotary gun that shoots kinetic projectiles. It's precise and shoots continuously, so aim it at weak points and rack up the damage.

Shredder Mk. 2
Damage: 10
Range: 74
Fire Rate: 83
Energy Cost: 13
Status Effect: Kinetic
Amplifier Slots: 4

Description: This upgraded version of the Shredder funnels projectiles into the tri-barrel assembly more quickly, resulting in a lot more pain per second than the standard variant.

Iron Fist
Damage: 54
Range: 10
Fire Rate: 13
Energy Cost: 32
Status Effect: Kinetic
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: Named for the famous Outlaw warlord who invented it, Iron Fist is a brutal close-range shrapnel launcher that smashes through even the most durable of defenses. Its short range was intentionally designed so that its creator could look her foes in the eye when they met their end.

Gauss Gun Mk. 2
Damage: 31
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 14
Energy Cost: 52
Status Effect: Kinetic
Amplifier Slots: 4

Description: Outfitted with additional racks of electromagnetic coils, which are then enhanced with modified Kinetic stabilizers, the Mk.2 is a significant improvement on the standard Gauss Gun in every way. It even looks cooler!

 Gravity Weapons

Damage: 21
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 23
Energy Cost: 56
Status Effect: Gravity Well
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: A wing-mounted singularity engine gives Crusher the power to create miniature Gravity Wells around its target. Any projectile caught in the Well will be drawn inward for damage!

Damage: 27
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 13
Energy Cost: 43
Status Effect: Vortex
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: The Imploder is a cannon that literally fires black holes. As if that weren't devastating enough, when you pair it with Elements, you can create even more incredible vortex combos.

Damage: 23
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 18
Energy Cost: 87
Status Effect: Vortex
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: The Nullifier is the result of outlaw weapons experimentation. When fired, its volley of guided missiles creates an incredible vortex of gravity that will crush your enemies in their place.

Stasis Weapons

Damage: 21
Range: 100
Fire Rate: 13
Energy Cost: 100
Status Effect: Stasis Overload
Amplifier Slots: 3

Description: Anti-gravity technology helps to make the Levitator a terrifying weapon. Its self-guided missiles suspend your enemies and remove their ability to fight back.

It's up to you to come up with a weapon combination that suits your playstyle. Hopefully having this information on-hand will help you find your weapon preferences. If you found this guide useful or are specifically mulling over mods, take a gander at my Starlink mods guide for some extra help.

Thronebreaker: The Witcher Tales - Gwent Combat Guide Thu, 25 Oct 2018 10:28:45 -0400 Sergey_3847

Fans of The Witcher series and the Gwent card game based on it now have the chance to play Thronebreaker: The Witcher Tales, an isometric single-player RPG that introduces a brand new story campaign in The Witcher universe.

One of the most exciting features of Thronebreaker is its combat that plays out like a match-up in Gwent. However, the card game here has a whole different set of rules than the Gwent we've come to know in The Witcher 3.

If you want to know how to play the Gwent combat card game in Thronebreaker the right way, then follow our guide below.

Two Rows Instead of Three

One of the biggest changes in both Thronebreaker and Gwent: Homecoming is the absence of the third row. This change doesn't affect the gameplay drastically, but your strategy must definitely adjust to the new board.

The third row has been reserved by the developers for siege cards, such as ballistas, catapults and other cards that are weak to rain weather effects. That is why the third row has been called the Siege row.

Now when it has been removed the players are left with only the Melee and Range rows, which isn't a bad thing at all. First of all, it will reduce the chance of new players misplaying, and secondly, it will prompt players to build less agile and more synergistic decks.

Changes to the Rules

Players can put maximum 9 units per row, and they must be put into their corresponding rows. For example, if you put some close range melee units on the second row, they will not be able to attack enemy cards. So place them accordingly to their abilities and keep melee units to the front row and ranged to the second.

Each round you can draw three additional cards, but there is a limit of 10 cards that you can hold in your hand. So keep this in mind when passing your turns. Otherwise, you might not get the cards from your deck or your graveyard to win the match-up.

You can use your hero's ability on your units, which in the case of Thronebreaker is Meve, the main protagonist of the game. She has several abilities, which can be changed in the deckbuilding menu prior to any match-up.

Puzzle Battles

Two rows is just a small change in comparison to the true definitive feature of Thronebreaker -- the Puzzle Battles. These are special types of match-ups that occur on a map and are indicated by pieces of puzzle.

Each puzzle is different and you have only one round to solve it, but fortunately, you can restart it as many times as you want. Puzzle Battles are hard and require thinking beyond the normal tactics of the Gwent combat.

Drowners Puzzle Solution

For example, in the first map you will find the Drowners puzzle just south of Hawkesburn. This puzzle requires you to beat four drowners with just five cards in hand. The distinct feature of this puzzle is that Drowners should be reduced to an odd number of strength or they will start dealing damage to your units.

Taking this into account, you need to deploy your first unit, Lyrian Arbalest, that would deal damage to a drowner and could survive the attack of other Drowners. Then, using the Crushing Trap you can make all Drowners have equal odd number of strength, and finish them off with the Wagenburg and War Wagon combo.

But again, each puzzle will require a different strategy and there are plenty of puzzles on each map, so you will spend a lot of hours figuring them out.

Creating Units With the Workshop

In Gwent card game you open new cards by purchasing and opening kegs. In Thronebreaker getting new cards for your decks is a much more complicated process. Here's how you do it:

  1. First of all, you need to recruit new units by traveling around the map and collecting the flags. Each flag will add a certain amount of units to your small army.
  2. The next step is to build and upgrade the Workshop using gold and wood as resources.
  3. The upgraded Workshop will allow you to upgrade tents and Training Grounds, which will let you create new specialty cards out of your raw units.
  4. When you have unlocked new cards and you have enough recruits, you can craft new cards in the Command Tent and add them to your decks.

Upgrading the Command Tent is very important, because it will also increase the power cap of your decks.

Gold Chests

Another great way to obtain special cards in Thronebreaker is to dig up Gold Chests that are hidden all over the map. On the screenshot above you can see the locations of all ten Gold Chests in Lyria, which were provided by the Reddit user chenDawg.

Each chest contains either a powerful golden card or an avatar. The cards that you find inside these chests are unique and cannot be crafted in an ordinary way, so it is highly recommended to search for as many chests as you possibly can on each of the maps.


Now with the help of this Gwent combat guide for Thronebreaker: The Witcher Tales you can properly organize your deck-building and combat tactics, and be sure to check back soon for even more related guides here at GameSkinny!

Tips and Tricks for Survival Heroes Wed, 24 Oct 2018 11:49:42 -0400 Zack Palm

Taking the top spot in Survival Heroes can prove tedious if you don't have a good start. You can quickly get overwhelmed by another player who happens to land next to you and discovers a suitable weapon within their first house. 

Though, late in the game, you can't only rely on your abilities to get you out of a situation. You need to out-think your opponents and prepare for them to surprise them with the first round of attacks.

This guide breaks down some great tips and tricks you should keep in mind if you want to walk away with the number one spot, whether you've been playing this game for a week or well over a month.

See Where Your Oppponents Land

It sucks getting killed off within the first two minutes of any battle royale game. One way to prevent this in Survival Heroes is using a neat trick to watch where your opponents land nearby using your mini map. To do this correctly, you have to perform it during your descent on the upper part of your fall.

You'll notice while you're on the airship you can observe all of the players falling from your mini map. Small, red dots represent them. When you jump out, you can continue to watch these dots fall, however, they disappear when you pull out your parachute and start to angle your fall.

You can have them reappear if you do not move on your character in any direction. If you keep them completely still during the fall, you'll have a better chance of not getting ambushed so early.

Unfortunately, you can't use this once you're closer to the ground. You'll be unable to see them once the arrow on the falling bar reaches the small blue part, near the bottom. Use this advantage as early as you can to get an excellent early start!

Use Scouts Frequently

For those unfamiliar with the MOBA genre, the idea of the vision item shows a great deal of promise. This item goes on the ground and grants you a small area of sight, even if you're not nearby. To use this limited range to your advantage, you need to gauge your surroundings and think about where you can best create an ambush.

You'll likely not want to use these too much during the beginning of a game. During this time the circle is more prominent, and everyone is running around looking for items. If you know someone landed near you, then sure, use it if you find one within your first few buildings. Though, you're going to see yourself hoarding these scout items throughout most of the game, using them closer to the end.

When it does, a great strategy is to hunker down near the edge of the closing circle and lay a few out behind you. This way you can see any foes attempting to run towards safety. It's a great way to catch them off guard and deal a great deal of damage. You'll find using your scout item and then a stun ability, if your weapon has it, can effectively eliminate them in the shortest amount of time.

Stop Camping - Keep Looting and Killing

If you're really after the title of King of Survival in Survival Heroes, you can't find yourself remaining in a single location. You need to consistently find yourself exploring houses, caves, and creepy graveyards to discover as much loot as possible. Not only that but looting and killing NPCs around the map levels you up. The higher level you are, the more damage your weapon's basic attacks and abilities are going to do.

Escape With The Help From NPCs

Findings yourself losing a fight against another opponent? Your go-to decision is to dash away as quickly as possible to chug a potion down, but they're likely to chase after you. A great way to give yourself some breathing room is to run through a small group of NPCs.

Doing this forces your opponent's basic attacks to focus on one more than one target. Though it won't work all the time, every so often the basic attacks may redirect, and abilities veer off towards the group of NPCs. When your opponent starts attacking these small groups, it gives you a bit of time to run into a nearby building or lose sight of them. It only works for a couple of seconds and doesn't always shake them, but it can buy you the time you need to escape. 

Watch out for the type of NPCs you run through as some NPCs may target you. However, most of the NPCs in Survival Heroes remain passive if you just run past them and become aggressive only when attacked.

Bushes Keep You Hidden, But...

Another temptation you may have is to remain in the bushes as often as possible. While in the undergrowth your character becomes hidden, and other players can't see you. Though, they can hear you if you start moving through underbrush. The best way to take advantage of these little sections of stealth is to run through as often as possible.

Though another player will hear yours, they won't immediately know your location. They only know the general direction you're in. Use this to your advantage and force them to go to you, this way you can unleash your best abilities first and take them by surprise.

Double down on optimizing your positioning in the bushes by layering scouts around your chosen area. You'll have the chance to watch your opponents as they search for you, giving you a better idea of when to strike to deal the most damage.

Stalk Objectives

The developers behind Survival Heroes took a unique approach to the battle royale genre by taking elements from traditional MOBAs. Beyond scouts, they also introduced the concept of objectives. These objectives are scattered throughout the map, from a dungeon with a chest full of epic loot inside to the mighty Black Dragon that spawns at a predetermined location after a certain amount of time. These objectives can change the course of your game and provide significant benefits to those who take advantage of them.

Because of these objectives are not necessary to win, it doesn't mean you always have to interact with them. To achieve victory in this game doesn't necessarily mean you need to kill the Black Dragon, but knowing its location could give you valuable hints to where other players may congregate.

A great way to stick it to another player is to let them fight the Black Dragon, granting you the opportunity to dive in, kill the player, and claim the objective for yourself. You'll have to time this well because if you go in too early, the enemy player can easily divert from their original target and focus on you, or if you go too late, the foe will claim the kill, despite you taking them out. How you initiate this confrontation changes based on what weapon you're carrying.


Those are the helpful tips we've gathered up during our time playing the brutal Survival Heroes! These should give you the upper hand during your games to bring you victory and quickly rank up. Have a trick you use to win? Comment below!

Make sure to check out our Survival Heroes best weapons guide, so you know which one to grab to take your combat to the next level. Stay tuned to GameSkinny as we continue to bring you the latest news, tips, and reviews!

Survival Heroes Best Weapons List Wed, 24 Oct 2018 11:19:11 -0400 Zack Palm

As you repeatedly play a battle royale game, you quickly learn what weapons stand out as some of the more powerful choices. The mobile game Survival Heroes is no different, though there's a unique twist thrown into this game's combat mechanics: each weapon comes with three abilities. 

These abilities change up how your character plays during your match. You receive all of the weapons shown on this list when you first start the game -- you do not have to grind gold to acquire any of them. We compiled a list some of the best weapons you can find during your first games!

Thunder Staff

  • Vengeful Thunder: A ranged AoE stun.
  • Thunder Evasion: A damaging dash that slows enemies for 3 seconds.
  • Thunder Pool: A radius of thunder that damages nearby enemies every 0.5 seconds, while increasing your movement speed by 25%. This ability lasts for 3 seconds.

Of all the weapons used in Survival Heroes, the Thunder Staff helped to provide the most victories. What makes this weapon top the entire list? A player can use this weapon to corner any foe they encounter.

Someone can open up a fight using Vengeful Thunder, or close the distance immediately with Thunder Evasion. After using their chosen ability, Thunder Pool does an extraordinary amount of damage in a larger area.

While the weapon comes with an excellent set of abilities, it does lack in basic attack speed. The Thunder Staff is slow to use, taking time to send out electrifying bolts. Though, it's not a huge issue. Because of Thunder Evasion, it's difficult for an enemy to get away to heal. The dash also doubles as an ideal method to escape if you need to hunker down for a few seconds to drink a potion. 

The superb versatility of the Thunder Staff takes it to the top of the tier list.

Dragon Gun

  • Critical Gunplay: Dash forward to increase your movement speed for 1 second and your chance to land a critical attack for 3.
  • Smoke Bomb: Throw this AoE ability to deal a small amount of damage, but the effects remain for 4 seconds, reducing the line of sight of any foe that stays in it.
  • Steel Body: A dashing ability that also removes any control debuffs on your character and restores 10% of your health. You're even immune to control debuffs for 2 seconds and receive 5% lost health if you're hit by one during this time.

If you think you're getting away from someone running at you with a Dragon Gun, you're sorely mistaken. This shotgun comes with two dashes, making the character agile and quick in any fight.

The weapon's two dashes also make it extremely easy for the wielder to get up close, taking advantage of the Dragon Gun's basic attack trait of dealing more damage the closer they are in a small AoE. Remaining close also helps with your Smoke Bomb ability as it reduces the accuracy of your opponents if it hits.

However, you have to have quick fingers to use this weapon properly. You must remain close to your foe to inflict the most damage, and this means meeting melee characters head-on or chasing after ranged opponents. You'll want to practice with this weapon to get the hang of when to use the Dragon Gun's dashes.

The Dragon Gun proves a worthy adversary to the Thunder Staff.

Sun Bow

  • Splitting Arrow: Fire 6 arrows out in front of you in a cone that deal a 25% slow for 1.5 seconds.
  • Spiral Arrow: A long-range arrow that knocks enemies back, silencing them for 2 seconds.
  • Arrow Array: Unleashes a rainfall of arrows on a designated position, slowing the target by 40% for 1.5 seconds.

The Sun Bow remains an excellent choice for those who choose to stack attack speed early. The more frequently you hit your opponents, the more stacks you gain from the weapon's passive ability, Wind Edge. When you successfully stack 10, you get a short attack and movement speed buff.

At the end of the game, the Sun Bow crushes even the most hearty of players, if the wielder can slow them down enough with Splitting Arrow and Arrow Aaray to keep them in sight.

A significant drawback for this weapon is the fact it doesn't come with a dash ability. Though two of your abilities can slow a foe, the Sun Bow doesn't have a great method to chase someone down or to escape a situation. You'll have to rely on having one of those abilities on cooldown, and your foes don't have a dash on their own, which is unlikely.

Catching someone off guard with this weapon is exceptionally satisfying, given how quickly you can build your attack speed.

Elemental Orb

  • Elemental Return: This tosses your orb outward damaging anyone in its path, and returns to you, damaging them again.
  • Flicker: Jump forward a small distance and deal damage on upon. If you use this skill again within a short period, you'll return to your original position.
  • Link: Discharges a small burst of energy, damaging all nearby enemies. This ability creates a connection, and if enemies cannot break this link within 2 seconds, they will receive the damage again and get stunned.

This weapon takes some getting used to as the Elemental Orb is a ranged weapon, but can do a good deal more damage when you're closer.

An optimal opening with this weapon is to use the Link attack, creating a damaging leash with you and your foe. Though, to do the most damage with your abilities, you're going to rely on the Elemental Orb's basic attacks to stack its passive, called Marks, on your opponent. These stacks lower your foe's Magic Resist stats, letting you inflict more damage the longer the fight goes on.

When you use this weapon, you want to burst your opponents and wear them down quickly. To deal the most damage, you want to use your basic attacks as often as possible. Because these attacks are slow, it can feel like a necessary choice to use them over an ability. It's also easy to miss an enemy on the Elemental Return's backswing, meaning you frequently may not entirely damage someone wise enough to dodge the second half of this attack. 

Grab the Elemental Orb if you're confident in your talents of quickly adapting to a combat situation.

Reaper Scythe 

  • Charge: Dash forward with a damaging slash.
  • Soul Drain: Slash your scythe in front of you, pulling all enemies towards you, stunning them for 0.5 seconds.
  • Reaper's Arrival: Slam your scythe down, damaging all nearby foes and slowing them by 30% for 2.5 seconds. The ability also activates a small buff where for the next 6 seconds every basic attack increases your physical attack stat by 25 for a max of 5 stacks.

With the Reaper Scythe, you'll feel confident enough to dive into any encounter you find yourself in to rip your opponent apart. Not only does this melee come with a devastating dash you can use to damage your foe, but you can also pull them closer to you with another damaging ability.

When you pull them in and use Reaper's Arrival, you can slow them in their tracks. This ability also grants a short buff where your basic attacks are boosting your physical attack stats for a short time.

Though, the Reaper Scythe's slow basic attacks bring it down. These sluggish attacks make it feel like your character is moving through syrup. The great abilities don't make up for them. You could choose to pick up items to boost your attack speed, but you'll find it a better strategy to focus on increasing your physical attack stats.

While this weapon may make you feel like the reaper, you'll see yourself more as a shambling skeleton than the bringer of death.

Wild Axes

  • Summon: Call forth a bear to fight at your side of 60 seconds. You can dismiss the bear at any time while it's out to receive 15% of your health back.
  • Enraged: This buff increases you and your bear's movement speed by 20% and attack speed by 10% for 3 seconds.
  • Spinning Axes: Toss your axes out to deal a small portion of damage, slowing all targets by 20% for 1.5 seconds. If any target gets hit when the axes return to you, they suffer an additional 30% slow for 1.5 seconds.

With the Wild Axes, you can summon a bear -- already a great ability! This ferocious companion follows you around in combat for sixty seconds after you call it, and you can banish it at any time to recover a small portion of your health. It's a good, quick heal if a player decides to focus on you instead of the bear.

With your companion out you can use Enraged at any time to boost both of your attack speeds and throw your Spinning Axes to slow any escaping foe.

A substantial negative to using these weapons is not being able to dash away. You could summon your bear to distract a player as you run away, but it's not as effective as a dash. Plus, the Wild Axes rely on staying as close as possible to cut down your foes.

These weapons feel like they lack a much-needed dash because any enemy with a dash can catch up to you or outrun you. If you can't get close to your opponent, it doesn't matter how fast you can hit them.

Though, being able to summon a bear and use it to heal yourself does give it some bonus points.


Those were some of the best weapons you can find Survival Heroes during your first few games! Use this new knowledge to your advantage and take first place.

World War 3: How to Fix FPS Drop Issues Wed, 24 Oct 2018 08:49:33 -0400 Sergey_3847

World War 3 is a new first-person shooter that has just launched in Early Access on Steam. The game looks and plays like an AAA title, but due to lackluster optimization, it doesn't quite feel like it. In fact, many players have reported huge FPS drops and lags, making the game nearly unplayable in some cases.

Fortunately, the developers created a fantastic Video Settings menu that hosts a vast number of tweakable options. If you want to know how to adjust these settings in order to increase your FPS count, then follow our guide below for a few possible ways of fixing it and boosting performance.

WW3 FPS Drop Fix 1: Adjust Video Settings

The Video Settings menu in World War 3 has three tabs: Basic, Advanced, and Quality. Each tab has different settings that need to be adjusted to increase gameplay performance.

Basic Settings

In the Basic tab, the most important feature is One Frame Thread Lag -- it needs to be enabled. Just this one adjustment will increase your FPS count up to 50.

Other features like V-Sync and Motion Blur can be disabled. You can leave them on, but it depends on your CPU and GPU performance, so try them out and see how it works for you.

Advanced Settings

This tab allows you to adjust Framerate Lock and other features, such as Range and Smoothing. For most players, your best bet would be to simply disable all of these settings.

There is also the Resolution setting, which is especially sensitive to your performance, so try to lower it as much as you can. Try a few settings and see how the game performs in your case.

Quality Settings

In this tab, you can adjust the rate of quality settings like Textures, Effects, Anti-Aliasing, etc. Set them to Medium, and never use the High or Ultra High settings as they're typically too much of a drag on your hardware -- even if it is high-end. 

Textures and Lighting are the two most demanding settings here, so you should set them to Low.

Reddit user iJesse suggested the following Quality settings for WW3:

  • Textures: Low
  • Meshes: Ultra
  • Lighting: Ultra
  • Effects: Ultra
  • Post Processing: Ultra
  • View Distance: Low
  • Shadows: Low
  • Foliage: Ultra
  • Anti-Aliasing: Medium

WW3 FPS Drop Fix 2: Optimize Windows Settings

In case changing the Video Settings in the game doesn't do much for you, try to optimize your OS for better performance. Here are a few tips on how to make Windows 10 run faster.

  1. Update Windows and GPU drivers.
  2. Set Your GPU's 3D Settings to Performance.
  3. Adjust your Game DVR setting:
    • Type in regedit in your Start menu.
    • Go to HKEY_CURRENT_USER\System\GameConfigStore.
    • Right-click on GameDVR_Enabled and set the value of Modify to 0.
    • Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\Windows.
    • Right-click on Windows and create new Key with title GameDVR.
    • Right-click on GameDVR and create new DWORD (32-bit) Value with title AllowGameDVR.
    • Right-click on AllowGameDVR and set the value of Modify to 0.


Until there's an official patch or performance update, that's all you need to know on how to fix FPS drop issues in World War 3. If you've found another solution, please let us know in the comments below. We'll add it to this list with credit. 

PUBG Mobile Advanced Tips and Tricks Tue, 23 Oct 2018 11:23:05 -0400 Sergey_3847

The next big PUBG Mobile tournament will take place at the end of 2018 in Dubai. The stakes are high as the prize pool rises up to $600,000. This should prompt every PUBG Mobile enthusiast to up their game and stop playing in a casual manner.

If you are seriously considering taking a part in this or any other tournament, then follow our advanced tips and tricks guide for PUBG Mobile that will help you understand the more nuanced aspects of the game and how you should approach them to win.

Follow the Sound

Every PUBG player knows how important sound is in this game. This topic has been even covered in our beginner's guide for PUBG Mobile. But you need to fully embrace the power of sound on your mobile device in order to really get the best out of your game.

Use closed headphones

It is understandable that playing PUBG Mobile on your phone or tablet is a lot more comfortable wearing a pair of light earbuds or at least open headphones. But these are not optimal choices for professional gaming. So use only closed headphones that will isolate as much outside noise as possible.

Stay in a safe zone and listen

The sound in PUBG Mobile is just as advanced as it is in the original game. So if you're using the right set of headphones, then you will hear a lot more than other players.

In this case, instead of constantly moving around you can sit in cover and wait for other players to pass by. Be vigilant and listen carefully! If you hear footsteps approaching, you will have at least 3 to 5 seconds to prepare.

In time you will be able to discern the direction the footsteps are coming from and the distance. In this way you will be able to move from one spot to another and hit every single opponent from a safe zone.

Carefully approach buildings

When you see a building, don't run inside immediately in an attempt to grab the loot.

First, approach the building in a crouching position to reduce the sound of your own footsteps. Then, sit still and listen if there are any noises inside -- another player could be there before you. If you hear footsteps inside getting closer to your position, shoot through the doors, a wall or a window and kill them while they're still inside.

If you will follow these tips, then you will have a far greater advantage over other players that use non optimal headphones or use none at all.

Apply 4-Finger Claw Grip

After mastering the sound you need to make sure that you can use all four of your fingers when controlling a character in PUBG Mobile. If you've been playing with two fingers only, then switching to four fingers will be hard, but absolutely necessary for high-level play.

Use trigger accessories

In the beginning it could be really hard to play with all four fingers at once. That's why you can soften the transition by first using trigger accessories that can be attached to your mobile device (see the picture below). Unfortunately, triggers are not allowed at tournaments, so you will eventually have to learn to use your touch screen without their aid.

Learn the Claw Grip technique

With the help of the claw grip you can move, aim and fire all at the same time. Watch the video above and many other videos online to learn how to properly use your fingers on your touchscreen.

Since most players use only two fingers, their reaction during a shoot-out will be delayed, while you will have a full advantage using this technique.

Apply proper control settings

Managing your fingers is just a part of the successful claw grip technique. You also need to make sure that your touchscreen and control scheme are properly adjusted.

Below you can find one of the most optimal control settings for claw grip, but you can optimize it to your own liking as well.

Cover Up in the Open Field

Hiding inside the buildings or using buildings as covers in urban areas is easy. But what do you do when you're out in the open field? There you become an easy target for a sniper or other players that know how to behave in open areas. Here are a few tips on what to do in the open field.

Move from one cover to another

Remember that you should never run across an open area uncovered. You've got a big non-literal target on your head when you're so easy to shoot.

If you run long enough for a sniper to hit you, then that's what will most likely happen. Instead move to one cover, such as a tree or a rock, and then search for the next closest one using your camera controls. Then quickly move to the next cover. If you see from your cover another player running through the field -- you will have an advantage to shoot them.

Climb the trees

Trees are excellent hiding and shooting spots. You can climb trees by jumping on the branches from the roof of a building or a hut that can be usually seen in the open areas.

Alternatively, you could use vehicles to get on the trees, but this requires some practice.

Advanced Weapon Tips

Obviously, you want to have the best weapon in the game. But if you don't really know how to use it, then a better player with a worse weapon will still be able to kill you. So here are a few tips on how to use weapons in PUBG Mobile.

Hold grenade before throwing

Many players make a mistake of throwing a grenade instantly. But this is a mistake since grenade has a 7 second delay before it explodes, which gives other players time to escape the explosion.

Instead hold the grenade before throwing for at least 5 seconds. Use this time to aim more accurately and to prevent your enemies from getting out of the way in time. Then you can throw it for an immediate explosion.

Use weapons with the same ammo

There are two main types of ammo in PUBG Mobile: 5.56 and 7.62. Use weapons that can be loaded only with either of these types of bullets. For example, AKM, DP-28, Kar-98, and SKS use the same type of ammo.

This will not only help you save time finding ammo for your weapons but also save space in your backpack.

Control your recoil

This isn't news at all, but for some reason many players still ignore the fact that you have to use attachments, such as compensators and suppressors that help you manage recoil on your weapons. Or learn to use burst-shooting technique, and then you can say that you don't need a compensator.


These have been some of the most essential tips on bringing the level of your gameplay to a pro level, and for other PUBG Mobile guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:

Soul Calibur 6 Guide: How Style Points Work Tue, 23 Oct 2018 10:07:08 -0400 Synzer

Libra of Souls in Soul Calibur 6 allows you to create your own character and play through a lengthy story mode from their point of view. It also allows you to get new weapons that are styled after a specific character in the game.

For example, if you want your character to fight like Geralt, you can equip a Geralt-style weapon and use his moveset during your quests. You can even become more proficient in the fighting style by gaining style points during each quest and side quest. 

When you finish a quest, you may notice the usual experience points and "style points" underneath that.

What exactly are style points in Soul Calibur 6 and how do you get them? Don't worry, it's actually pretty simple.

Style points and experience points bar for Level 67 player

Getting Style Points in Soul Calibur 6

Style points are simply extra experience points, but they're for each weapon.

Whenever you complete a quest with a specific weapon style -- Geralt for example -- you will earn style points for Geralt weapons. These points will only apply to Geralt style weapons, so if you decide to use Ivy weapons instead, you have to start building that up separately.

The good thing is that these bars don't reset if you switch weapons, and it doesn't matter which weapon you use, as long as it's in the same style. If you have a Level 15 Tira weapon and you've been slowly leveling up the Tira style, you will still make progress if you equip a higher or lower level Tira weapon.

If you start using a different style's weapon and switch back, all the progress you made will remain. You can easily see how much you have in each style by switching weapons at the Libra of Souls main map.

What to do with Soul Calibur 6 Style Points

So now that Style Points are all cleared up, what do you do with them?

When you completely fill up the Style bar for a specific weapon style, it will say "Mastered" and you will get a high-level quest. Mine quest was Level 72, but my character was Level 68, so it looks like it might be based on your current experience level.

Mission menu for style points in Libra of Souls shows info on opponent and matchup

Completing this quest will reward you with a Level 60 weapon for that style for example. The weapon has 3 slots for upgrades, and it has an attack range of 180 ~ 520. This means it has the potential for a huge attack, but you could end up hitting on the low end.

You can do this for each style, but you will need to level them all separately to unlock the quests for each.


Hopefully, I cleared up everything about Style Points in Soulcalibur 6. Let me know if you have any questions and be sure to check out my full Libra of Souls guide if you want more info on the game mode.

Be sure to check out our other Soul Calibur 6 guides while you're at it, such as: 

How to Fix Soul Calibur 6 Network Error on Xbox One Tue, 23 Oct 2018 09:56:52 -0400 Sergey_3847

Since launch last Friday, many Xbox One Soul Calibur 6 players have been reporting an awful lot of errors related to network performance specifically during ranked and casual matchmaking. Other players have experienced network lags and other issues even during the story campaign.

In any case, Bandai Namco is looking at the issue at this very moment and are trying to find the solution that should satisfy all Xbox One owners. But if you don't want to wait, then here are a couple of fixes that might help you out before the official patch arrives.

SC6 Network Error Fix 1: Activate Xbox Dashboard

Network lag in Soul Calibur 6 is a common error, so it has nothing to do with your hardware. However, here's one simple trick that can reduce lag during matchmaking.

Here's what you need to do:

  1. Go to Network menu
  2. Select Ranked Match
  3. Press the A button for matchmaking to begin
  4. While searching for an opponent, press the Guide button (Xbox logo)
  5. The Xbox dashboard will appear on the screen
  6. Don't close it until matchmaking is over

This simple process has already helped many Xbox One players increase the chance of finding an opponent quickly.

SC6 Network Error Fix 2: Reset Matchmaking

Another solution to network lag in Soul Calibur 6 is to manually reset your matchmaking. This is not the best solution, but if nothing else works, then try it out anyway.

Here's what you need to do: 

  1. Go to Network Settings
  2. Set connection to All Regions
  3. Start matchmaking
  4. Reset search after 60 seconds
  5. Repeat until you connect

Some Xbox One players were able to connect to ranked matches using this method, which is still better than having no connection at all.


Bandai Namco should release the official patch very soon that will fix the network connectivity issue on Xbox One, and for other Soul Calibur 6 guides at GameSkinny, just follow the links below:

Starlink: Battle for Atlas -- Should I Buy Physical or Digital? Mon, 22 Oct 2018 20:51:07 -0400 William R. Parks

Special, Ultimate, Limited, Collector's, it has become increasingly common for new titles to launch with a slew of editions, and players now have to choose how much they want to invest in a game before they even purchase it.

Do I need to spend an extra $10 for a special edition's exclusive weapon, or will the base game do me just fine?

With the addition of toys to Starlink: Battle for Atlas, making that decision is even more important.

If you're wondering "Should I buy physical or digital?", we hope this guide will give you a better sense of what to expect from both options so you can make an informed decision.

Note: The starship and pilot counts in this analysis do not include Switch-exclusive content. Fox and the Arwing are included in both the base physical release as well as the base digital release; Switch owners will have access to this content, at no additional cost, regardless of what option they choose.


Base Experience

While the base experience offered by the physical and digital versions of Starlink are very different, let us first look at what is available if you want the cheapest, most limited access to the game:

For physical editions, you would start with the Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starter Pack, which retails for $75.

This would provide you with the following toys to be used in-game:

  • 1 starship (Zenith)
  • 1 pilot (Mason Rana)
  • 3 weapons (Flamethrower, Frost Barrage, Shredder)

Alternatively, the base digital option is the Starlink: Battle for Atlas Digital Edition for $60.

This would provide you with the following digital items to be used in-game:

  • 4 starships (Zenith, Neptune, Pulse, Lance)
  • 6 pilots (Mason Rana, Levi McCray, Judge, Chase da Silva, Hunter Hakka, Razor Lemay)
  • 12 weapons (Flamethrower, Frost Barrage, Shredder, Iron Fist, Crusher, Shockwave, Levitator, Volcano, Imploder, Freeze Ray Mk.2, Shredder Mk.2, Gauss Gun Mk.2)

Simply, for $15 less, the Digital Edition gives you access to 4 more starships, 6 more pilots, and 9 more weapons than the base physical version.

For comparison, you would need to buy the following physical items to have access to everything from the Digital Edition:

  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starter Pack ($75)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starship Pack - Pulse ($25)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starship Pack - Neptune ($25)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Starship Pack - Lance ($25)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Pilot Pack - Razor Lemay ($8)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Pilot Pack - Levi McCay ($8)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Weapon Pack - Crusher ($10)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Weapon Pack - Iron Fist ($10)
  • Starlink: Battle for Atlas Weapon Pack - Shockwave ($10)

It costs $196 for physical versions of everything the $60 Digital Edition provides.

Full Experience

To go a step further, if you want access to all of the content currently available in Starlink (5 starships, 9 pilots, and 15 weapons), you could pay $80 for the digital Starlink: Battle for Atlas Deluxe Edition.

To do the same with toys requires you to purchase all of the items listed above plus an additional Starship Pack, two additional Pilot Packs, and one additional Weapon Pack.

It costs $247 for physical versions of everything the $80 Deluxe Edition provides.

In Between

With the cost of the Digital Edition being relatively close to the cost of the Deluxe Edition, if you choose to go digital, it makes sense to decide if you will be satisfied with its base experience from the outset.

However, with the physical release, things are further complicated if you want something in between the base and full experience.

The reason is that, unfortunately, Ubisoft has decided not to sell each item individually. Rather, they are bundled in the aforementioned packs.

To elaborate, a majority of pilots are connected to a specific starship and weapon, and a Starship Pack comes with those three items.

This means that if you are interested, for example, in the Pulse starship and the Judge pilot, you cannot simply buy those two items. Instead, you would need to buy the Starship Pack - Pulse and the Starship Pack - Neptune.

That is $50 to acquire only two items you want. You can see how the cost of toys can begin accumulating very quickly. 


Aside from the act of mounting toys to your controller, gameplay is identical across the two versions.

However, it is notable that the more weapons and ships you have access to, the easier Starlink becomes.

Attempting to tackle the game with only the physical Starter Pack does not sound like a pleasant experience, and I would not recommend pursuing the harder difficulty settings without at least a few more ships and weapons in your arsenal. 


While this is only applicable to the Switch release, it is important to emphasize that playing Starlink with toys is not possible in handheld mode.

Even if you are planning to use the screen's kickstand and a separate controller, the toys do not seem at all conducive to on-the-go play.

For me, eliminating the Switch's mobility is a deal-breaker and immediately puts the kibosh on pursuing the physical version for Nintendo's console.

Putting It All Together

The decision between the physical and digital versions of the game ultimately comes down to what you want out of Starlink.

If you are just interested in playing the game, there is no question that digital provides the most convenient gameplay experience, and it offers much more content with an exponentially smaller investment.

However, if you are a collector that absolutely loves the toys, you have the disposable income to justify the immense cost increase, and you do not mind the challenges playing with them imposes, then go for the physical release.

What version of Starlink are you most interested in and why? Let us know in the comments below. 

Cities: Skylines Industries -- How to Use the New DLC Mechanics Mon, 22 Oct 2018 19:25:49 -0400 Fox Doucette

So you took our advice and went and bought yourself the new Industries DLC for Cities: Skylines. Congratulations, you'll be glad you did.

But instead of throwing a party for yourself, you're probably looking at all those new features like “These look fun, but what am I going to DO with all of them?”

Well, we've got you covered, so read on. This step-by-step guide will turn you into a great industrialist in no time.

Step 1: Honestly, Consider Starting A New City

A satellite view of districts in City Skylines shows farming, forestry, regular industrial buildings

While you can easily redefine existing industrial areas using the DLC's new tools, you'll probably want to have a fresh map where you have the forests and fertile lands free (e.g. not already covered by other city services or buildings).

In order to get the most efficient use out of the new mechanics, you don't want to have to do major urban renewal, so start on a blank slate and you'll be perfectly prepared for the second step.

Step 2: Examine Your Map and Make Plans

Your resources are going to determine where your industrial zones are in this brave new Skylines world, which means that everything else you're going to be building is going to be in service of your industries.

Commercial zones should be transport-accessible in the most efficient ways possible. This prevents bottlenecks that can keep finished goods from getting from the places they're produced to the places where they're sold to consumers.

Optimal Commercial Strategies

If you don't already know (read: if you're not someone that's already put thousands of hours in Cities), here are some good strategies for building your commercial zones in Industries

First and most importantly, remember that commercial zones, as always, act as a buffer between the pollution and crime that industry creates and the residential zones' hatred of both of those things. You can put commerce in a bit of a dingy neighborhood; you can't do the same with residential. So as always, locating the commercial zones in between residence and industry is wise.

Beyond that, though, do consider that higher-end commercial zones are going to be far more voracious consumers of your industries' output than are low-end zones. As such, you'll want to make sure that the higher-value commercial areas are located close enough, but not too close, to your top-end industry buildings while still serving the very cream of the crop of residential areas.

It's not too dissimilar to a classic basegame city layout; it's just got more layers you need to concern yourself with if you're going to make the most efficient use of the new industries.

Of course, residences are then placed as they always are, where citizens have access to their jobs and to shopping and services. That much hasn't changed since the initial base game came out.

Step 3: How To Industry in Industries

Truck kick up dust on a dirt road cutting through a farm district in the Industry DLC

The next part of this involves actually creating these specialized industrial zones. If you've played Parklife, you'll know exactly how to start.

Draw a district over the raw resources (farming, forestry, ore, or oil) that are relevant to the industries that you're building. It's just like drawing a park boundary or a base game district.

Next, put down the main building; this will define which industrial category the entire area will produce. It's just like the park types in Parklife.

After that, you'll want to place the buildings that gather the raw materials; crop fields, logging camps, ore extraction, oil pumps, whatever is necessary for the industry you're working with.

Pro tip: If you're doing this for ore and oil, you should definitely tick on the option in the gameplay settings menu that gives you infinite oil and ore or you're just going to strip them in about 10 minutes. 

Now that you have the basics down, you'll need to start making those supply chains happen so that resources can be improved into higher-value products and those products can be sold.

Step 4: Build Stuff to Make Stuff

The next step is to start putting down Warehouses and Processing Buildings.

Warehouses simply collect raw materials to make sure that A.) they have a place where your transport vehicles can pick them up and B.), you'll have a constant supply to avoid temporary shortages in between times when the resources are being harvested.

Once that's done, that's where the processing buildings enter.

For forestry, this is the sawmill to turn logs into planed lumber. For farming, this is where raw crops become things like flour.

This is where you'll start to see a real value-add to the resources you're getting from those industrial zones.

Of course, you'll need workers for all this, so don't neglect the development of your city and education infrastructure while you're improving your production chains.

Everything is designed to fit together, remember, so you'll have a strong, granular level of control over the development of your industries that used to be at the whim of the game's sometimes kludgy upgrade system for buildings.

Step 5: What To Do With All That Stuff

A high-level view of an agricultural zone with a menu showing input and output goods

At the Special Processing level, you don't necessarily have to start building “Unique Factories” yet. These intermediate products can be sold to ordinary industrial zones that aren't part of the special resource areas. Furniture factories will buy your planks, food processors will buy your flour, and so on.

But you'll eventually want to start building Unique Factories. Those are put there by the game to collect different products your industrial areas are producing to create, as the name implies, unique finished goods that are the most valuable goods of all.

Those Unique Factories produce luxury goods that can be both sold at a very high profit to your commercial zones and also exported.

In order to make use of them, you'll need a bunch of resource chains working at once; a car factory, for example, needs Animal Products (leather for the seats), Plastics (from oil), and Glass and Metals (which come from ore extraction.)

And while some of those can be imported at a cost that will reduce the profit margin, you're best off producing them all yourself.

The nice thing is that you can put Unique Factories anywhere on the map, so locating them fairly equidistant from all their resource inputs will make them more efficient.

Step 6: Sell Your Stuff!

Transport vehicles will visit your storage buildings, so make sure you've got good road connections into and out of the area where those buildings are. If you don't, you'll have massive traffic jams.

Here are some of our other guides regarding traffic and transportation that can help you out here: 

On the bright side, there's more to transport than cars. If you put your Warehouses near train hubs or the new Cargo Airport, you'll be able to export your goods far more efficiently and with a massive reduction in road traffic compared to trying to truck everything down the highways.

Other than that, if you've dealt with air and rail traffic before, it's the same ballgame -- just re-purposed to carry all these new goods.

This is actually the easiest part for veteran Skylines players because it uses a mechanic as old as the base game and just specializes it.

Step 7: Have Fun With The Other Stuff

Blue cars drive through an intersection next to a commercial district with mid-tier buildings

Separate from the industry chains is the new DLC's mail system.

From now on, milestone Level 4 (Boom Town) now unlocks a new city service, the Post Office. Buildings generate mail, and that mail has to be delivered somewhere.

The system is similar to garbage trucks, except instead of dumping junk at the junkyard, junk mail is dumped in people's mailboxes.

About once a month, a postal van will be generated that goes around, collects mail, and exports it offscreen to one of the off-map connecting neighbors.

The system is another city service; there's really not much of a strategy to it beyond the usual keeping roads upgraded, so you can treat it like what it is.

Step 8: Level Up Your Stuff

Just like in Parklife, once your industries have produced enough and made enough profit, they'll level up.

In addition, as the city gets bigger, bigger versions of industrial buildings will be unlocked, allowing for greater production, more workers, and all that other good stuff.

The strategy here is quite simple; it's “the same, but more”, and you should be well able to figure this out as it comes up. If you've played Parklife, you already have experience with this system; if you haven't, it's basically: “This gains capacity so you don't have to build a ton of different buildings or zones, you can level up the ones you have.”

To Summarize

  • Industrial districts are necessary to use the resources they're built on
  • Extractor buildings extract raw materials
  • Processing buildings turn them into industrial goods
  • Unique Factories turn them into luxury goods
  • And Warehouses enable planes, trains, and automobiles to turn them into money

Master that, and you'll have an economic boom in no time.

The most important thing to remember is that this DLC may radically change the way you actually manage your industries, but this is still Skylines, which means that ultimately, it's the same balancing act as it's always been between the needs of all aspects of your society.

But once you get it right, the amount of money it brings in means you are well on your way to having an economic powerhouse, one that will let you make use of every resource on the map to create things that until now have only been abstract ideas.

14 Balanced Mods for Rimworld 1.0 Mon, 22 Oct 2018 16:07:59 -0400 Ashley Shankle

There was a time when I had nearly 100 mods installed in Rimworld. Some things have been tossed with the b19 and 1.0 updates, but I'm slowly building that list back up.

One of the biggest boons to Rimworld as a game is that it's so moddable and, should you so choose, you can mod it to your exact specifications so you can play exactly the way you want to. It took me maybe three days of playing until I cracked and started piling mods on, but it may take you longer. Everyone's different.

One aspect of mods that many newer players and some experienced players aren't too keen on is the idea of severe balance changes. It's true -- some mods toss all semblance of balance out the window in the name of game customization.

The mods listed here are those that I've found to be both useful and minimally impactful on the game's overall balance. Many of these are purely cosmetic, but some, such as Animal Tab or Centralized Climate Control, add a lot more than shiny new things to look at. All in all, these are quality of life mods that are suitable for even new players.

There are definitely more mods you can install that will boost your enjoyment without making your pawns and colonies overpowered, but the ones mentioned here are those that have treated me best within this category over my 200+ hours in Rimworld. Hopefully, you will enjoy them just as much as I do.

More Furniture mod

Workshop link

More Furniture has been around for several of Rimworld's betas and is still going strong in the 1.0 version. Its goal? Just to make your colonies look better.

The furniture found in this mod works similarly to the game's base furniture and has no large impacts on how your colony runs. A safe bet for anyone who wants the game to look a little better without changes to how it plays.

RimFridge mod

Workshop link

This was the first mod I installed back when I first starting playing Rimworld, and I've never been able to look back.

RimFridge adds new refrigerators to the Furniture menu that can be placed about your colony for your pawns to easily access, rather than running into the freezer room each time they need to eat.

Recently, this has gotten the addition of wall refrigerators, which are just as useful as their standalone brethren.

RimFridge is, by all accounts, a must-have and it does not particularly affect the difficulty of the game. It just keeps your pawns fed more easily.

Interaction Bubbles mod

Workshop link

This is one mod I'm fairly new to myself, but it adds one feature that's hard to live without once you get used to it: floating bubbles showing how your pawns are interacting on the spot.

This is a big improvement from having to check each pawn's Social tab, which is something I only find myself doing once every so often unless someone is mentally breaking often.

Getting a front-row seat to your pawns' interactions is a nice touch that adds some flavor to times of peace.

EdB Prepare Carefully mod

Workshop link

How this mod affects your save games is entirely up to you, but I have always and will continue to consider this a mandatory Rimworld mod.

Prepare Carefully allows you to customize your landing party before you crash land, giving you complete control over their history, traits, skill allocations, health, and looks.

Though this can be extremely overpowered (such as starting a pawn or two with Shooting level 20), it includes a point system that tallies up as you make your party to let you know how balanced your start is. A flexible mod every player should have installed.

Work Tab mod

Workshop link

It took a little bit to get to one of Fluffy's mods, but here we are -- and it's not the last one.

Work Tab is a must-have mod if you want complete and utter control over your pawns' priorities. It adds a whole new layer to work priorities, literally: you can manually prioritize every little task.

Newer Rimworlders may find this amount of flexibility overwhelming, but in time anyone could come to find this mod to be an utmost help in running an efficient colony.

Hospitality mod

Workshop link

This is one mod that you just get used to having and in time forget it was a mod at all.

Hospitality adds a number of features for dealing with visitors to your colony. Visitors can and will stay in your colony provided you've built and set new guest beds, and will help out with chores if your hospitality is above and beyond. This isn't all, of course, but it's certainly my favorite aspect of this mod.

Hospitality is one mod I always have installed because I'm just used to its features. Be sure to read the Workshop page for the mod first as it is incompatible with a handful of more complex mods.

Glowing Healroot mod

Workshop link

This is a simple visual mod that alters healroots to glow, making it easier to tell when they're ready for harvest and adding a pleasant glow to their general area.

Glowing Healroot looks even better with the following mod installed.

Realistic Darkness mod

Workshop link

I didn't know I wanted this mod until I finally had it installed. This affects the world's overall light level at night and during certain weather conditions, giving the effect of it actually being nighttime or for there actually being a storm brewing.

Below is a comparison of the same colony at the same time of night. On the left is nighttime with Realistic Darkness and the right is mod-free nighttime.

This mod does affect your gameplay to some extent, in that it's basically pitch black outside during foggy rain -- unless you have outdoor lighting installed. Which you should.

Animal Tab mod

Workshop link

This is another mod that you install and eventually forget it's not part of the base game.

Animal Tab adds new features to the Animals tab in the UI for you to more easily keep track of and maintain your domesticated animals. This makes it easier to keep track of their production (such as cows, alpacas, birds, etc.), assign their masters, designate for slaughter, and more.

This is just a huge quality of life mod that most Rimworld players should have installed, whether they run animal-oriented colonies or not.

Blueprints mod

Workshop link

If you've played Prison Architect and got used to its blueprinting feature or are just tired of having to manually build every single room, this is the mod for you.

Blueprints works very simply: you select the tool and then select the area you want to copy. Then plop the blueprint down where you want it and watch your pawns get to work.

This is just another huge quality of life mod from creator Fluffy. Don't forget you can export blueprints in one save game and then import them into another to use the same designs across multiple saves.

Verge of Galaxy mod

Workshop link

If you haven't gotten tired of Rimworld's music yet, just wait. Your time will come.

Verge of Galaxy is one of a handful of mods that stuff new, more engaging music into the game for you to listen to while your pawns go about their lives. It's as simple as that.

A Dog Said mod

Workshop link

If you want your animals to have more longevity and not be completely crippled after a bad raid, this is a mod you should add to your subscriber list.

A Dog Said adds the ability to install prosthetics onto your animals when in need, as well as the ability to craft those prosthetics at a new workstation.

This is a valuable mod if you care a bit more about your animals than your average player, but it does change the balance a bit as your animals will no longer be crippled or sentenced to death upon receiving certain injuries. Nonetheless, there is nothing wrong with taking care of your colony's animals as well as you can, and the only way to do so is through this mod.

As a side note, a fair number of animal mods do have additional mods to make them work with A Dog Said.

MoreFloors mod

Workshop link

The purpose of this mod is pretty simple: It adds more floors for you to choose from. Though there are many floor mod options, I've never run into any issues with MoreFloors and they do not seem unbalanced. This is one option to actually have some wood floors grant their surroundings a little beauty -- but not too much.

My favorite floors from this mod are the checkered carpets, but they all do look very nice.

Centralized Climate Control mod

Workshop link
**Requires HugsLib**

Now that we're down to the bottom of the list, we can get to my bar-none favorite mod: Centralized Climate Control. I remember what Rimworld was like before I installed this mod, and I don't want to go back. Ever.

Rather than putting an air conditioner or heater in each room or enclosed space with vents, you can instead work up a complex air temperature control system for your colonies using air intake vents, temperature control units, and air output vents into your buildings.

This mod completely changes how you deal with internal temperatures in your colonies, but it doesn't do it in a way that feels to easy. It's up to you to put together a functional system once you've completed the research, but once you do it's completely worth it.


As I mentioned when we first started with this list, there are far more mods you can delve into and subscribe to that won't totally break your game's balance. These are simply those that are newbie-friendly and without significant effects on overall balance. Welcome to the wild world of Rimworld mods!

Starlink: Battle for Atlas Mod Guide Mon, 22 Oct 2018 15:32:42 -0400 William R. Parks

One of the most appealing aspects of Starlink: Battle for Atlas is the depth of customization it offers. With mods, players can tweak their ships and weapons to perform how they like, and hunting down new and powerful mods is what gives Starlink's open-world exploration a purpose.

However, players may feel overwhelmed by the lack of instruction the game provides as mods rapidly enter their inventory.

With this guide, we hope to give players a better overall understanding of Starlink's modification system and how to use it most effectively.


To state the obvious, mods affect the different aspects of the myriad of ships and weapons Starlink offers.

While it seems unnecessary to fully elaborate on the most straightforward of these aspects -- speed references a ship's speed and handling references how well a ship handles, as examples -- there are a few terms often seen in mods that players may feel have not been adequately explained by the game.

Let us have a look at these terms before getting deeper into the mods themselves:

Energy: Each time a weapon is fired, a designated amount of energy is subtracted from a ship's overall energy. When a ship has less energy than the amount required to fire a weapon, players have to pause briefly for energy to recharge and firing to resume.

Pilot Ability: Each pilot has their own special ability, ranging from temporal distortion to invulnerability, with its own recharge time. As time passes, a meter in the bottom-left corner fills. When filled, an icon will illuminate and the pilot ability is ready for use.

Elemental Combo: Fully articulating the different elemental combos is a task for another guide, but it is sufficient to say that these combos are achieved by hitting enemies with weapons of two element types (heat and cold, for example).

How to Equip Mods

Mods are accessed by entering the loadout menu and pressing the button designated as "Mod Ship & Weapons" at the bottom of the screen (Y on Switch).

This will bring you to the ship modification screen, and pressing the button designated as "Change" (A on Switch) will allow you to add any appropriate mods to that slot.

Using the directional pad will allow you to insert mods in any slots you have unlocked, and L and R can be used to switch from the ship modifications to those of the weapons you currently have equipped.

How to Get Mods

From the beginning of the game, players will begin to acquire common mods from almost every task they complete (destroying hives, hacking wrecked cargo shuttles, looting chests, etc.).

However, here are a few tips for players wanting to hunt for higher rarity modifications:

Visit outlaw hideouts in space

As players begin exploring planets, confrontations with outlaws will arise. Defeating these outlaws will sometimes trigger dialogues with other pilots, indicating that they have marked an outlaw hideout on your map.

These hideouts are located in space, are visible on your starmap, and offer higher rarity rewards (along with a lot of cores and Electrum).

Upgrade workshops

Beginning with the third of the story mission's planets, Sonatus, players will have access to workshops.

Workshops allow you to buy mods directly, and the more you upgrade the workshop, the higher rarity the available mods will be.

Additionally, workshops will send you mods, and the more you have upgraded them, the more frequent the deliveries will be (and the higher the rarity the contents).

Focus on Warden Spires

Warden Spires are quick puzzles located on the planets.

Make sure to complete as many as possible, as they reward special, higher rarity Warden modifications that are quite strong.

Check the map

The rarity of the mods you will receive from completing tasks are indicated on their icons on the starmap.

If you are not interested in 100% exploration, it is easy enough to skip anything that is only awarding common rarity modifications.

How to Unlock More Mod Slots

Initially, not all of the possible mod slots for ships and weapons will be accessible - a small lock indicates that a player is not yet able to add a modification to the designated slot.

These slots are unlocked through upgrading the Equinox.

From the Equinox menu (in the same interface as your loadout and starmap), navigate to Equinox and select the Modding Bay. Each upgrade will require your pilots to meet a certain experience level, a number of cores (obtained from Warden Spires), and an amount of Electrum.

Combining Mods

Upgrades through the Equinox also allows you to combine three mods of the same type to make a more powerful mod. For example, three common Cold Amplifiers can be combined to create one rare Cold Amplifier.

Further, when fully upgraded, players are able to duplicate any mod they posses, including one-of-a-kind Relics.

These upgrades are preformed in the Mod Foundry accessed in the Equinox menu.

Ship Mods

There are two categories of mods -- those you equip to your Ship and those that you equip your Weapons -- and, within these categories, there are different types.

We will begin by examining the three types of Ship modifications:

Core Mods

Each ship has one slot for a core mod. These are diamond-shaped mods with diagonal hash marks underneath.

Core mods offer the largest array of powerful effects:

  • Boosts to a ship's base speed, handling, and energy
  • Damage increases when specified conditions are met (when nearby to allies, for examples)
  • Stat increases for nearby allies
  • Decreases to the cool-down of pilot abilities
  • Special abilities (including things like target assist)
Armor Mods

Each ship has one slot for an armor mod. These are shield-shaped mods.

Armor mods provide direct increases to a ship's overall defense as well percentage-based resistance to elemental damage.

These mods also offer defensive abilities (such as healing) and abilities triggered by defense-baed scenarios (increased damage when you are on fire, for example).

Booster Mods

When fully upgraded, each ship has three slots for booster mods. These are circle-shaped mods with diagonal hash marks underneath.

Booster mods each have a single effect and allow you to focus on developing very specific aspects of your ship. These mods are what allow you to fine tune the overall feel of your spacecraft.

Additionally, booster mods can bump your resilience or add effects to your ship like increasing the XP gained from using the vessel.

Weapon Mods

There are two types of Weapon modifications:

Ammo Mods

Each weapon has one slot for a weapon mod. These are diamond-shaped mods with triangles underneath.

These offensive mods offer boosts to a weapon's base damage, range, and fire rate as well as decreasing the amount of energy weapons consume.

Additionally, some ammo mods can only be equipped to weapons of a specified element type, and they come with bonus abilities. For example, Heat-exclusive mods heal you as you deal damage.

Amplifier Mods

Each weapon has three or four slots for amplifier mods. These are circle-shaped mods.

Amplifier mods are the weapon equivalent of the ship's booster mods, allowing you to target very specific aspects of a weapon and ultimately decide how each weapon functions.

Additionally, amplifier mods can add additional effects to weapons like increasing how much Electrum or XP is gained when using the modified weapon.

Strategies for Assigning Mods

There are two approaches to assigning mods.

One is to min-max, focusing on a ship or weapon's strengths and bolstering those stats. For instance, if you want to maximize the speed of a fast-flying ship, mods are how to push it to the limit.

The other option is to target their shortcomings, making balanced ships and weapons with higher consistency but lower overall power. This may mean focusing on the energy consumption of a high damage, low efficiency weapon rather than maximizing its damage output.

As an example, the Iron Fist is a high damage, low range kinetic weapon.

Using the first method, you might assign strictly damage increasing mods to the weapon; its functionality remains essentially the same, but it becomes more powerful.

With the alternative, you might boost the range instead, giving it added functionality at the expense of maximum damage.

The most exciting part of this flexibility is that optimal modification is entirely contingent upon play-style.

Perhaps you prefer to hold down both triggers and watch high fire rate, low damage guns ping your enemies until they explode. Or maybe you are better at charging and executing big damage precision shots from long range.

Whatever suits you best, you can use mods to tinker and tailor your gear until it meets your specific needs.

Mod List

Note: This list is being updated. Last update: October 21.

To close, here is a compiled list of modifications you can expect to encounter in Starlink (with how much it costs to purchase them from workshops, when possible):

Ship Mods


Commander Core III (Rare)
+65% Pilot Ability charge speed
+400 weapon energy on reflect
+15% resistance to nearby allies
E 50,000

Commander Core IV (Epic)
+80% Pilot Ability charge speed
+400 weapon energy on reflect
+15% resistance to nearby allies
+50 damage when near allies
E 75,000

Elemental Core I (Common)
+15 energy
+100 energy on Elemental Combo

Elemental Core III (Rare)
+35 energy
+100 energy on Elemental Combo
Target assist
E 40,000

Elemental Core IV (Epic)
+40 energy
+100 energy on Elemental Combo
Target assist
Stuns nearby units when health becomes critical
E 60,000

Fighter Core I (Common)
+20 speed
+10 handling

Fighter Core II (Uncommon)
+35 speeding
+13 handling
Precision shots charge Boost

Tank Core I (Common)
+20% Pilot Ability charge speed
+100 health on successful reflect
+5% resistance to nearby allies

Tank Core III (Rare)
+60% Pilot Ability charge speed
+100 health on successful reflect
+15% resistance to nearby allies
Group repair

Warden Core II (Uncommon)
+45 energy
+25% damage for 5s after Elemental Combo

Warden Core III (Rare)
+60 energy
+25% damage for 5s after Elemental Combo
+25% damage while near Electrum

Warrior Core III (Rare)
+35 speed
+35 handling
Precision hits charge weapon energy


Champion Armor I (Common)
+15 defense
Lighten the ship's weight

Cold Armor I (Common)
+20 defense
+25% Cold damage resist | -20% Heat damage resist
More durable while Frosted or Frozen

Cold Armor III (Uncommon)
+45 defense
+35% Cold damage resist | -20% Heat damage resist
More durable while Frosted or Frozen

Cold Armor III (Rare)
+60 defense
+45% Cold damage resist | -20% Heat damage resist
More durable while Frosted or Frozen
Chance to Frost on collision
E 40,000

Cold Armor IV (Epic)
+85 defense
+55% Cold damage resist | -20% Heat damage resist
More durable while Frosted or Frozen
Chance to Frost on collision
E 60,000

Commander Armor III (Rare)
+60 defense
+25% damage resistance near allies
More durable when health is critical
Increases ship's weight
E 50,000

Commander Armor IV (Epic)
+85 defense
+25% damage resistance near allies
More durable while health is critical
Increase ship's weight
E 75,000

Deflection Armor I (Common)
+15 defense
+5% chance to Ricochet projectiles
Reflect deals 500 damage

Deflection Armor II (Uncommon)
+30 defense
+10% chance to Ricochet projectiles
Reflect deals 1000 damage

Heat Armor I (Common)
+10 defense
+25% resistance to Heat damage
-20% resistance to Cold damage

Heat Armor III (Rare)
+20 defense
+45% resistance to Heat damage
-20% resistance to Cold damage
Deal extra damage when on Fire
E 40,000

Heat Armor IV (Epic)
+27 defense
+55% resistance to Heat damage
-20% resistance to Cold damage
Deal extra damage when on Fire or Overheated
E 60,000

Prospector Armor II (Uncommon)
+45 defense
+25% damage resist
Reflects stuns for longer | Stun on impact
Equip on Prospector ships only

Prospector Armor III (Rare)
+60 defense
+30% damage resist
Reflects stuns for longer | Stun on impact
Knock units back on impact
Equip on Prospector ships only
E 50,000

Prospector Armor IV (Epic)
+85 defense
+35% damage resist
Reflect stuns for longer | Stun on impact
Knock units back on impact
Equip on Prospector ships only
E 75,000

Scrapper Armor I (Common)
+20% Kinetic resist
+10 defense

Stasis Armor II (Uncommon)
Chance to Lift on impact | -20% Gravity resist

Warden Armor II (Uncommon)
+17 defense
+25% resistance to all Elemental damage
Explosive damage when health becomes critical

Warden Armor III (Rare)
+20 defense
+30% resistance to all Elemental damage
Explosive damage when health becomes critical
Constant heal near Electrum Veins


Antifreeze Booster I (Common)
+20% resistance to Cold

Antifreeze Booster II (Uncommon)
+25% resistance to Cold

Antigrav Booster I (Common)
+20% resistance to Gravity

Antigrav Booster III (Rare)
+30% resistance to Gravity
E 20,000

Antigrav Booster IV (Epic)
+35% resistance to Gravity
E 30,000

Defense Booster I (Common)
+10 defense

Defense Booster II (Uncommon)
+15 defense

Energy Booster I (Common)
+10 energy

Energy Booster III (Rare)
+20 energy

Handling Booster I (Common)
+10 handling

Handling Booster II (Uncommon)
+15 handling

Handling Booster III (Rare)
+20 handling
E 20,000

Handling Booster IV (Epic)
+25 handling
E 30,000

Heatsink Booster I (Common)
+20% resistance to Heat

Recharge Booster I (Common)
+10% weapon energy recharge speed

Recharge Booster II (Uncommon)
+15% weapon energy recharge speed

Recharge Booster III (Rare)
+20% weapon energy recharge speed
E 20,000

Recharge Booster IV (Epic)
+25 weapon energy recharge speed
E 30,000

Regen Booster I (Common)
+5% shield recharge speed

Speed Booster II (Uncommon)
+15 speed

Survival Booster I (Common)
+10% durability when the ship is critically damaged

Survival Booster III (Rare)
+20% durability when the ship is critically damaged
E 20,000

Survival Booster IV (Epic)
+25% durability when the ship is critically damaged
E 30,000

Warden Booster II (Uncommon)
+20% Elemental resistance

XP Booster I (Common)
+10% XP earned with this ship

XP Booster II (Uncommon)
+15% XP earned with this ship

XP Booster III (Rare)
+20% XP earned with this ship
E 20,000

XP Booster IV (Epic)
+25% XP earned with this ship
E 30,000

Weapon Mods


Commander Ammo I (Common)
+15% damage
Deal damage to charge energy

Commander Ammo II (Uncommon)
+20% damage
+25 fire rate
Deal damage to charge energy

Commander Ammo III (Rare)
+35% damage
+50 fire rate
Deal damage to charge energy
E 50,000

Commander Ammo IV (Epic)
+40% damage
+50 fire rate
+25% damage near allies
Deal damage to charge energy
E 75,000

Crushing Ammo II (Uncommon)
+35% damage | +10 range
+25% damage to targets in Gravity Effects
Equip to Gravity weapons only

Crushing Ammo III (Rare)
+60% damage | +20 range
+25% damage to targets in Gravity Effects
Equip to Gravity weapons only

Frost Ammo I (Common)
+20% damage
+25% damage to Frosted targets
Equip on Cold weapons only

Frost Ammo II (Uncommon)
+35% damage
+25% damage to Frosted targets
+15 fire rate
Equip on Cold weapons only

Frost Ammo III (Rare)
+60% damage
+25% damage to Frosted targets
+30 fire rate
Equip on Cold weapons only
E 40,000

Frost Ammo IV (Epic)
+75% damage
+25% damage to Frosted targets
+35 fire rate
Freeze weapons can cause Shatter Combo
Equip on Cold weapons only
E 60,000

Rapid Ammo I (Common)
+20 fire rate
+25% damage to targets within 50m

Rapid Ammo II (Uncommon)
+35 fire rate
+25% damage to targets within 50m
-20% energy cost

Scorching Ammo I (Common)
+10% damage
Heals for 10% of damage done
Equip to Heat weapons only

Scorching Ammo II (Uncommon)
+13% damage
-25% energy cost
Heals for 10% of damage done
Equip to Heat weapons only

Scorching Ammo III (Rare)
+20% damage
-30% energy cost
Heals for 10% of damage done
Equip on Heat weapons only
E 40,000

Scorching Ammo IV (Epic)
+23% damage
-35% energy cost
Heals for 10% of damage done
Apply Fire & Overheat
Equip on Heat weapons only
E 60,000

Stasis Ammo II (Uncommon)
+35% damage
+25% damage against Lifted targets
+10 weapon range
Equip on Stasis weapons only

Support Ammo I (Common)
+10% damage
Heals for 1% of damage done

Support Ammo II (Uncommon)
+13% damage
+10% damage to targets within 50m
Heals for 1% of damage done

Warden Ammo III (Rare)
+35% damage
+25% damage to targets under Status Effect
+25% damage when using a target's Elemental weakness


Alliance Amplifier (Legendary)
+20% damage
+20 fire rate
E 300,000

Cold Amplifier I (Common)
+10% Cold damage
Equip on Cold weapons only

Cold Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+15% Cold damage
Equip on Cold weapons only

Efficiency Amplifier I (Common)
-20% energy cost to fire this weapon

Efficiency Amplifier II (Uncommon)
-25% energy cost to fire this weapon

Efficiency Amplifier III (Rare)
-30% energy cost to fire this weapon
E 20,000

Efficiency Amplifier IV (Epic)
-35% energy cost to fire this weapon
E 30,000

Electrum Amplifier I (Common)
+50 Electrum from ships & Legion destroyed with this weapon equipped

Electrum Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+100 Electrum from ships & Legion destroyed with this weapon equipped

Electrum Amplifier III (Rare)
+200 Electrum from ships & Legion destroyed with this weapon equipped
E 20,000

Electrum Amplifier IV (Epic)
+150 Electrum from ships & Legion destroyed with this weapon equipped
E 23,000

Gravity Amplifier I (Common)
+10% Gravity damage
Equip on Gravity weapons only

Gravity Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+15% Gravity damage
Equip on Gravity weapons only

Gravity Amplifier III (Rare)
+20% Gravity damage
Equip on Gravity weapons only
E 20,000

Gravity Amplifier IV (Epic)
+25% Gravity damage
Equip on Gravity weapons only
E 30,000

Heat Amplifier I (Common)
+10% Heat damage
Equip on Heat weapons only

Heat Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+15% Heat damage
Equip on Heat weapons only

Heat Amplifier III (Rare)
+20% Heat damage
Equip on Heat weapons only

Impact Amplifier I (Common)
+10% chance to knock back or stumble targets

Impact Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+12% chance to knock back or stumble targets

Quickshot Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+15 rate of fire

Range Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+15 range

Range Amplifier III (Rare)
+20 range
E 20,000

Range Amplifier IV (Epic)
+25 range
E 30,000

Stability Amplifier II (Uncommon)
-12% kick-back when firing this weapon

Warden Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+12% damage
+4% critical damage increase

XP Amplifier I (Common)
+10% XP earned with this weapon

XP Amplifier II (Uncommon)
+15% XP earned with this weapon

Take this knowledge into Starlink: Battle for Atlas with you and dominate the stars using your own combination of mods.

Rimworld: How to Prevent Food Poisoning Fri, 19 Oct 2018 15:42:05 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Every Rimworld game has at least one instance of food poisoning; it happens. The trouble comes along when at least one of your pawns is getting food poisoning on a regular basis -- then you have to figure out what about the cooking process is making them sick.

There are several variables that could be affecting the sanitation of your cooking. We're going to go over the three factors that could be causing mass food poisoning in your colony. There are some aspects of the game you're just not going to figure out on your own right away, and this is one of them.

Pawn cooking level

A pawn's cooking level doesn't just affect how quickly it can prepare food and the sorts of foods it's able to make. It also affects how sanitary the food is.

The lower a pawn's cooking level is, the higher the chance the food they will prepare will be contaminated.

A pawn with 1 skill level in cooking has a 10% chance to prepare sickness-inducing foods, while a pawn that's at cooking level 9 has a mere 0.30% chance for their foods to cause food poisoning. The chance continues to dwindle as you get into the higher levels.

This is one good reason to always start a new game with at least one pawn with cooking above level 4.

Room sanitation: AKA separate the stove and butcher table

There are a lot of ways for your kitchen to get contaminated with harmful bacteria, but the most common source is a newbie trap: using one room to house your stove and butcher's table.

This took me a little while to realize when I first started playing Rimworld many moons ago because it just seems like the two stations should be near each other -- and they should. They just should not be in the same room. Put your stove and your butcher table in separate rooms.

Butchering animals gets blood all over the floor, and that is the opposite of cleanliness. While you could take the time to manually order a pawn to clean the blood up after butchering, that is simply not a viable way to deal with the problem. You're never going to be able to catch it all the time.

The simplest solution to this issue is to simply have each station in its own room next to the other, attached to or near the freezer.

Above is an example of what I mean, from a pre-1.0 save (so my mods broke). You can have the two rooms connected via door, but I chose not to in the pictured save game. The two doors to the bottom lead to the freezer.

Animal blood is the number one food contaminant for new players and just separating the two stations fixes the issue. However, if you're having a massive food poisoning outbreak, it's probably because of something even more obtuse.

Minimize foot traffic into the freezer

Pawns track dirt behind them as they walk, which can contaminate food. You can further lower the chances of your pawns getting food poisoning by lowering the foot traffic to your freezer.

There are some ways to do this creatively, such as setting up 1-tile refrigerated rooms to store one pile of meals across your base (creative, but not particularly efficient); but the best way is to download the Rimfridge mod.

Rimfridge adds three refrigerators you can place around your colony, rather than having to rely on manual freezers. I highly recommend it, especially if you have frequent foot poisoning issues.

The ingredients or meal went bad

It just happens sometimes.

Sometimes your pawns will end up cooking some food and it perishes mid-cook, sometimes they are starving and grab up rotten meals just to quell the rumbling in their stomachs. In some instances, just eating raw vegetables gets them sick. A pawn's gotta eat.

You can click on a pawn and see what caused them food poisoning. Usually, it's just a case of bad luck, but sometimes it is caused by plain ol' rotten food. If you have multiple pawns get food poisoning, you need to check what made them sick and try to root out the exact source.

There's not much you can do once your pawns get food poisoning, and their frequent vomiting contaminates all areas of the colony -- and if they vomit on ingredients or straight up meals, those things are contaminated too.

Really, the best thing you can do for your colony's hygiene is separate your butcher table and stove. People hurling their lunch up should be one of the least of your problems, so just take the right precautions and focus on those future raids rolling through your area. Welcome to Rimworld!

Fortnite Alpha Tournament Guide: How to Get More Points Fast Wed, 17 Oct 2018 17:21:08 -0400 Ty Arthur

As if getting Victory Royale hasn't been enough, Fortnite finally has a real-deal Tournament mode for earning points and getting crowned as the top player.  Running through October 21, tournament sessions will be available for a limited number of hours each day.

To play in the Alpha Tournament, click the icon above the Play button and then click the Alpha Tournament button.

Players are matched against opponents with similar scores during the session, and if you score 20 points in a session, you earn a coveted golden pin

How to Get Points in Fortnite's Alpha Tournament

The main Fortnite screen showing the tournament selection tab

You begin earning points at 3 eliminations; you then earn 1 extra point at 5 eliminations and 7 eliminations.

Additional points (in 1 point increments) are awarded if you:

  • Get in the Top 10
  • Get in the Top 3
  • Get Top 1 Victory Royale  

Points reset at the beginning of each day during the Tournament, so you only have a limited number of hours to hit 20 points and earn the pin.

Best Landing Spots & Kill Areas in Alpha Tournament

Because of this point set up, aggressive play is rewarded. Don't hide. Don't be a bush. Don't play it safe. Land in hot zones such as:

  • Tilted Towers 
  • Pleasant Park 
  • Lazy Links
  • Paradise Palms

Essentially, jump where everyone else is. Once you land (and you probably already know this), immediately go for any location with a chest or floor weapon so you can come out swinging.

Finding loot faster than the opponents is key here. Hit high loot areas for critical early-game gains. Go to the basketball court in Greasy Grove, basically all the buildings in Tilted Towers, or the grocery store in Retail Row. 

Best Situational Weapons for Alpha Tournament

No matter where you land, stick to the high ground for headshots whenever possible. Also, try lurking indoors with a shotgun or other close-range weapons for quick kills in tight spaces. 

Individual play style can have a big impact on how you rack up your kills, but in general, these are the best weapons to try to pick up in the Alpha Tournament:

  • Any SMG 
    • For spray and pray outdoor fighting
  • High rarity Assault Rifle (AR)
    • For outdoor fighting at medium range
  • Pump or Tactical Shotgun 
    • For indoor or close-quarters fighting
  • Bolt action or heavy sniper rifle
    • Long-range headshots if your playstyle keeps you at the edges of each area
Best Choke Points in Alpha Tournament

A male Fortnite player with spiked hair shoots a handgun at a running player near a broken down house

While aggressive attacking with SMGs and shotguns is key to getting kills quickly, some players will still prefer to lie in wait and snipe. In that case, these are some excellent choke points to rack up kills:

  • The RVs north of Tilted Towers 
  • The hill above Dusty Divot with a clear line of sight down below
  • Any rooftop at Greasy Grove (if you land on the gazebo at the south end of the area you will likely arrive directly at a chest spawn)
Best Defensive Strategies for Alpha Tournament (If You Must)

If you want to rack up the most points in the least amount of time, it can actually be more efficient to get 5-7 kills, and then die on purpose and join a new match.

Trying to get all the way to the #1 spot may take more time than it's worth, especially if you end up dying just shy of the top 10 or top 3 spots.

Defense is less important in an Alpha Tournament match as you're fighting against the clock to get quick kills before the daily points reset. If you are want to try to get to the Top 10, 3, and 1 spots, however, there are two key defense options to utilize in the Tournament.

  1. Jump frequently
  2. Avoid headshots
  3. Build 1x1 tower bases
    • Learn to quickly build ramps if the bottom gets taken out for quick escapes

There is literally no reason to hide in this mode. In essence, Alpha Tournament wants you to play differently and get out of your comfort zone. Acting like a bush will get you nowhere. 

Fortnite Alpha Tournament Schedule

Here's the full breakdown on when each Tournament will be running; don't forget individual session times will vary by region each day:

  • Alpha Tournament (Solo): October 16-21
  • Beta Tournament (Duo): October 23-25
  • Friday Night Fortnite (Squad): October 19-November 30
  • Salty Springs Cup (Solo): October 27-31
  • Tomato Temple Cup (Duo): October 28-November 1

A Word on Alpha Tournament Bugs

The choose your game mode screen showing various fortnite events and modes

As you might have expected, the rollout of a major new Fortnite mode means unexpected bugs and hiccups.

Most notably, Alpha Tournament is currently suffering from incorrect scoring (preventing you from getting the pin) and matchmaking problems

A patch is, of course, expected to fix these problems in the next day or so, but for now, you need to know these issues persist and you may not get the score you earned.

Check out a full rundown from Epic regarding known issues at Reddit here.


Got any other tips for surviving in the Alpha Tournament? Let us know your favorite strategy below, and check out our other Fortnite guides here.

Soul Calibur 6 Guide: Libra of Souls Tips & Tricks Guide Wed, 17 Oct 2018 12:15:53 -0400 Synzer

Libra of Souls is a new game mode in SoulCalibur 6 that follows the story of a character you create specifically for that game mode. Throughout the story you will encounter many of the characters in the main SoulCalibur story. 

There are times when you will get dialogue choices to further distinguish your character. Some of these choices will also tip the scales of your soul to either good or evil. These choices affect the story, but also the weapons you equip later.

Let me start by going over the basics.

Libra of Souls Basics

Libra of Souls allows you to level up a created character by completing quests. There are main story quests and side quests. These quests involve fighting, but often with special conditions

Sometimes you may need to fight multiple opponents, certain attacks -- such as verticals -- could only be effective, slippery floors, and more can change how you will fight.

This offers you a chance to take advantage of the situation with the right knowledge, so be sure to read the conditions before each fight.

Leveling and Weapons

When your character levels, their max health will go up. That's not all, you will also be able to equip stronger weapons as your level increases.

This is very important because no matter how good you may be with a certain fighter's style, you may still lose if your weapon and level are too low.

Other than level, weapons can also have extra attributes such as crit chance, or health recovery when dealing damage.

soulcalibur vi libra of souls weapons

When you unlock Bolta's Smithy, you will be able to choose from a variety of upgrades to put into your weapons, as long as they have slots available.

Finally, you will eventually get weapons with either a blue or orange flame. This indicates which part of the scale they align with. If your soul is aligned with the weapon, you get extra bonuses when using it.

Food and Mercenaries

As you progress through the game, you will unlock the ability to use food and mercenaries before starting a battle.

Food gives extra benefits, such as health recovery, or extra critical damage. There are a wide variety of food buffs, so you can pick whichever best suits the battle you are trying to win.

Mercenaries are CPU fighters that will fight before you during a battle. They have levels and weapons just like you and can even be given food and weapons that match their style.

This gives you the edge because they can take out a lot of the opponent's health, or even defeat some, before you even start fighting! If they lose, you can just continue fighting where they left off and the opponent will have the same amount of health as they did when your mercenary lost.

Traveling and Side Quests

As you go through the story, you will naturally travel the land. Each location allows you to explore the surroundings to complete a variety of side quests. These are great for leveling, getting more weapons and items, and fleshing out the overall story.

You can choose to fast travel back to any previous town or location you've already visited. This also allows you to explore the surrounding areas without the need to attempt long travel.

soulcalibur vi libra of souls travel

When you do travel, you have a chance to run into a random battle along the way. This can be good for extra experience and items, but your journey could be cut short if you lose any of these battles. If this happens, you will use up the gold required to reach your destination, but you will be put back to your original location.

Libra of Souls Tips

Pay attention to travel costs when exploring

There are many extra quests you can complete if you choose to explore the surrounding area during the game, but it costs gold to travel. If the location is far away, or if you have to cross hard terrain such as mountains, then the price to reach it will be very high.

You can combat this by choosing a base location closer to the quest you want to complete, or one with a better angle.

You can also travel to any of the dots on the map, then continue exploring from there to reach certain destinations without spending a ton of gold.

If you want a specific weapon type, use it during quests

The weapons/styles you get throughout the game are mostly random, but I've noticed you are highly likely to get one of the same type that you use during a quest.

For example, if you want a higher level Geralt weapon, you can greatly increase your chances of getting one if you complete a quest with that style. 

Try different weapons

You will inevitably get a weapon for a style you aren't familiar with or enjoy playing. It is good to try new weapons because you might find that you like another character, or it may just be easier for a certain quest.

If you get a strong weapon for another fighter, it may still be worth using simply because it is much better than whatever you are currently using.

I always like playing as Tira or Zasalamel, but I tried out Geralt's and Mitsurugi's weapons and found that I really enjoyed playing as them as well.

Complete certain side quests to level up towns

There are side quests near towns, like those that involve the blacksmith, that will level up the town.

soul calibur vi libra of souls weapons upgrades

Leveling up a town grants new items at the shop, more mercenaries to choose from, and better weapon upgrades from the blacksmith. Each major town has their own town level so be sure to do the ones for the specific town you want to increase.

That's all there is for my Libra of Souls guide in Soul Calibur 6. Hopefully, this knowledge will better prepare you for your own journey through the game and give you a better idea how you will want to go about things!

Fortnite Season 6, Week 4 Challenge Guide: Complete 3 Timed Trials Wed, 17 Oct 2018 07:11:41 -0400 Sergey_3847

Completing Timed Trials is definitely one of the hardest challenges that Fortnite players have ever encountered. This week you need to hit at least three of the five possible Timed Trials around the map. But the reward is worth it, as you will get 10 Battle Stars after the successful completion of this challenge.

You can build up a strategy of your own on how to finish all three required trials, or you could simply follow our quick guide below for all the possible locations of the Timed Trails and how to complete them in the fastest way possible.

How to Complete 3 Timed Trials in Fortnite

The three best and easiest Timed Trials in Fortnite can be found in Snobby Shores, Shifty Shafts, and Tomato Temple. All three trials are super easy to complete, but here are a few tips to make it completely clear.

Trial 1: Snobby Shores

When you arrive at Snobby Shores, go right on top of the hill indicated on the map above. There you will find a softwatch that can be activated. As soon as you do it, the rest of the watches will appear downhill. Just make your way down and grab each and every softwatch you see. In the end you will finish this trial and you can move onto the next one.

Trial 2: Shifty Shafts

To the south of Shifty Shafts you will find a bridge across the river. As soon as you activate the first softwatch, the rest will appear across and above the bridge.

In order to complete this trial you need to build a ramp and gather all the watches from the top of the bridge. The last watch will be waiting for you on the other side of the bridge. Activate it and finish your second trial.

Trial 3: Tomato Temple

The final trial at the Tomato Temple is the hardest one. It will require you to run through the wooden ramp near the temple, which you may not be able to finish the first time. But after some practicing you should be able to get every single softwatch in time. As soon as you're done with this trial the challnge will be complete.


That is all on how to complete three Timed Trials in Season 6, Week 4 challenge, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, please see the list below:

Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 Specialists Overview Guide Tue, 16 Oct 2018 11:10:42 -0400 John Schutt

I'm playing Black Ops 4 in preparation for my review, there are a few things that stand out in the multiplayer portion, and one of them isn't new, but because of the changes made in this new iteration, there's still no doubt the Specialists change up game flow.

That being said, this time around many of the Specialist abilities take a supporting role to the gunplay, and the only ones who can have a lasting impact are the actual support abilities, like Crash's heal or Torque's barricade and razor wire. 

I've divided the Specialists into three categories, based on the Team Fortress 2 system for simplicity. The categories, therefore, are Attack, Defense, and Support.

Before we get started, please remember: all of these strategies assume a basic familiarity with the maps. You'll be hard pressed to get the most out of the Specialists without one.

Now, first up is Attack, made up of Ruin, Firebreak, Battery, and Seraph.

Attack Specialists

The primary goal of these Specialists is to be on the battlefield at all times, laying down fire and explosives and dealing as much damage as possible in the shortest amount of time. Mobility is key, as is pure output.


Ruin: First to the Fight

Getting the most out of Ruin is fairly simple, as he's probably the most straightforward Specialist on offer.

The strategy for most matches is as follows: get to the first major firefight first with the grappling hook, take the first fight and win it, then reposition either to the flank or toward the enemy's blind side with a second use of the grapple. 

The nuance comes in the most valuable pair of traits a good shooter player can have: bravery and unpredictability.

Ruin excels at both.

He can get most places on the map before anyone else, faster than anyone else, more consistently than anyone else, so make good use of the increased mobility the grapple offers.

If you know there's a small squad of enemies coming, grapple over their heads, make a quick turn while they're disoriented, and take one or two out.

Alternately, you can grapple to safety exactly when your opponent doesn't need you to: right after they've wasted all their ammo, lost some health, and now find themselves alone and out of position.

The key with Ruin is to never be in the same place for more than a single gunfight because at that point you might as well be playing anyone else.

Using his Specialist Weapon, the Grav Slam, is as cut and dry as any other one-shot ability. Find enemy team, press buttons, get kills.

You will do well combining a grapple into a slam because there's no easier way to secure at least two or three kills. Be aware also that the slam has some ability to go through terrain, but not solid walls.


Firebreak: Fire. Lots of it.

If you remember Firebreak from Black Ops 3, you might be a little disappointed in this variation. His flamethrower doesn't have the range or the instant killing power it did in the previous title, but it's still quite deadly in the right hands. 

His Reactor Core ability is, however, quite handy so long as you spare a little time to learn where and when to use it.

In short, go to common chokepoints when you know there's at least one enemy there and fire it up. You'll deny them both access to the power position and a good portion of their health as well.

Reactor Core also provides Firebreak with a good amount of armor, reducing incoming damage by at least half.

If you can outmaneuver your opponent, activate the ability and listen to them burn, screaming in frustration, not at the flames but their own failure.

The Purifier still functions as a good area-clearing weapon, and because there's no way to super jump in Black Ops 4, it provides a fair bit of visual cover as well.

The increase player health dulls its edge a fair bit, but in close quarters there are few better options than quickly swiping back and forth across a spawn, incinerating everything you can see.

Specialist Battery

Battery: Splash

"Throw grenades, watch explosions" might sound like an easy ask when it comes to strategy, but like all of the Specialists in Black Ops 4, there's a little subtlety to consider when playing as Battery.

First are her Cluster Grenades. Their cooldown isn't too long, but it isn't short, either so you have to choose carefully when and where you use it. Take care about its short throw distance as well, it can be deceiving.

There are two primary strategies when it comes to making the best use of the Battery's grenade, and the first one is as old as CoD itself. Pick a known hot spot, wait until you know someone's there, and take them out.

The second might seem like a waste of a perfectly good lethal ability, but momentary area denial is a valuable use of any grenade.

Make your enemy think twice about moving through that doorway, or toward you and your friends, with a well-placed set of explosions.

You can also lock someone down in a corner for an easy kill if you put the blast even somewhat close to them.

As for her Warmachine grenade launcher, your aggression will pay dividends. You can get kills either with direct impact grenade hits or by bouncing them up and around your enemy. 

If nothing else, holding that much explosive power should give you the confidence to take on all comers. There's not really a bad way to use the Warmachine, so don't be afraid to experiment.

If I had to narrow it down, the most satisfying way to play Battery is to go for direct impact grenade launcher kills that lock down an objective or sightline.

My second favorite way is to use it the same way grenade launchers have been used since the early days of Quake: blind spam. Yes, it's annoying. Yes, it's effective. Yes, you will laugh and your enemies will hate you.

That's kind of the point, though.

Specialist Seraph

Seraph: Staying in the Fight

Seraph is something of a mixed bag, blurring the line between attack and support heroes as a hybrid, though she sits more in the first than the second.

Her Specialist Weapon, the Annihilator, is a one-hit kill from any range to any part of the body, but the Tac-Deploy is a more passive tool, can't withstand even the smallest amount of enemy fire, and can't deal damage of any kind for any reason.

In fact, unlike Ruin's grapple, it's actually more beneficial to the team than it is to her. Every aggro player's nightmare.

The difference is all about timing. If you can place a Tac-Deploy beacon in just the right spot at just the right time, you can make more of a difference than all six Annihilator shots.

Especially in objective modes — but not limited to them — having ready access to a power position or to the primary objective can turn the tide of battle.

Aggressive beacon use is not necessarily encouraged, as it will be destroyed quickly, but getting a high-skill player in the right place at the right time is valuable for its own reasons.

Don't let these facts dissuade you from making liberal use of the Annihilator. Indeed, combining a well-laid beacon with six one-shot kills is a potent means of obliterating all opposition. 

Like the Warmachine, I prefer a heads up approach to using Seraph's Specialist Weapon, if only because being close range makes actually getting the kills easier by virtue of bigger targets.

Defense Specialists

Whether you want to cut off entire pathways on a map or just make a single objective or power position incredibly unappetizing, Defense Specialists are your go-to. They are: Torque, Ajax, Nomad, and Prophet.

Specialist Torque

Torque: (Non-)Traditional Fortifications

Out of all the Specialists on offer, Torque's strategies could very well have the most in the way of options. You can deploy his abilities anywhere and they'll do wonders to dissuade your enemies from getting anywhere near them.

Though popular spots will eventually come to dominate the meta, it is the player who uses them unconventionally that will always win.

Razor wire is fairly self-explanatory, but even poor placement can have its uses. An ill-timed jump, slide, or panicked getaway can go very badly if you suddenly find yourself caught up in sharp steel. 

For best results, of course, you want to cover doorways and entrances of all kinds. Blind corners, when you can find them are also great ways to make someone's day that much worse. 

Bear in mind that you won't be killing many people with razor wire. That's not its purpose. It'll happen, just don't count on it.

You can, however, funnel people into Torque's Barricade, where they'll cook alive. 

Barricades are, oddly, easier to take out than the razor wire, but that's mostly because they're such a large target and you'll be deploying them in much hotter zones. 

In game types with points to capture, a single Barricade can halt an entire push until the thing's been dealt with.

Again, with blind corners and smart use of razor wire, you can even get three or four kills with it before the enemy team wises up and just shoots it to pieces.

Specialist Ajax

Ajax: Single-Man Lockdown

Ajax brings the underused 9-Bang grenade and overused riot shield into the modern age, both with a twist. Simple but effective, the implementation here makes for one of the most annoying-but-hilarious class setups in Call of Duty history.

Strategies here are primarily harassment-based. The 9-Bang is throwable like any other 'nade or cookable for a prolonged, powerful effect.

Your enemies won't be able to heal with their other hand trying to block the light, and the full flash pushes ten seconds if you're caught in the middle of it.

Options are as numerous as there are ways to throw a grenade, but again, aggression is your friend. Pre-flashing a room is all well and good, but taking on a whole team after a full-charge flash is one of those feelings you don't find in many places. 

That said, the most effective use is the tried and true preparatory flash, so don't be afraid to fall back on the classics.

The riot shield, while a series staple, now comes with handy gun port, and completely covers the feet. Crouch and approach your enemies at an angle and watch as they fire uselessly at three inches of future-steel.

Remember that unless you can track them properly, a player who tries to jump shot you is your worst enemy. And your back is completely exposed, so unless you know you've got backup, try to keep the enemy in front of you.

Do that, and you can solo cap an objective, get at least three to five kills with the 100 rounds in your fully automatic pistol, and become one of the biggest pains in the neck this side of Modern Warfare 2.

Specialist Nomad

Nomad: A Dog of Mine

I'll admit, I don't find Nomad particularly effective. The dog's AI feels like it needs adjusting and the mesh mine, even though it's an almost guaranteed kill if it goes off, is pretty easy to see, a first for Treyarch plantable explosives. 

Still, in the right hands, Nomad can be.. well, if not a menace then at least a nuisance.

Mesh mines follow the same basic logic as razor wire. Plant them on common traffic routes, near doorways at people's feet, hidden if possible. A blind corner will all but guarantee a kill, so don't hesitate to make use of them.

You can also use them to deter or eliminate a pursuer if you're fast enough on the placement. People are always liable to chase if they sense they can get an easy kill, so turn the tables and make them into giblets.

Sadly, there's no real nuance to the dog that I can find. He follows you around, trying mightily to kill something. A distraction at best, and only for a little while, he takes too long to summon and has a poor killing radius. 

If I had to put something on paper, I'd tell you to always summon the dog when you near a major conflict area, let him go in first to draw fire, then mop up when he inevitably bites it. He might get a few kills, but that's gravy.

Specialist Prophet

Prophet: Zap Zap

From where I'm standing, Prophet is just a better Nomad. His mobile deployable is faster, harder to hit, comes up more often, and is a more consistent kill than the dog ever is. 

Using the Seeker Mine is similar to the dog in some respects. You want to lead with it, set it down in a safe area, and letting it track enemies so you can follow it for a quick clean up. 

If you must be aggressive, throwing a Seeker Mine directly onto a point won't buy you too much time, but objectives have been captured with less.

Remember that people hit with the mine have the opportunity to escape it if they're fast, and they can still shoot it if they can get their aim down enough. 

The ultimate Seeker Usage boils down to timing. If you have it available and you know and where and when your enemy will be en route to an objective, you can set the mine, let your team clean up, and get behind the enemy team while they're dealing with everyone else.

Spawns being what they are, you won't have long, but seconds are priceless in Black Ops 4, so use them as you have them.

Support Specialists

Everyone loves the support until they stop doing their job correctly. Poor ability use is perhaps one of the gravest sins a support player can commit, not just because they've wasted their ability, but that diminishes the effectiveness of the entire team.

Learn a few ways to make the best use of Recon and Crash's abilities below.

Specialist Recon

Recon: I See You

Recon's statement, "Intel wins wars," is certainly true, and the Sensor Dart and Vision Pulse are two of the most powerful abilities in all of Black Ops 4.

When your team can see where they need to be shooting, the "teammate problem" usually gets a little better. Sometimes. Maybe. If you're lucky.

In any event, using the Sensor Dart is easy and difficult at the same time. Easy because it's a simple button press and suddenly everyone on your team knows where people inside the dart's radius are

It's hard because there are plenty of places on each map where you'll get absolutely nothing by placing your dart in that location.

Also, darts are easy to spot and easier to destroy, so you want to be smart about how you place them.

The key thing to remember about a Sensor Dart is it's not burdened by height or obstacles like walls, so if you want to canvas a particular part of the map, place your dart above, below, or to the side of that location.

Everyone still gets the effects on their minimap and you get the satisfaction that the dart's probably not going anywhere.

Vision Pulse is a boon to everyone on your team and a big caution flag for the enemy, and there are two schools of thought when it comes to deploying it.

First, the passive. Like Firebreak's Reactor Core, you can use Vision Pulse from a known high-traffic area, find a nice spot to stand, and let the pulse do its work.

You'll get plenty of points toward your streak and your team will have a good twenty seconds of knowing exactly where they'll need to be shooting.

For the aggressive player, Vision Pulse can be a gift from the FPS gods. Be prepared for every fight. Predict where your enemy will come from after you kill them, the options are endless.

I would stress that aggressive Vision Pulse use is still slower than most other aggressive styles, as you need to take a moment to internalize all incoming threats, let the pulse reset, and actually take time to prepare for each engagement. 

If you so choose, win one gunfight then activate the pulse so you can continue fighting in one seamless motion, moving from foe to foe with speed and efficiency.

Each engagement should lead into the next, and do your level best to keep fights one-on-one. Even if you know they're coming, low health and low ammo are the perfect ingredients for a death sandwich.

Specialist Crash

Crash: Traditional Support

The support's job is to make sure you don't die and are also better at your job. Crash is, therefore, a consummate support. More bullets to keep your friends in the fight longer.

More points to get their streaks faster. More health to fight longer. There's really nothing wrong with ever playing Crash, and I believe every team should have one. 

Using the Assault Pack should happen pretty much as soon as you have it available, and never aggressively. The extra points are too valuable and the ammo important enough that there's no reason to ever have it in the line of fire.

Ideally, you want to use the pack at your team's current spawn, about twenty feet or so in front of where most of them will come back into the fight.

In other words, you want to make it as clear as possible to your team that, hey, they should pick this up. It's a win for everyone involved.

Don't forget to pick up ammo from your own assault pack if you die and respawn near it. You get the full benefit of those points on a kill too, so put them to use. You won't regret it. 

You also won't regret the Tak-5, heal-the-entire-team ability. The only ability I'd call purely aggressive (note that the Tak-5 has no means of dealing damage), giving everyone on the team including yourself an extra 50 health is nothing to sneeze at.

More importantly, if you use the Tak-5 when a teammate is in the middle of a fight, they'll go from almost nothing to full instantly, all but securing the engagement unless they're are a poor shot. 

I would caution against using this ability when you yourself are in the middle of a firefight, as you're more liable to die before the buff goes off. 

The one tried and true strategy I've found is to do everything you can to get the ability ready before a new round in round-based modes, or by the middle of a match in everything else.

Use it straight off spawn. Your enemies now have a full team of buffed players to contend with, and unless they've got a Crash on their side, that's one advantage no one player can overcome.


I hope you've gotten something out of this Black Ops 4 Specialist guide. There's plenty of little bits and bolts of strategy to tease out in the hundreds of hours to come, and it will be interesting to see where the meta goes in this game.

I can guarantee a Crash on every team, and probably a Ruin and Seraph. The other two are flex, though I'd still put money on a Recon and Battery as the primary takers here.

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 guides.

Sinner Sacrifice for Redemption Boss Guide: How to Beat the First Seven Bosses Tue, 16 Oct 2018 10:20:01 -0400 Kenneth Seward Jr.

Boss fights are typically used to anchor a level or game. The challenges up until that point have culminated into a showdown with a big bad, which in turn elevates the drama. Other times, they are tools used to measure the player/gate content; they test a player’s knowledge of the game’s mechanics before letting them move onto a more difficult part of the game.

Neither of those ideals apply to Sinner: Sacrifice for Redemption. Here, players are tasked with dispatching eight bosses. This is, of course, easier said than done. Acting like a Souls game – and by that, I mean it’s a weird fusion of Titan Souls and Dark Souls – each fight is a harrowing experience full of loss.

Thankfully, we’ve taken the lumps and bruises in the process of writing this bosses guide, in the hopes of saving you some time.

Notes Before Fighting Your First Boss

Before getting into the nuts and bolts of each fight, there are a few things to note. One of which being the sacrifice system. Each time you enter an arena to wage war with a foe, you’ll be giving up something important. The total amount of stamina your character has, their armor/defense level, a surplus of potions – the prerequisites for a battle can be harsh.

The second thing to note is the boss order. There isn’t one.

You’re free to choose which boss to tackle, à la Mega Man. Only, there are no clear advantages in your decision on who to take on; defeating a foe won’t reward you with a tool to use on another. It has more to do with your playstyle and personal preference. So, while I’ve placed each boss in a certain order below, there is no need to follow my pattern. My tips and tricks will stay relevant regardless.

Lastly, this is a guide of the first seven bosses. The eighth and final boss is only made available after the others have been defeated. Given the mystery surrounding this particular foe, we’ve decided to hold off on elaborating on this character for now.

Sinner: Sacrifice for Redemption Boss Tips & Tricks

Boss: Greedy Faiz Tilus

Greedy Faiz Tilus is located directly in the center of the stone mound in the nexus. Upon activating his stone, you’ll sacrifice a portion of your health and stamina.

Tilus isn’t a melee-based boss. Though he does occasionally attack with his scythe, he usually resorts to shooting projectiles and summoning enemies from afar.

Your goal is to get in close, making sure to avoid his flaming eyeballs, poison orbs, and gusts of wind. The eyeballs and orbs are easy to dodge, especially if you hide behind the strange stone structures.

The gusts of wind tend to follow you around making them tricky to get away from at first. I found that rolling toward them hinders their effectiveness; they can’t turn around fast enough to catch you once they’ve passed your location.

You can also try parrying the gusts – blocking with your shield right before they hit you – and send them flying back toward Tilus for some big damage.

Adam stands behind phallic rock as tall, bird-like Faiz attacks with green poison orbs

As you get close to Tilus, you’ll want to take a few swipes at him with your sword before backing off a bit. After a few hits, he’ll flap his wings and dive underground, damaging you in the process. He’ll pop up moments later and try to cut you down with his scythe (which can be easily dodged) before retreating to fire off a few eyeballs.

Continue hitting him when you can. Be wary of the poison trail he sometimes leaves behind when hit. The damage will be minimal, but stand in the green goop for too long though and you’ll become fully poisoned, taking damage over time.

When his life goes below the 40% mark, Tilus will jump to the platform in the middle of the arena. After a few seconds, he’ll start coating the battlefield with a poisonous gas. Escape a quick death by hightailing it to the edge of the map.

Be sure to avoid the weird looking plants and exploding frogs – both of which spews poison on contact. When he finishes his gas attack, he’ll become more aggressive, swinging his scythe and shooting eyeballs at a quickening pace. He’ll also summon more exploding frogs.

Avoid all of this by dodging and running and keep hitting him. If you can, toss a few firebombs at him when he starts to conjure his projectiles. It can be a risky move – if you get hit with one eyeball, you’ll typically get hit two or three more times in rapid succession – but worth the damage over time. Using your flaming sword is also a good tactic.

Adam runs as Faiz stands in middle of the arena and summons mobs

If you’re lucky, you’ll kill him before he jumps back onto the center platform. If not, you’ll have to contend with miniature versions of Tilus. They’ll spawn around the platform and chant/cast a spell that’ll cause your poison meter to slowly rise. Dispatch them quickly, using the javelin (it only takes one hit to kill them). Once they’re all dead, return to smacking up Tilus. It won’t be long before he bites the dust.

Boss: Envious Levin Undok

Envious Levin Undok’s portal is positioned two spots to the right of Tilus (past Gluttonous Camber Luce). To fight her, you’ll need to give up some of your supplies; you’ll have fewer health potions, firebombs, ect., for the remainder of the game.

Like Tilus, Levin Undok likes to use projectiles whenever she can. Unlike Tilus, she also utilizes deadly melee attacks. You see, she comes in two versions: a gold and silver persona. The fight starts with the gold version.

The tall Levin Undok, with white hair in bronze dress and holding rapier, sends floating knives at Adam

Fighting Undok in her first state can be tricky. She has multiple projectiles that are tough to dodge. Her ax, for instance, flies back and forth between you and her like a boomerang. Carefully time your rolls to avoid getting hit by the ax, which circles you twice before returning to her.

That’s just the one ax, though. She also summons multiple axes from the ground and flings them at you in intervals, covering a wide distance. She also summons axes to circle her like a shield, widening out further and further with each revolution around her. 

Then there’s her scythe, which will travel in an arc around you after being tossed at your face. Last are her daggers. These projectiles seem to home-in on your location, making them tough to dodge depending on how close you are to Undok.

It is possible to parry, roll past/dodge these attacks. Her sword attacks should always be parried though. They’re easy to read as she tends to “charge upbefore swinging.

That said, it is still a risk/reward situation. Parrying will stun her, allowing you to get in a few free hits. Missing the parry will either cause you to block (lowering your stamina and possibly get knocked backward) or cause you to get hit.

Levin Undok summons orange battle axes that travel in the ground toward Adam

For me, the best strategy was ignoring the projectiles and rushing her. If you can dodge quickly, you can get two hits on her backside before retreating. Your heavy sword works well here if you forgo the shield (depending on your skill, this strategy can work well for both versions). 

After taking enough damage, Undok will remove her head and transform into her silver version (complete with a new life bar).

This one uses lightning attacks as well as her sword. Whenever she rubs her head across her sword, that means she’s about to do a powerful attack and you must act accordingly.

When her whole body electrifies, she will unleash an electric AoE attack. When she lifts her rapier into the air and only electrifies her upper body, she will either: 

  1. Send down a lightning bolt that splits into dozens of smaller bolts that travel along the ground in a circle pattern
  2. Rain down multiple lightning strikes across the arena 

The first attack has no discernable signal as to where the bolt will hit. The second will be signaled by little glowing orbs across the arena.

Undok's alter ego, a silver, tall, hairless woman summons lightning all around her

After a certain amount of time has passed, Undok will change back into the gold version of herself. If you’ve gotten her life low enough, she’ll skip that phase and go right into her final assault which sees both versions appearing at the same time.

This last part of the fight can be overwhelming. You have to contend with every attack plus falling chandeliers

Instead of rushing the gold version her like before, use your javelins to whittle her life down. A few choice hits when she conjures her daggers will stun her, dropping the daggers and negating the attack. Once she dies, then focus on the silver one, this time using the sword and shield combo (for its quick attacks). She should die soon thereafter.

Boss: Lustful Chanel

To enter Lustful Chanel’s domain, touch the second stone mound from the left. Upon doing so, you’ll sacrifice your shield’s durability; it’ll shatter when your defense is broken.

This is a more typical fight.

Chanel is a fast-moving melee fighter who occasionally uses a bow. She’ll lunge at you with her ice daggers. The primary concern here is being frozen: getting hit increases a freeze-meter to rise. Fill it up and you can't move -- and she easily kills you. 

Dodge her spinning daggers and follow up with one or two sword swipes. Keep moving and rolling to the left or right to avoid a few more of these strikes. She will occasionally shoot arrows at you, either from the ground or in the air. Avoid these as they cause big damage and can freeze you.

After taking enough damage, Chanel will back away and quickly fly toward you. Don't attack at this point. It isn’t hard to dodge but because of her quick movements, you might not be able to counterattack like before. At about half health, she will also jump away and be engulfed in a grey liquid which will freeze you if you're inside it. 

Short Lustful Chanel clad in all white runs across the water stage with her white swords pinned back ready to attack

After she taking more damage, she’ll start shooting more and more arrows at you. She also becomes more aggressive with her melee attacks and starts conjuring vines that pop up from under the water.

Her most devastating attack though is an ice arrow barrage; she’ll aim upward, sending a ton of arrows raining down on you.

This move can be tough to dodge – if you don’t move toward or away from Chanel at the right times, you’ll end up running out of stamina before getting a reprieve. The easiest method is to stand still, wait for the first arrows to drop, and then running the opposite direction, either right or left. You'll have just enough stamina to outrun them if you haven't already fought Faiz Tilus

Lustful Chanel shoots an arrow volley at the side-stepping Adam who holds a great sword

Continue attacking like before. I recommend using the long sword to speed things up, making sure not to swing too many times in a row.

Chanel should fall rather quickly; I was able to kill her before she did her barrage during one playthrough. 

It's important to note that when her life gets low, she falls to her knees. Kill her quickly or she will transform into a nightmarish slug beast with a brand-new health bar

The best method to beat this foul creature is to use your heavy sword and charge at him. When you get close, roll to the right or left and attack twice and then retreat

Watch out for the creature's gigantic tongue, which is slams on the ground both in front of itself and in a semi-circle, its munching mouth, which will chew on you, and its jump (forward and back), which will crush you. It will also spew frozen water when you get close, which will freeze you, leaving you easy prey. 

Boss: Wrathful Angronn

Wrathful Angronn’s stone mound is the first one on the left. Choosing to fight him will forfeit your armor and healing rate (it’ll keep you from regenerating health at all).

Angronn is one of the larger bosses you’ll face. Half of his body is submerged under a sea of lava. The parts that are exposed are covered in swords, armor, and a mean disposition. He isn’t that tough of a fight though.

The massive Angronn slams his armor covered fist on the rocky stage surrounded by lava

Angronn has several attacks: 

  • Fist slam
  • Arm rake
  • Punch
  • Sword rain
  • Lava throw
  • Fire minion spawn
  • Fire beam

Angronn will typically slam his fist onto the ground. This comes in two variations: single fist slam (right or left) and double fist slam (right, then left, then both at the same time). He will also rake his hand across the stage; He has a tell for this – he’ll pull back slightly before attacking, covering a smaller distance than his normal attack.

Aside from his ground pound are his angrier attacks. He’ll pull his right arm far back and punch forward, covering a large distance. Timing your dodge (so that you can follow up with an attack) is tricky considering how fast his fist moves. 

Get too far away from him, and he'll reach into the lava to either throw fireballs onto the stage that linger and cause fire DPS or throw fiery minions on the stage. These can only hurt you when they leap at you (you can run through them). Dodge to avoid them. 

He also has a fire beam that he shoots from his mouth. He will lean toward the ground; the initial burst doesn't hurt -- the second blast does, so don't roll into it. 

Finally, Angronn will also lean back, open his arms, roar, and rain swords from the sky. These hurt and stun if they hit you and act as barriers on the stage. You can see where they'll land by looking for the glowing marks on the ground. You can hit them to make them disappear or send them back to Angronn for some small damage. When Angronn pounds the ground, they can fly at you and hit you, so be careful. 

To hurt Angronn, dodge to the left or right of his sweeping hand attacks and pounds and attack his gauntlet hand. He won’t take much damage at first thanks to his armor

Angronn breathes a ray of fire from his mouth that travels across the stage

His last move will commence shortly after he grabs his head in anger. He’ll then slam his fists into the ground, destroying a large part of the battlefield. Obviously, you’ll die if caught in this attack.

It shouldn't take too long to kill Angronn once his armor is destroyed. The trick is to focus on him more so than what’s happening around you. The fireballs and such are an issue, but they pale in comparison to his fists and light beam. Just make sure not to accidentally roll off the side of the stage when trying to avoid one of his attacks.

Boss: Gluttonous Camber Luce

Gluttonous Camber Luce’s stone mound is located right next to Faiz Tilus (to the right of his, to be exact). Fighting him decreases the total number of potions and also lowers your healing rate.

Stay away from Luce. Seriously. His melee attacks can be hard to dodge. Especially when he goes to slam both of his swords on the ground; he’ll quickly reposition himself to catch you rolling away.

He can also bite you using the mouth on his stomach and gnaw on you, knocking off a ton of life. Instead, hit him a few times with your javelins. The goal is to get him to start shooting purple orbs from his stomach-mouth, which seems to only happen after he’s taken a certain amount of damage.

At this point, I recommend saving the rest of your javelins for later (I’ll explain why in a moment) and concentrate on staying out his Luce’s reach. Wait for him to send some orbs your way. After a few volleys, Luce will become tired, prompting you to take a swing at him.

Adam holds a great sword standing on ice as the massive and fat Camber Luce holds two huge swords and comes closer

I recommend using the heavy sword, taking two swings when he grows tired (after the orb attack) before fleeing. 

That said, don’t get complacent. For one, as the fight goes on, large portions of the frozen lake will fall away. This spells trouble; not only can you fall into these holes and die, Luce can use them to launch an airborne attack.

Every so often, he’ll dive into the water via a hole and emerge somewhere before slamming into the ground. His aim is spot on, meaning you’ll have to roll away at the right time or else be crushed underfoot.

Things go from bad to worse once Luce’s life passes the halfway mark. At this point, he’ll start to use strong moves more frequently. One of which is a rolling attack that not only hits hard but can also knock you off the map.

The best bet here is to try and steer him into one of the ice mounds/pillars by positioning it behind you and rolling away at the last minute. This will stun Luce for a decent amount of time, opening him up for an attack.

Camber Luce slams his hug swords on the ground almost striking Adam

His last two abilities are the worst. This is where the javelins come in.

Occasionally, Luce will spin around in a circle before making a beeline toward you. If you hit him twice with the javelin before he starts spinning (signaled by him winding up) you’ll stun him. He doesn’t typically try to do the move again afterward.

His other ability isn’t an attack but is just as powerful. Luce will fake like he’s about to shoot his purple orbs but instead, will open his mouth to reveal a yellow vortex of sorts. It’s at this point that Luce will try to regain his lost health.

By quickly using a javelin, you’ll be able to knock him out of this state before he gets too much life back. Continue to wait for him to get tired or to stun himself before following up with attacks. If you use mostly power attacks from the heavy sword, he shouldn't last too long.

Boss: Slothful Yordo

Slothful Yordo’s stone mound is the farthest to the right. Fighting him will sacrifice your stamina. When your bar runs out (due to your attacks or rolling) you’ll become exhausted and collapse.

At first glance, Yordo appears to be one of the tougher bosses. He is the only one who has minions that stay on the battlefield the entire fight. Not only that, but he and his soldiers all have shields. A frontal attack isn’t possible; they’ll just block your sword swipes. 

Instead of trying to take out his soldiers, keep your focus on Yordo. What you want to do is stay close to him while avoiding their attacks. Wait for Yordo to attack and then parry it.

This will stun him, allowing you to do a stab move; it’ll auto connect if you attack right after the parry. This will plunge your sword into Yordo’s stomach, knocking him to the ground.

Adam stands in a dark stone room while Yordo hides in the middle of his armor-clad minions holding spears.

At this point you’ll either want to follow up with a few attacks or roll away, to avoid an attack from his soldiers.

After a few stabbings, Yordo will start to run away from you. At this point, he’ll raise his spear and all his soldiers will disappear. They’ll then respawn in different places to try and open you up for an attack.

Just keep moving while being mindful of your stamina level. Soon, Yordo will try to attack you again. Parry and stab him. Once his life hits below 40%, he’ll forgo the spear and shield, opting for a longsword instead.

You can still parry his attack and stab him.

The thing is though, he’ll be more aggressive. Also, when he calls for his soldiers to disappear and reappear, they’ll spawn around him. Acting like a living shield, they’ll make it impossible to hit him. He’ll also throw spears at you while huddled inside their circle. No worries. Just toss a javelin at one of them to knock them out of formation.

Finishing him off is easy going forward. I personally just kept hitting him with javelins; with his shield gone, he could no longer block my attacks. A few well-placed shots later and I was off to the next boss.

Boss: Proud Rhodes

To get to Proud Rhodes’ arena, you have to touch the third stone mound from the left. Doing so will sacrifice your attack power.

Rhodes can be tough. His attacks do a considerable amount of damage, he can be fast on his feet, and he’ll eventually summon minions. That said, his moves are mostly predictable.

The towering rhodes, clad in steel armor, slams his pole weapon on the stone ground as Adam dodges

I preferred using the heavy sword to cut down on the number of hits it takes to kill him. The stamina strain can be a bother, though.

You’ll want to dodge his attacks by rolling toward him and to the left (his right) as most of this power comes from his right hand. 

From a distance, Rhodes will shoot energy waves at you. He will either lift his right arm over his head and shoot a verticle energy wave or pull his right arm back and shoot a horizontal energy wave along the ground. Dodge the first by rolling right or left; dodge the second by rolling toward it once it gets close. 

Get underneath him and attack his legs. You'll see he has a few hard-hitting swipes. Some attacks will be straight, while others will be in an arc going toward his left. Roll to his right to avoid them. Be careful of his stomp

Also be careful of his shield bash. He will smash the ground with the bottom of his shield and with the face of his shield. Each has different AoEs, so roll through his legs and toward him to avoid damage. 

After a few attacks, Rhodes will also jump away from you. The shockwave can damage you. 

Finally, Rhodes will also summon energy bolts. This happens when you're close to him. They move slow but follow you around the arena. You can't dodge them if hit by them, so stay away and use the terrain to stop them. 

Rhodes shoots energy waves across the map at Adam

When Rhodes life hits the halfway mark, that’s when the real fight starts. At this point, he’ll kneel to the ground and emit an aura that’ll summon minions.

During this time, it’ll be too dangerous to attack up close. Instead, throw javelins at him until he stands back up.

Once back on his feet, make sure to stay close to him. If not, he’ll constantly throw energy waves at you. If you can, put the minions between you and the waves to kill them. 

He’ll also slam the ground with his shield before charging directly at you.  Roll at the last minute, turn, and get in some quick hits before retreating. 

Lastly, he’ll lean back and slam his sword onto the ground, sending shockwaves across the arena. Roll to avoid them. 

Keep whittling away at his legs, and he'll eventually fall. 

Rhodes, with his shield up, charges toward Adam as a medieval looking minion readies to attack

And that's how you beat the first seven bosses in Sinner: Sacrifice for Redemption. As noted at the beginning of this guide, you don't have to beat each boss in this order, and there are other strategies for beating these bosses depending on skill. 

However, almost all of these tactics will work for each boss, even if you choose to dodge instead of parry, for example. 

Stay tuned for more Sinner: Sacrifice for Redemption coverage. And if you haven’t already, be sure to check out our review of the game.

Call Of Duty Black Ops 4 Guide: Fixing Fatal Error Code 897625509 Mon, 15 Oct 2018 15:56:27 -0400 Ty Arthur

The latest iteration in the yearly CoD franchise decided to switch things up on the server side and go through Blizzard's service in this multiplayer-only rendition of the series.

Despite using an established service known for stable multiplayer matchmaking, Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 has experienced a host of connection issues for players over launch weekend. 

Are you unable to connect to a multiplayer, zombies, or Blackout lobby due to the Black Ops 4 Error Code 897625509? We've got you covered with a few simple fixes for getting back in the action.

Fixing Error Code 897625509

Scan And Repair Files

The very first thing you want to do is update to the latest version. An avalanche of patches and hot fixes have arrived since the game launched, so hit that update button first and make sure you're up to date.

If you still get the Fatal Error Code 897625509 message following the update, click the Options button in the launcher for Black Ops 4. From there, scroll down and select Scan And Repair.

Follow the prompts to make sure you've got the correct versions of all data and don't have any corrupted files (this is essentially the version of verifying file integrity like you'd do when troubleshooting a Steam game).

For the vast majority of users, scanning and repairing will immediately fix the problem. A handful of users may have a different issue causing the problem instead.

Update GeForce Drivers

If you still can't get into a lobby after performing the repair process, open the NVIDIA GeForce Experience control panel (just type GeForce into the search bar if you don't have it pinned to the task bar).

NVIDIA just released a game-ready driver patch specifically for Black Ops 4. If you don't have this newest version, the out of date drivers may be your culprit.

Navigate to the Drivers tab and click Download, then follow the prompts to fix the issue.

A small minority of users have to completely uninstall and reinstall the GeForce Experience control panel instead. If you want to try this step, you can download the latest version of the installation file over here.

This fix can also resolve Black Ops 4 Error Codes 546354288 and 1975752514, so give this step a shot if you got something other than the main Fatal Error code.

Turn Off Razer Software

After updating the GeForce drivers, there's one final issue to check that's causing problems for a small subsection of players.

Are you using a Razer laptop or Razer peripheral, like a high end gaming mouse? It turns out Razer's software is causing conflicts with Call Of Duty: Black Ops 4 in a small handful of cases.

Open up the Task Manager by hitting Ctrl+Alt+Delete and then clicking the Task Manager link at the bottom of the list.

Click the Name button to arrange all processes alphabetically, then manually shut down any process with Razer in the name.

Note that while this software is turned off, you won't be able to use different mouse or display profiles, so you may want to hook up different peripherals until the issue is resolved.


That's all you need to know to resolve the Fatal Error Code 897625509 issue plaguing PC players right now. Let us know when you get the game running again, and be sure to leave a note if none of these fixes worked for you so we can find another solution!

When you're back into the game and ready to frag your friends, be sure to check out our other Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 guides here:

MapleStory 2 OX Quiz Answer Cheat Sheet Mon, 15 Oct 2018 13:24:48 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Each of MapleStory 2's minigames has its own set of challenges to deal with, but none are as utterly baffling as OX Quiz.

The OX Quiz returns from the original MapleStory and its questions are just as varied and obtuse in the sequel. It has questions about games, movies, classical music, sporting events, South Korea, and MapleStory 2 itself.

Despite the huge range of questions, it's really not all that frustrating. It's hard to get mad when there are no consequences and you get to watch others fail, too.

Many of the questions you'll run into for the OX Quiz are plainly localized questions on very specific South Korean topics, such as the island known for squid or the country's dialing code. It even has a question about Princess Maker 4, a Japanese raising sim game that never released in North America but sold wildly in South Korea. I love that game, but the question even being in the English version is confusing.

How to use the cheat sheet

You don't have a lot of time to answer OX Quiz questions, so I've laid out the answers in a more convenient manner.

True questions are on the left, while false questions are on the right and are bolded. This means you can search for a term, see whether it's bolded or not, and answer quickly in-game.

I recommend having this cheat sheet up in a separate window or on your phone. Once you get a question, search for the most important noun in the question here in this sheet. Just scrolling through is too slow, especially considering the number of answers.

Some of the questions are not phrased exactly as they are in-game, especially in the first few dozen. I'll get these ironed out over time, but for now there are two different ways to search through the cheat sheet:

  1. Search for the primary noun - This can be fine to do, but be aware some topics are featured in multiple questions and some questions are exact opposites.
  2. Search for the start of a question - This will usually lead you to the right answer, but some of the first couple dozen or so questions are not all worded exactly right; this is being ironed out as the sheet is updated.

More OX Quiz answers will be added as I do more quizzes! I've been doing the quiz every time it comes up for several days but there seem to be hundreds of questions -- these answers only scratch the surface, but don't worry: I'll definitely be adding more, as I myself would like an easy OX cheat sheet as well.

Last updated: Sun., Oct. 21 (5:00PM EDT)

True False
Harry Potter went to the magic school Hogwarts The lion is a herbivore
Romanesque architecture is an architectural style characterized by horizontal lines and Roman architecture types Beauty Street's BGM has 120 BPM
Buzz Lightyear is a character from Toy Story Snails have 2 genders
Tear concentrations show whether someone is sad or full of joy The Maori people stick out their tongues to meet strangers
Greenpeace is an environmental organization Caused by algal blooms, red ocean refers to a phenomenon during which overt population of algae discolors coastal waters
According to ABO blood group system, type-A mother and type-B father can bear a type-O offspring Mario's pet dinosaur is named Bowser
Greece won the Trojan War Captain Jack Sparrow is played by Robert Downey Jr.
 Superman's alter ego is Clark Kent  Co2 is lighter than O2
Spinach came to be known as the king of iron thanks to a chemist's blunder  Dry ice is hotter than regular ice
Metal balls, if heated, expand in volume A prosecutor can issue an arrest warrant
TCP/IP is a protocol related to the internet Eating dark chocolate is health for dogs
Renaissance means "revival and rebirth of the classical art and intellect" South Korea's country dialing code is 81
A perfect game of baseball is when the opposing team runs no bases "Madama Fly" is by Puccini
Go (weiqi) is an official event of the 2010 Asian Games in Guangzhou Violin is composed of four notes: C (Do), G (Sol(, D (Re), and A (La)
Captain Moc holds a cannon with one hand  Nelph has a total of 3 documents stuck in his waistband
Frankenette can be found in the Neuron DNA Basement Known for its local squids, Ulleung-do is an island in Korea and is part of Gyongsangnam-do district
Metal Balls, if heated, expand in volume In volleyball, the position specialized in defensive plays is called the sweeper
Cats dream when they sleep Japan won the second spot in World Baseball
The Priest can use a skill to restore the spirit of their allies Items cannot be hidden from display
Mountain berries belong to the rose family Christmas is the day of Jesus' marriage
Spinach retains its color when cooked in an open pot The Molten Knight appears in Fort Macaroon
"The ugly Ducking" is a story included in Andersen's fairy tales The War of the Roses were a series of wars fought in France for control of the throne
Cellphones can explode Princess Maker 4 is an online game
In Thailand, soldiers are drafted using the luck of the draw Caricature exaggerates a remarkable trait of a person
Tigers, kings of predators, also eat fruit Ppang is the Korean word for bread and (something about it being a loanword)
A cracking sound occurs when bubbles inside the cavitation of the joint pop In Maplestory 2 you can mail Mesos to a friend
Pressing X while riding a Plucky Ducky makes it sing The Capital of Switzerland is Zurich
Baseball was dropped from the Olympics after the 2008 Beijing Olympics Summer solstice refers to the day when daytime and nighttime are equal in length
"Erlkonig" is a poem by Wolfgang Goethe The strongest enemy in the Cusp of Life is Einos
Lame duck refers to the diminishing power of an elected official who is reaching the end of their term Monkeys have the second highest IQ next to humans
There is a utility pole that can be uprooted and swung around Devlin Warriors appear on South Royal Road
There's a pair of binoculars on Skyreach Pass "War and Peace" is Fyodor Dostoyevsky's work
In the west, the West End along with New York's Broadway is known for top-notch theater Of the five oceans, the largest is the Atlantic Ocean
Toothpaste kills cockroaches You can use pictures of your face to create UGC items
Toh and Googoo are field boss monsters of Whistler Cliffs A squid has 9 tentacles
Spider-man is related to spiders Computers only have two input devices
Thanos is a major villain in the Avengers The Lost Vayar Guardian is a Divine monster
Rice, when cooked at high altitude, tends to get half-cooked because water boils at a lower temperature in higher altitudes The lunar calendar was first developed in Egypt
X-rays can penetrate muscles and tissues, but not bones and metals The Persistence of Memory is a painting of Rene Magritte
 4 + 6 x 2 = 16  3 + 5 x 18 = 144
A person with Type-O blood can donate to someone with Type-A blood 194 nations participated in the 2008 Beijing Olympics
The xylophone is a percussion instrument Too much vitamin C causes skurvy
The name of the tribe concerned about the princess abducted from Cherry Blossom Hill is Boroboro  The Prism Falls are 12 meters tall
Jekyll & Hide is a musical whose plot is set in London CTRL + G is the default hotkey to copy text
Moses Mendelssohn worked as a painter  Jean Sibelius is a Russian composer
Just like humans, monkeys have blood types Australopithecus's scientific name is Austriapithecus afarensis
Heath Ledger played the role of Joker in the movie The Dark Knight The Australian Open, of the international tennis tournaments, has the longest history
Uruguay was the first country to host and win the FIFA World Cup  Sunflowers do not have pollen
MK 53 Alpha appears ate Neuron DNA Research Site The Hollywood movie "Godzilla" is the original film
Claude Debussy is a composer from Paris, France Claude Money painted "The Luncheon on the Grass"
The default hotkey to maximize the Minimap is the Tab key "Die Forelle" is a work of Mozart
There is a broadcasting station in MapleStory 2 Niccolo Panganini is a famous cell virtuoso
The United Kingdom and the Qing Dynasty agreed on the Treaty of Nanjing right after the Opium wars The three primary colors are red, green, and white
In India's caste system, Kshatriya is the warrior class The United Kingdom is a fully independent sovereign state made up of the 3 countries in Great Britain (England, Scotland, Wales) plus Ireland
According to ABO blood group system, type-O mother and type-AB father can bear a type-B offspring Sonic bomb refers to the phenomenon that occurs when a flying object exceeds the speed of sound
Francisco Goya was a Spanish court painter Pyramids can only be found in Egypt
Low-calorie ramen exists Twingos swing shovels
 C-3PO is fluent in over six million forms of communication A VISA is a conditional sanction placed by a country on a foreigner, banning them from entering
In 1948, at the third United Nations General Assembly, the "Universal Declaration of Human Rights" was chosen as the human rights declaration The name of the city where Empress Ereve resides is Travia
 The part of a potato most commonly eaten is its stem. Jabulani was the official ball for the 2014 Olympics
A soprano's vocal range is high, while an alto's vocal range is low Dogs have 6 legs
A polar bear's skin color is black Tango is a French dance
In space, a feather and a cannon ball have the same weight Alikar Prison's male uniforms can be washed once a year
Strawberries belong to the rose family "Thumbelina" isn't a story by Hans Christian Andersen
 Antonin Dvorak, the composer of "New World Symphony," is from the Czech Republic A typical symphony includes piano
Rabindranath Tagore is the first Asian person to win a Nobel Prize According to Romance of the Three Kingdoms, Guan Yu, Zhang Fei, and Liu Bei made their pact under a mulberry tree
Rue is a currency obtainable from Daily quests Hans Christian Andersen was a prominent French entomologist who wrote Souvenirs Entomologiques
Zeus, the supreme god in Greek and Roman mythology, is a womanizer Frederic Chopin had participated in the International Chopin Piano Competition, a competition that is held in Warsaw, Poland
In music, a repeat sign indicates a section should be repeated Lack of calcium causes anemia
The name of the merchant that sells items for Valor Tokens is Beautiful Arc There's a torch in Rose Castle that can be picked up and swung
A carrot's root is the part of a carrot popularly consumed Elizabeth I of England was a married woman
Spain win the 2010 World Cup in South Africa The word "audition," in broadcasting, refers to the third parties' tipping of sensitive information, under the agreement of confidentiality
Jeremy Bentham is the philosopher who suggested utilitarianism, which upholds maximization of overall happiness as value The first country to ever win a World Cup was Brazil
In music, the cadenza is a tricky solo part of a classical music piece that is usually improvised  The "Divine Comedy" is a trilogy. The three books are "Hell," Purgatory," and "Paradise."
Emperor Napoleon I ordered the construction of the Triumphal Arch Light travels 1km/sec in vacuum
Nigeria's capital is Abuja David Livingston set out to Africa to provide medical services
There are 5 black piano keys in each octave Zebras have black lines on white fur
Gregor Mendel, in his 1866 paper on pea plant experimentation, discovered the dominance and recessivity in genes In the United States, soldiers are drafted using luck of the draw
The griffins can be found in Horus's Nest The superstring theory describes how the universe expanded from a single point
 Fidelio is the only opera Beethoven ever composed Gustav Klimt, an Austrian painter, was born in 1863
The practice of enclosure, a cause of the industrial revolution, was an economic trend. Wealthy farmers brought land from small farmers to realize economies of scale The name of the buff awarded to the winners of the mini-game events is Ereve's Happiness
Separation of Powers is a recent political concept that prevents one group from gaining excessive power and promotes civil rights and freedom Black is a color that reflects sunlight well
A mandarin fish eats fish its size Prince, a famous American musician, is regarded as the "King of Pop"
Before playing a piece, orchestras use the obo's sound to tune their instruments Petroleum us made from the energy that was stored in giant ancient planets
"Macbeth" is an opera written by Giuseppe Verdi Milk Road is the road that connects the ancient civilizations of the East and the West
"Gujiga" whose lyrics contain "Turtle, turtle push our your head" is a shamanic song A4 paper is bigger than A3
Arabesque means "Arabic" and is used as the title for the compositions with fanciful ornamentation of the melody The caste system is a judicial system in in India
Chickens can be left-footed or right-footed The experts rated the cucumber as the healthiest food in the 21st century
24 x 4 = 96 Moses Mendelssohn worked as a cartoonist as well
The title creature in the movie Jaws is a shark Penguin's teeth grow up to 5 mm
IC is shorthand for Integrated Circuit There are no speed limits for airplanes
 Mosquito bites itch because of the mosquito's saliva The Elite monster appearing in Torhara Spring is Dark Girant
Violin was first invented in the 16th century Antonio Salieri and Wolfgang Mozart are not contemporaries
In Greek and Roman mythology, Zeus wedded Hara A guitar is a percussion instrument
Stone is lighter to lift underwater than out in the air Dietary fiber is the primary nutrition meat, eggs, fish, and beans provide
The term bluebird syndrome refers to a state in which a person puts the yearning for an ideal world over happiness in reality Urpanda in Rainbow Mountain carries pine trees on its shoulders
A wart is a group of skin cells that have grown rapidly due to human papillomavirius (HPV) infection The IDC is an organization that decides where to hold the Olympics
Antonio Salieri and Wolfgang Mozart are contemporaries Guatemala City is not the capital of Guatemala
Mambrina in Katramus steals HP from her targets Dry ice is hotter than regular ice
The name of the Elite monster quatting in a Stranger's House is Mushmom The leader of the Barrota Trading Company is Solvay
Emperor Napoleon I ordered the construction of the Triumphal Arch A squid has 9 tentacles
The Weimar Constitution is the first constitution to state fundamental human rights In a modern set of golf clubs, the number 1 wood is called a spoon
42 x 2 = 84 Fish breathe through their mouths
A shrimp's heart is at the tip of its head Horticulture refers to the farming of crops such as cabbage and bracken in a high-altitude environment
Christopher Nolan is the director of the 2008 film The Dark Knight Crabs have 8 legs
Luwak coffee is made out of a cat's feces The Palace of Versailles is a prime example of Rococo Style architecture
Michael Jordan is usually associated with basketball Drama refers to films or shows that are meant to document phenomena
Items stored with Goldus Bank are shared among your characters on the same account Gaboshi heels are shoes with a wedge-shaped sole
Benelux refers to the three neighboring monarchies: Belgium, the Netherlands, and Luxembourg The portrait of Queen Elizabeth in British currency is still young and beautiful
Madonette appears in Flora Avenue Dark Wind HQ is located in Henesys
The word "Eskimo," which refers to a member of an indigenous people inhabiting norther Alaska, means "eater of raw meat." Marathon is the name of the runner who won an endurance running in ancient Olympics
  Taliskar was built before Kerning City
  South Royal Road only spawns monsters at Level 9 and below
  The language most used in terms of population is English
  The Transparency Badge makes your weapon invisible
  Mozart didn't compose a single opera
  Shih Tzu is a Korean dog breed
  The Statue of Liberty holds a torch in her left hand and the Declaration of Independence in her right
  Mechanical is one of the three forms of power as described in Alvin Toffler's Powershift
  The creature featured in the movie Jaws is a rabbit
  In "The Lion King," Simba's uncle is the older brother named Mufasa
  Spain's capital is Madrid, and Canada's capital is Toronto
  Decibel is a unit to measure the intensity of pollution
  You can create UGC items that look just like the costumes of your favorite animated characters


This is certainly not the end for this cheat sheet! More questions and their answers will be logged as I keep getting tossed into rounds. It's just one of the many small things that make MapleStory 2 so fun.

Green Hell Shelter Building Guide Mon, 15 Oct 2018 09:58:00 -0400 Sergey_3847

Finding or building a shelter in Green Hell is an essential part of your survival gameplan. A shelter is a place where you can not only take a rest and protect yourself from the wild animals, but also save your game and continue safely onto the next day.

The first big update for Green Hell is now live in version 0.2.0, which adds a number of new animals and plants to the game, and a brand new type of shelter -- the modular shelter.

If you want to know how to build a shelter in Green Hell, including the modular one, and find the best possible locations for it, then follow our guide below for all the info you need.

How to Build a Shelter in Green Hell

Currently, you can build four types of shelters in the game: small, medium, hut, and modular. The first three are designed to sustain you during the early parts of the game, when you have only a few resources so you could build something quickly, rest and save your gameplay.

The modular shelter offers something much greater than that and it gives you a chance to build a shelter as large as you want in case you have enough building materials and a large enough area.

Small Shelter

One of the simplest types of shelter you can build in Green Hell is a small shelter that looks like a shed. It can protect you from rain, but you will sleep on the ground, which makes you vulnerable to worms.

Here is the crafting recipe for a small shelter:

  • 2x log
  • 6x long stick
  • 9x rope
  • 26x palm leaf
Medium Shelter

It is better to build a medium shelter, but you will need more materials for it. Just like the small shelter it will provide a roof over your head, but instead of lying on the ground you will now sleep on a bed made of sticks, which is a much safer way to spend your nights.

Here is the crafting recipe for a medium shelter:

  • 24x long stick
  • 10x rope
  • 59x palm leaf
Hut Shelter

The hut shelter is very similar to a small shelter in terms of conditions, but it can be built using less materials. So if for some reason you can't find enough palm leafs or lianas for your small or medium shelter, then consider building a hut shelter instead.

Here is the crafting recipe for a hut shelter:

  • 8x stick
  • 3x long stick
  • 1x rope
  • 13x palm leaf
Modular Shelter

Modular shelter consists of four parts: frame, wall, shed, and roof. Each part is crafted separately, and then combined in any way you see fit. The only limit is your imagination and the number of crafting materials in your backpack.

Modular shelter will let you not only keep yourself away from getting wet under the rain but also your campfire, which can be crafted inside your shelter. Also, you can store food in the sheds or any other items you wish.

Here are the crafting recipes for all the parts required for modular shelter:

  • Frame
    • 6x log
    • 5x long stick
    • 4x rope
  • Wall
    • 9x long stick
  • Shed
    • 2x log
    • 5x long stick
    • 5x rope
  • Roof
    • 16x palm leaf

Best Locations for Shelter in Green Hell

You don't have to build a shelter in order to spend the night, instead you can find an abandoned camp or a bed that are scattered all over the map. But you will probably need one in case you want to store food, weapons and building materials somewhere safe.

Safe-to-Live Spots

Here are the coordinates to the locations where you can find safe-to-live abandoned camps and beds:

  • 52W 17S
  • 51W 19S
  • 40W 24S
  • 46W 26S
  • 50W 27S
Avoid These Spots

You can also stumble upon tribal villages that are guarded by the natives. These camps are not safe, so try to avoid them. Here are their coordinates:

  • 47W 17S
  • 38W 18S
Safe-to-Build Spots

In case you're looking for a safe place to build your own modular shelter, then you should be looking for a place which is well-protected by the surrounding hills and has all the resources for food and building.

Here are the coordinates that fit this description the best:

  • 44W 24S
  • 46W 29S
  • 52W 28S
  • 50W 23S

All three of these locations are located relatively far away from the hostile natives, and the last one even has an oasis with everything you need. You can safely build you base there and further develop your survival skills in Green Hell.


You can now easily find a great location for your shelter and build any type of base you like. For other related Green Hell guides at GameSkinny, take a look at the links below:

How to Get Specialist Outfits in Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 Sat, 13 Oct 2018 09:57:09 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Like most multiplayer games these days, Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 knows that winning is as much about flair as it is skill. And if you want to stand out at the end of every match, not only do want to get the best play, you also want to have the best outfit/skin. 

As of right now, there's no in-game shop to buy outfits or skins for your Specialists. While there are bonus Black Ops skins for those who bought the Deluxe Edition and higher, there's only actually one "unique" outfit in the game: the bonus Day of the Dead skin.

If you're wondering how to equip the Dia De Los Muertes outfit in Black Ops 4, it's actually a pretty easy process -- even if it is a little unclear. 

How to Equip Skins and Outfits in Black Ops 4

First things first: Every outfit except the Dia De Los Muertes skin is easily selectable and doesn't require you follow any special steps to equip (these include pre-order skins and Black Ops skins). 

Second things second: The Day of the Dead costume can only be equipped to one Specialist. There is no way -- whatsoever -- to change your choice after you've finalized your selection. 

Once you hit Level 7 in multiplayer, you'll be able to personalize your Specialists. This is also when you'll unlock your promotional offers and all skins and outfits, including the Dia De Los Muertes outfit and the Black Ops skins. 

For the Day of the Dead equip, YouTuber PaRaDoX AgonY has a quick video showing you how to actually apply the costume to your selected Specialist. Here are the quick and easy steps: 

  1. Redeem offer when the prompt pops up
  2. Select your Specialist
  3. Select "Progress and Unlocks" from the Barracks tab
  4. Select your Specialist from the list
  5. Select Outfits
  6. Select the Day of the Dead skin

You can also follow steps 3-5 to select your Black Ops skins and warpaints.

What Happens If I Hit "Back" Before Selecting My Specialist? 

If you accidentally hit "Back" before choosing which Specialist you want the Day of the Dead skin applied to, you should be able to follow steps 3-5 above and get prompted again. However, as some players have pointed out, that is not always the case. 

In the case you cannot find the skin, several forum posters on Reddit and the game's official forum have suggested the following:

  1. Reset the game (or console if that doesn't work)
  2. Play several matches in a row

Neither are definitive fixes, but both seem to have worked enough to at least try. If you still can't redeem the costume after trying everything above, contact Activision Support for help. 

And that's all you need to know about getting specialist outfits in Call of Duty: Black Ops 4. Well, that is until microtransactions inevitably hit the game and an in-game shop opens up. 

Call Of Duty Blackout: Essential Battle Royale Tips (Plus Best Perks and Equipment) Fri, 12 Oct 2018 18:25:43 -0400 Ty Arthur

At this point, pretty much everyone has played a battle royale game -- especially if you're reading this. But one thing's for sure: you haven't played it the Call Of Duty way until you've tried out Blackout mode Black Ops 4.

While the basic battle royale gameplay elements remain the same, there are some key differences you need to know ahead of time -- like how to avoid zombies and properly utilize Perks.

Here's what you need to know before jumping into the biggest mode in Black Ops 4

Blackout Survival Tip #1: Pick a Better Landing Spot 

Blackout's convoy travels a random direction each time you start a new match, and the circle shrinks in a random direction, too. That means you need to quickly find the best landing spots and have several of them in your back pocket if things don't go as planned. 

You can view the convoy path before the match starts by pulling up the map while you are in the lobby waiting area. Furthermore, the map lets you zoom in to see specific landscape features, which is critical to finding the right location.

In general, avoid the big named areas when landing, especially early in the convoy's flight path, as that's where everyone else is going.

Instead, look for clusters of buildings slightly away from the convoy path that aren't next to main roads. If they have clear sight lines on elevated terrain, even better.

Don't discount the dense forest area in the upper center section of the Blackout map. A helicopter spawns on a tarp there. You'll also have plenty of room to hide and snipe while waiting for other players who are sprinting to avoid the closing circle.

We've got a full run down of the five best specific spots to land right here. Those locations are guaranteed to be filled with loot and feature sneaky places to hide and snipe without being seen.

Blackout Survival Tip #2: Look For Broken Windows, Not Open Doors

It's currently standard battle royale practice to play mind games with your opponents. Closing doors so other players don't know an area has already been looted is one of the better ways to do that. 

In Blackout, however, jumping through a window automatically breaks that window. Most of the time, players have to break through windows to make a quick escape. 

In other words: don't look at doorways to determine if a building has been looted or not. Look at windows instead

Blackout Survival Tip #3: Change Your Loadout For the Situation

Except for in the very beginning of a match, you are going to be flush with weapons pretty quickly. To stay alive, switch your equipment, attachments, and perks based on the terrain.

Specifically, switch to a shotgun when you are clearing an interior location for loot, such as a house or factory. Spraying and praying with an assault rifle isn't as effective here as a wide range shotgun blast with high damage at short range.

When you head up to the building's roof or go back into the open, switch to a weapon with a higher rate of fire (and preferably a scope as well). In the open, you want to be able to zoom in and pop off quicker shots at longer range.

Blackout Survival Tip #4: Avoid The Zombies... Most Of The Time (Because Ray Guns)

In most cases, tangling with Blackout's randomly spawning zombies just isn't worth the effort. All it will do is draw attention to your location due to the sound of your gunfire.

There is one very clear exception to this rule, however. A horde of zombies protects a special wooden box that can randomly spawn once during a match.

The box location is marked by a blue pillar of light and is most often found in the graveyard near the Asylum, but it can spawn on any of the five red circled locations on the map above.

The area around the box will be swarming with zombies, but if you fight your way through, you get a random item from the box that is usually Level 3 armor or a high power weapon.

If you keep killing zombies after opening the box, they have a small chance to randomly drop the special ray gun! This is a big gamble, since everyone will know where you are, but getting the ray gun can be worth it.

The Best Blackout Perks + Equipment

In Blackout mode, Perks are random just like weapons, ammo, and equipment. Perks have to be equipped in the inventory screen and offer bonuses for a set amount of time.

While everyone has their favorites, some Perks stand head and shoulders above the rest for their usefulness or versatility. In particular, we recommend making use of these Blackout Perks:

  • Skulker: This Perk lets you move at full speed while crouched, or only slightly reduced speed while prone. Use this to stay hidden in tall grass near the edge of the shrinking circle so you can snipe enemies sprinting to safety, then quietly stay low and move to a new location. 

  • Stimulant: This Perk raises your maximum health by 100. Load yourself up with health packs and use your extra capacity to draw enemies out into a firefight you are more equipped to win.

  • Paranoia: This Perk lets you hear a tone whenever another player is aiming at you. For those with fast reflexes who like to hang out in the open, this may be the best Perk in the game.

  • Iron Lungs: This Perk lets you hold your breath longer while swimming or while sniping. If the circle is shrinking near the river areas, this is a fantastic way to hide out of sight and then pop up and kill sprinting enemies who don't even know you are there.

Besides the limited-time Perks, there are a host of items to pick up that spawn randomly across the map and can offer you an edge in combat.

Like with Perks, nearly any of them can be useful in specific situations, but these are the items we recommend using most often if you can find them:

  • Sensor Dart: Easily the most useful item in the game, this thrown object reveals enemies in a short radius on the map. If you've got these, always throw them into large buildings before heading inside. This completely removes the advantage of anyone lying in wait to snipe you.

  • Smoke Screen: When you aren't sure where the enemy is, or you think one is potentially waiting to snipe as you break into the open, this thrown grenade item is perfect. It will either protect you from fire or flush the enemy out into the open.

  • Combat Axe: This item doesn't change your melee attack, but rather is thrown like a grenade. If you practice your aim, this can be a silent one-hit kill in close quarters.

  • Mesh Mine: If you are a patient player, these are awesome to set at the base of staircase or near doors leading into rooms filled with loot. Lie in wait, prone in the corner, and open fire when an opponent trips the mine.

Finally, there's one piece of equipment everyone has that they forget about -- you don't ever actually lose the wingsuit after your initial landing.

Why does that matter? If you jump from a sufficiently high location (like the buildings at Construction Site), you can re-deploy the wingsuit by holding down the jump button and quickly glide long distances.

This is also great for escaping when you when you're cornered on a precipice or tall building. 


Those are all the basics you need to know to survive a match of Call Of Duty: Black Ops 4 Blackout mode. Have any other tips we should try out to get to that #1 spot?

Leave your best Blackout strategy in the comments below, and stay tuned for a full guide on every Blackout weapon (and which are the best to use) coming soon.

Call Of Duty Blackout: Best Landing Spots In Black Ops 4 Battle Royale Fri, 12 Oct 2018 17:11:21 -0400 Ty Arthur

Moving away entirely from the single player experience, the main attraction of Black Ops 4 is Treyarch's take on the battle royale genre: Blackout mode.

As with Fortnite, PUBG, Realm Royale, and so on, the location you pick for your initial landing will radically change how the match plays out for you.

We've rounded up the five best spots to land so far as the player base gets used to this mashup map featuring fan-favorite locations from across the Call Of Duty universe.

Best Black Ops 4 Blackout Landing Spots

For this battle royale iteration, keep in mind that the storm shrinks in a randomized direction each match. That means you want a wide array of possible landing points picked out ahead of time.

When you're loading up in the lobby (where everyone is running around punching each other for no reason), pull up the map and take a look at where the convoy is headed.

You want to know the layout and pick your drop spot ahead of time so you can dominate if anyone else landed at the same location.

Landing Spot #1: Southwest Of Construction Site

One of the very best spots to always check first in Blackout is in the forest southwest of Construction Site, south of Estates, and west of Train Station.

Why go here? A helicopter randomly spawns on the blue tarp in the clearing! If the initial drop path takes you anywhere near this area, make sure to check and see if the chopper is there.

If it didn't spawn, head slightly to the northwest to the top red circle in the image above (assuming the circle isn't shrinking in the other direction) to check a small area with four storage sheds usually filled with weapons.

Landing Spot #2: North And Northwest Of Fracking Tower

When the convoy is traveling horizontally across the map, heading for the big, obvious areas like Fracking Town or Cargo Docks is usually a quick way to get fragged.

Instead, focus on the loot-rich areas very close to those areas. If you bail just north of Fracking Tower, keep an eye out to see where everyone else is landing. Based on their positions, pick one of the three red circles above.

Each of those locations has plenty of weapons and equipment to easily pick up, and they won't be swarming with enemies. Once you gear up, hang out on the rooftops or near the windows and wait for injured enemies to limp out north of Fracking Tower (or south from Firing Range) for a quick kill.

Landing Spot #3: Southeast Of Fracking Tower

This is a great low traffic area if you can manage to land here based on the position of the convoy and the shrinking circle.

At the edge of the area are two houses on either side of the road filled with loot. From the back of the second house, you have a very clear line of sight to the bridge, the river, and across toward Factory and Turbine. 

If you picked up a sniping weapon, this is a prime place to get some early kills as players scramble to catch up with the shrinking circle.

In the event this spot is already taken or the circle is going the other way, try drop a bit to the north in the forest. There's an awesome campsite there where supply drops frequently land next to some tables and a shed.

Landing Spot #4: North Of River Town

If you land at the north end of Rivertown island, there are plenty of lone buildings to loot that won't have as much traffic as the town itself.

That's not the best part of this landing site, though. The best part is then hoofing it east so you can jump up above the train track exit and hang out on the cement overhang.

Players absolutely love to come roaring out of that tunnel on trucks and four wheelers. If you go to the far side of the overhang and crouch in the corner, they won't even be able to see you as you snipe them from above or throw grenades at their vehicles.

Landing Spot #5: South Of Asylum

South of Asylum and east of Rivertown is a small cluster of houses right off the road. When the circle is either shrinking southwest into the corner or east toward Asylum, this is a fabulous place to hang out. 

Not only are the houses rich in loot, but the far corner house has a huge hole in the roof. If you jump out onto the roof and go prone, you have very clear sight lines in all directions for sniping. 

In the event someone realizes where you are, just hop back down into the hole to avoid taking any fire.

These are our five favorite Blackout landing spots so far on launch day. What did you think of our picks, and what's your best Call of Duty Black Ops 4 landing location? Sound off in the comments below!

The Complete Fortnite Season 6 Skins List Fri, 12 Oct 2018 14:31:34 -0400 Victoria B.


If you like Halloween as much as we do, then we bet you're hyped for Fortnite Season 6 and the Darkness Rises theme. The array of available skins is terrifyingly good this time around.


Battle Passes are available now until December 5 (before Season 7), which may have a winter theme if Epic decides to follow in the footsteps of this season and last winter's Survive the Holidays event.


In order -- and to nab your favorite Season 6 skins they're gone -- be sure to work with friends to accomplish challenges, gain experience points, and climb tiers. Check out our ridiculously large list of Fortnite guides here




Skin: Hallow Head


The final Season 6 skin (for now), and arguably the most impressive, is a flaming pumpkin head.


Hallow Head is an intimidating character with a large hallow pumpkin head with bright teal flames igniting from his eyes and mouth. The cloak has a tattered hem and his belt and collar are adorned with rotting pumpkin leaves. 


Along with Jack Gourdon, these two pumpkin heads are some of the best of the season, and a must-have for this Halloween.


Skin: Jack Gourdon


This skin was another to leak with the 6.02 update, and, honestly, we are so excited for it. Just look at it.


This skin is a Legendary, so it will be around $15 as well, similar to the skins in the Grim Medicine Set and the Skull Set.


This hilarious skin features a man in a black, pumpkin covered suit and a carved pumpkin head. His completely unimpressed facial expression is perfect for frustrating your opponents and is ridiculous when paired with extravagant emotes and dances like Orange Justice, Llama Bell, and Floss.


Skin: Bullseye


Bullseye was one of the Season 6 skins leaked for the 6.02 patch.


It's an Uncommon skin and won't be too pricey to purchase. It includes gloves, an unfastened military helmet with goggles, and a tank with a bullseye plastered at the center of the chest.


If you purchase this skin, don't let your opponents hit that target and humiliate them with your own sharp-shooter skills.


Skin: Scourge


Scourge came to the item shop alongside the Plague skin. Both are a part of the Grim Medicine set and resemble plague doctors from the 14th century.


Both are 1,500 V-Bucks($15) in the item shop.


This ominous skin includes a hooded cloak, popular crow-like plague mask, glowing green eyes, and gloves. The character is definitely one of the best to enter the shop lately, perfect for Halloween and the Darkness Rises theme. 


Skin: Plague


This is one of the most recent skins in the item shop; it's a part of the Grim Medicine set and is a little more expensive than the skull set. However, it is definitely one of the coolest, eeriest Fortnite skins out there.


The plague doctor character is 1,500 V-Bucks. His mask has a crow-like beak -- reminiscent of medieval plague doctors -- and his eyes glow green. He also wears an apron and has medicine vials on his belt.


This one appears to be limited, so you'll want to grab this one before its gone from the shop.


Skin: Skull Ranger


Skull Ranger is also now available in the shop.


She costs the same as her male counterpart at 1,200 V-Bucks (a little under $15) -- and she has become quite popular already.


She also has a version where her bone outline glows green. Acquiring both the Skull Ranger skin and the Skull Trooper skin will complete the skull set and give you the opportunity to be even more festive this Halloween in Fortnite.


Skin: Skull Trooper


They say what's old is new again, and that statement has never been truer than now. The Skull Tropper skin, a fan favorite, has made its return. 


This one costs 1,200 V-bucks (a little under $15.00) and has an additional version that glows in the dark if you owned the skin previously. Some players believe that the return of this skin could be a precedent for the return of the Ghoul Skin.


But only time will tell. 


Skin: Dire


The most challenging skin to get this season at Tier 100 is also one of the best Halloween skins available. Dire is a legendary skin that at first just looks like a jock teenager. But after unlocking his other styles, this skin transforms into a terrifying werewolf.


The second style in the set is a humanoid brown wolf with glowing yellow eyes, a red headband, and ripped jeans and jackets. This one is available at 30,000 XP.


The third is 70,000 XP and is a complete wolf transformation, snarling teeth and all. He grows a long snout and pointy ears. He still has brown fur and red headband, but his jacket and jeans are completely torn away.


Each of the following styles begin to change the werewolf’s fur and clothes colors. His fourth unlockable style is at 120,00 XP and has grey skin with light blue accents along his jacket and headband. His third is white with yellow accents. You can gain this one at 180,000 XP.


The fourth (and final) unlock is a black wolf with bright red eyes, gold arm guard, and grey clothing. It’s going to take 250,000 XP to finally reach this one though.


Get ready to start grinding challenges and buddying up with your friends to gain tiers and XP fast.


Skin: Nightshade


With a name like Nightshade, you would expect this skin to be a bit scarier ... well, on second thought, it is a bit unsettling.


This smiling tomato head is an Epic skin and part of the Pizza Pit set. She wears a grey jumpsuit and hood over the green stem at the top of her helmet.


You can reach nab this Fortnite Season 6 skin to complete your Pizza collection at Tier 86. It might not be the spookiest skin in the newest set, but it's definitely one of the most unique -- and that helmet ... well, it speaks for itself. 


Skin: Dusk


This is one of the spookier -- and more Halloween-centric -- Season 6 skins. 


Dusk is an Epic Fortnite skin that's part of the Nite Coven set and perfect for the Darkness Rises theme.


This vampire character has cold purple skin, glowing red eyes, white hair with purple edges, and creepy black claws. She wears a leather tunic, gauntlets, and boots.


This demonic skin is the fifth of the seven skins you can gain, and it is available at Tier 71. It's perfect for frightening your enemies and getting a quick knock. 


Skin: Fable


Next up on the Fortnite Season 6 skins list is Fable.


Most players simply refer to this skin as Red Riding Hood, though she’s a little more rugged than other iterations of the character with scarlet war paint on her eyes and the wolf's tail tied to her belt as a trophy.


She still has her classic red hood along with braids and a skirt. Her shirt is tattered and bound with leather buckles. The rest of the look includes red and black gloves and boots.


Looks like the wolves are the ones who should be running away.


This skin is available at Tier 47 and is the first of the collection that won’t be immediately available after purchasing the Battle Pass Bundle.


Skin: Giddy-Up


This Season 6 skin is straightforward but silly enough to work. 


Giddy-up is arguably the most hilarious skin Fortnite has seen yet. The character wears a giant inflatable pink Llama around his waist -- as if he were riding it straight to a victory royale. The boots are covered in grass as well to pull off the illusion -- well, except for the blatantly obvious metal shin guards ... 


You can nab this skin at Tier 23, which means it is also one you will get with the Battle Pass Bundle if you are willing to spend the extra money.


Skin: Calamity


Calamity has been the talk of Season 6 for obvious reasons. Who wouldn’t want this sleek gunslinger skin?


The best part is that this skin also has six unlockable styles. The first for this pink-haired cowgirl is an outfit of simple shorts and a cowgirl hat, which is available in Tier One, meaning you'll get this skin immediately when purchasing your Battle Pass.


However, you'll need to gather experience to unlock this skin's other styles. 


The second, available at 20,000 XP, is more threatening with a bandit mask, a black pair of jeans, and a leather vest with silver studs. The third can be gained after reaching 50,000 XP. It includes gloves and fringed jeans.


The second half of styles for Calamity are more detailed but also more difficult to receive. The fourth style adds teal accents, shotgun shells along with her belt, and a poncho to complete the western look. You will need 90,000 XP for this one though.


The fifth look is where players can acquire the long dark cloak with spiked shoulders at 140,000 XP


And finally, the sixth style adds another ammunition strap, spiked gloves, and glowing purple trims to the cloak. Smoke ominously billows off of Calamity’s clothes in this Halloween look. Be prepared to give the game some dedication, though, since it requires 200,000 XP to unlock.


Skin: DJ Yonder


The infamous Llama has returned for Season 6 in the form of a DJ.


Following suit other famous artists of the electro genre such as Daft Punk and Deadmau5, this Fortnite character wears a massive metallic helmet in the shape of a llama head. With shades, a headset, and a gold tooth, this DJ is ready to fist pump their way into a victory royale.


The rest of the clothes glow in sweet LED lights, meaning it's not the stealthiest look out there. But who cares? You know you want it just to stand out in the crowd -- and the winner's circle.


This is one of the skins you will automatically acquire in Tier One when you purchase a Battle Pass.


Darkness has risen and Fortnite Season 6 is off to a spooky start. Like a cauldron full of sweet, delicious candy, the shop is full of creepy, scary, deadly -- and even silly -- new skins just in time for Halloween. 


If you’re still contemplating whether or not you want to buy a Battle Pass or simply want to quickly sift through all the choices, we've put together a list of all the current Season 6 skins so you can spend more time knocking and less time scrolling through the shop. 


Remember, a Battle Pass costs 950 v-bucks ($9.99). You can also purchase the Battle Bundle, which includes the first 25 tiers of content for the season and costs 2,800 v-bucks (around $30.00).


Season 6 will be active until December 5, 2018, which will give you plenty of time to enjoy the latest content and level up tiers to acquire your favorite skins.

MapleStory 2: How to Perform on The Street Thu, 11 Oct 2018 13:33:10 -0400 Ashley Shankle

By the time you're done with it, you are going to complete a lot of Exploration Goals in MapleStory 2. But right at the start, they can be confusing. You end up having to wander into houses and talk to specific unmarked NPCs, look through binoculars, fish, and a whole host of other tasks.

Once you hit Lith Harbor at the start of your journey through Maple World, you'll be able to tick off two Exploration Goals for the area. These being talking to Teo and looking through the area's binoculars.

You can't ride a taxi from Lith Harbor until you unlock one elsewhere and come back just to leave again -- but this can be done quickly. The next two take a little more time.

You have to be able to fish to catch an Octopirate. At around Level 13, you'll get a quest under the Maple Guide menu to get your fishing pole and learn how to fish.

And of course, the final Exploration Goal for Lith Harbor that trips everyone up when they first log in: Performing on the street.

How to perform on the street

In order to perform on the street anywhere in Maple World, you need a musical instrument. Musical instruments are a little difficult to come by and, if you're not paying attention, can seem like they are only available for Blue Merets. That is luckily not the case.

If you don't have the Blue Merets to spend on a musical instrument of your choice in the Meret Market, you can choose to take the patient route and wait until around Level 20 or cough up Mesos to a music vendor for one (for 70k to 250k Mesos each).

Maple Guide quest to get an instrument.

At around Level 20, a new Maple Guide quest grants you a free Practice Digital Piano and teaches you how to play music. It also comes with the MapleStory 2 OST #2 music sheet, so you can take a taxi right down to Lith Harbor and get this first set of Exploration Goals taken care of as soon as you're done with the quest.

(I say "around Level 20" because I noticed it at Level 22, but hadn't looked since around Level 17. So I'm really not sure of the exact level, but it's in that range somewhere.)

If you skip the quest and just buy one, double click on the instrument in your inventory to get started playing -- and make sure you have a music sheet on-hand for tunes.

You can get further music sheets from Music Academy Heads (and perhaps vendors with other titles) found in some towns. Look for this icon:

Piano icon in Maple Story 2; a small piano on a pedestal with four white keys and three black keys

And with that, you've learned how to perform on the street and play music in MapleStory 2. Just one of many small and strange things you must learn to do to progress in-game. There are many more surprises to come!

I'm working on a few guides, but my first up is one close to my Maple-soaked heart: an OX Quiz answer guide for MapleStory 2. It's a work in progress, but may be a help next time you choose OX Quiz.

WWE 2K19 Guide: How to Face Scan a Character Thu, 11 Oct 2018 11:05:10 -0400 Sergey_3847

One of the best parts about the 2K Sports games is that you can put your own face on characters in the game. And as you might expect, WWE 2K19 also offers the face scan feature.

But unlike NBA 2K19, which uses a mobile face app and makes the face scan feature really simple to use, WWE 2K19 requires you to manually upload your face to the game. This can get really complicated if you don't know what to do.

If you're wondering how to scan your face into the game, just follow our step-by-step guide below.

Step 1: Take a Photo

You can take a photo of your face either by, well, using your phone (at this point, we all know how to take selfies). However, here are a few things to keep in mind when taking a photo so it works in WWE 2K19. 

  1. Use good lighting: Illuminate your face as much as possible without washing it out
  2. Use a clean background: To make the process easier, stand against a white background, like a wall
  3. Keep shadows out: Shadows make it harder for WWE 2K19 to recognize all of your facial features 
  4. Capture your face and shoulders only: There's no need for a full body shot
  5. Don't smile or wear glasses, hats, etc: Since tech is a fickle beast, smiling or wearing items like glasses or hats will throw things off

The TL;DR is that your photo should look like your driver's license or other photo ID. 

Step 2: Upload Your Photo

After you've uploaded your photo, you need to upload it to your game by following these steps:

  1. Go to
  2. Upload your picture in Face Photo tab
  3. Start WWE 2K19 
  4. In the main menu, choose Community Creations
  5. Go to Image Manager
  6. Choose your image from the Incoming tab
  7. Click on Download

This procedure will save your photo in the game, which can now be applied to the character of your choice.

Step 3: Adjust Face Parameters

Now you can apply your photo in the Face menu of your character. Here's how you do it:

  1. Go to Face Photo Capture
  2. Choose your photo
  3. Use controls to match your photo with the character
  4. Use Face Deformation feature to pick up the matching skin color

WWE 2K19 offers a huge number of other face structure adjustments you can use to make your character look exactly like you. So play around with a few of them and see which parameters fit you the best.


That is all on how to face scan a character in WWE 2K19, but be sure to come back soon for more related guides here at GameSkinny!

Rise of Civilizations Beginner’s Guide: How to Win Like a Pro Wed, 10 Oct 2018 18:30:35 -0400 RobertPIngram

Building your own empire in Rise of Civilization is fun, but it is not without its frustrations.

From dealing with overpowered players to struggling to progress at the pace you’d like, it’s easy to get irritated with how your game is progressing.

Although the game’s opening tutorial phase does teach you how to play and show you some of the core mechanics involved, it doesn’t position you for the most possible success.

That's where this guide comes in. 

Choosing Your Starting Nation

One of the ways Rise of Civilizations lets you customize your settlement is to choose what nation you hail from, and each option provides its own unique perks to get you going forward faster.

However, it is not always easy to know how effectively these perks will translate in the actual game, particularly when first starting out. Consider the way you want to play first, as this will change the ideal starting nation for you. We look at those options below. 

 The civilization selection screen shows Germany, with a warrior clad in gold holding a large shield and sword over shoulder

Aggressive Nations

If you enjoy PvP (player vs player) combat, you want to take on an aggressive posture with your play. This means a lot of sending your armies out to take on other players. For this kind of a play style, you want a build which offers perks for attacking, such as:


The Germans receive a boost to the attack strength of their cavalry units, and also have boosts to their AP recovery and troop training, so you can push out more and more troops to keep attacking.


Like Germany, the Japanese troops get a boost to their attacking. Instead of a larger 5% boost to one unit type, however, Japan grants a 2% boost across the board, creating a uniformly strong army. They also can train 5% more troops at a time to speed up your army building.

Defensive Nations

Not everyone enjoys going out and facing off with other players regularly. If you prefer taking a hands-off approach and tend to your own business instead, you want to choose different starting nations. Instead of focusing on your ability to venture forward on offense, look for defensive perks.


The Spaniards specialize in looking out for themselves, not disturbing others. In addition to a 5% boost to their cavalry’s defensive abilities, they also gather gold at an increased speed, allowing you to stockpile the money you need to keep upgrading your buildings.


As with the Japan-Germany similarities, China takes Spain’s specific defensive boost and makes it more generalized with 2% across the board. They also gather resources and build more quickly so you can get more done with less downtime.

 The civilization selection screen highlights china, with old Chinese man with long white beard

Don’t Pass on Freebies

Like nearly every mobile game, Rise of Civilizations makes use of the most dreaded phrase in video games: microtransactions.

The gems you can purchase are very useful for you and your civilization’s development, and fortunately, you aren’t forced to rely on opening your wallet to earn them if you don’t want to. The game offers you plenty of opportunities to earn them for free.

Taking on Barbarian hoards has the potential to earn gems with minimal effort from your army.

Once you have researched Jewelry you can even find and collect gem caches on the world map.

You'll also earn gems without even trying when you complete daily goals and quests, so don't forget to spend those gems on improving your civilization.

Fundamentals of Managing Your Army

Whether you’re sending your troops out into the world aggressively or turtling up and playing defense, it helps to have an army that knows how to handle itself when push comes to shove.

There are two components to your army’s make-up, and it’s important to manage both effectively to get the most out of your military. 

 a New Troops card shows Joan of Arc holding a sword above her head and a flag in her left hand

As you open free chests, you are going to begin earning new generals to go with your starter general, and this opens the door to creating multiple talented warriors. This is a strong strategy to implement, but not right away.

In the early game, there is not much need for multiple forces, so you only need one MVP general to lead your troops. Focus on a complimentary general, one that fits your playstyle. Then develop subordinates after you have maxed out their abilities.

Once you begin training additional generals, make your second general a compliment to your first. If you have a strong defender to watch over your city, choose one with boosts to offense. If you have a marauder, start training somebody to protect your walls

No general can win a war single-handedly, so you also need to worry about the troops under their command. There are two very simple principals to follow which, once understood, will turn your armies into lean, mean killing machines.

First, always train new troops. If you’ve got capacity for more troops and military buildings, but are doing nothing, you’ve got a waste of military resources on your hand. More troops equal more strength, so keep producing more warriors to power your civilization’s growth.

As your civilization develops, you’ll also begin researching your military tech tree. Rather than focusing on powering up your troops, progress along the tree as quickly as possible to unlock the stronger units as soon as you can -- then worry about the upgrades.

There’s more to be gained in hiring better units than in improving overall strength while sticking with low-end warriors.

 Upgrading the town hall, showing the hall's level, troop capacity, and power, as well as upgrades

Protect Yourself Before They Wreck Yourself

Acquiring the resources you need to grow and expand your civilization is a game of accumulation, and you don't want outsiders coming in and spoiling your progress.

While you can't fully prevent your civilization from ever being attacked, you should always do your best to protect your hard-earned resources from other players' greedy hands.

There are a few key steps that are easy to overlook when getting started that will help to minimize your losses to other players.

First, create a strong defense, which means looking after both your soldiers and your structures.

Always keep a commander stationed on defensive duties. Leaving this spot open is just passing up a free boost to your defensive capabilities.

You should also look to upgrade your walls and watchtower as quickly as possible to increase your resistance.

Unfortunately, even the best-defended civilizations will occasionally lose. This is where it is important to upgrade your storage facility. The higher level you've progressed it to, the greater percentage of your resources it will protect, meaning when you do get overrun, you lose less.

By following these core principals, you can significantly lessen the threat to your progression from other players.

Scheduling Upgrades is Key

Once you have the keys to managing your units and gathering valuable resources, your civilization will likely be progressing quite well. This is where you have the opportunity to give yourself your biggest boost yet.

Many new players completely mismanage the upgrades to their civilizations, so if you take these simple steps, you will be starting out with a huge advantage.

The first key to upgrade management is to always leave your City Hall for last. You’ll notice as you look to upgrade other buildings that eventually, you get capped by your current City Hall level.

So move on to a new building and upgrade everything else first, until there are no other options before moving on to the City Hall. This keeps your civilization balanced across the board.

 The blue and yellow Kingdom info list in Rise of Civilizations

As you begin to upgrade your City Hall, don’t progress past Level 7 on your initial server, as there are regularly new servers being added for players to populate. The game lets you relocate your civilization as long as it has not reached Level 8 yet.

This means, once at Level 7, you can pack up and move to a server just a day or two old, where other players will not yet be at your level. This grants you an early edge over other players, making offense easier and your defenses more secure.


That's it for our Rise of Civilizations beginners guide to winning like a pro. Have you been playing Rise of Civilizations? What tricks do you use to get the most out of your digital civilians? Let us know in the comments.

MapleStory 2 Launches with Loads of Events, New Class Wed, 10 Oct 2018 15:11:02 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Whether you've waited to play MapleStory 2 until full release or you nabbed a Founder's Pack last week to get headstart access, today's an exciting day to be playing the successor to Nexon's classic MMORPG.

MapleStory 2's launch day is here, and with it comes a lot more than just pre-registration rewards.

Those who played during the game's betas or during the Founder's-only head start campaign can log in today and start grinding their characters up from Level 50 to the new level cap of 60.

Today also marks the release of the new Runeblade class, a melee spellcaster. The Runeblade is the game's ninth class, and will not be the last.

Along with the raised level cap and shiny new class is the new Karkar Island area consisting of 20 total new maps, several new Normal and Hard mode dungeons, and a whole slew of events to keep any Mapler busy through the next month.

Be sure to read all the patch notes if you've been playing before release, it's a bigger patch than you might imagine.

MapleStory 2 is just different enough from the original game to make it fresh, and all the minigames, housing features, and social aspects certainly make it a strong contender if you're looking for a more casual and social MMORPG.

Assassin's Creed: Odyssey Ancient Stele Locations Tue, 09 Oct 2018 11:57:10 -0400 Zack Palm

In the massive world of Assassin's Creed: Odyssey, there's plenty of things for you to collect as scour the beautiful plains of ancient Greece.

One of the collectables you can acquire comes from the previous game where you visit ancient tombs in order to discover golden tablets. In this game they're referred to as Stele and when you collect one you receive a modest amount of experience and a single ability point.

This guide breaks down the locations of each hidden Stele and details the path you need to take in order to find them inside the ancient tomb. There are twenty-two locations throughout the game, so prepare for an amazing road trip through Greece!

1: Tomb of the First Pythia

You'll find this first tomb a little northwest of the Sanctuary of Delphi, tucked away against a small hill.

When you get inside proceed to the brazier and take a right turn. You need to break the pots in front of the small hole and slide through it.

Go down the stairs and proceed through the hallway until you see a breakable wall with a snake positioned in front of it. Kill the snake, break down the wall, and go through to claim your first Stele!

2: Tomb of Alkathous

This tomb is located just outside of Megara, on the western side.

Enter the tomb and take a right turn where you'll find a room with a breakable wall in it. Destroy the wall and go deeper into the temple.

All you need to do is keep going forward until you're at the bottom of the stairs where you take a left. Your prize is at the end of the hallway.

3: Tomb of Eteokles

To find this location you'll want to go to the northwest of the Sanctuary of Eleusis.

Follow the tomb's path until you arrive to a room with a large soldier statue, where you'll have a new doorway to go through on your right.

Go down this new path, and you'll arrive to a small room with a snake and a crate you can move. Kill the snake, move the crate, and the Stele will be in the room at the end of the hallway.

4: Tomb of Orion

For this tomb, go to the northwest of the Healing Sanctuary of Amphiaraos. There's quite a bit of blood outside of this tomb, but don't let that stop you!

Head inside and take the path to the left. You'll go down some stairs and follow the path until you're forced to choose between going right or left. Again, choose left and you'll see your prize in the back of the next room.

5: Mycenaean Tomb of Ajax

Though finding this tomb right next to Salamis is easy, getting into it can prove difficult as there's always a handful of fighters patrolling the entrance.

You can always sneak past them, but taking them out works too! When you're inside follow the left path and continue straight.

This eventually leads you into a room with three holes you can slide through, but you want to go through the one in the middle. Continue and jump down the large hole in the last room to claim your long-awaited prize.

6: Artemision Tomb

The Artemision Tomb is located on the northern coast of Artemision Point.

Head inside where you'll have to jump down a hole and continue forward to water-filled entrance. Dive into the water and go straight, taking the only right available to you ahead.

You'll breach the surface and continue into a tight hallway full of pressure points with large spikes. Dodge these and then at the end you'll have to move a small crate to reveal a small path where you can claim your next Stele.

7: Parmenon Tomb 

This tomb is to the southwest of the Koinyra Fortress.

If you follow the path you'll see four large pots blocking a small hole you can slide through. Your next Stele is on the other side.

8: Tomb of Orpheus

You're going to find this tomb to the southwest of the mushroom cave. Proceed inside and you're going to find an empty room with massive hole in the ceiling.

Go through the hole and the new path, until you reach a wall blocked by crates you can move to make your way through. There's a large hole in the next room guarded by many snakes, so watch your step!

You'll find the Stele in the back of this snake-infested room.

9: Abandoned Tomb

The entrance of this tomb is to the south of the Poliochni Ruins in Sky Fall Lakes.

Go through the breakaway wall and then slide through the small hole. Then, you're going to take a left, a right, another right, a left, and then jump down through a large hole.

Find the room with the small hole in the back wall to slide through, and follow the path to the room full of snakes and your next Stele.

10: Stony Sepulchre

You can find this tomb to the southwest of the city Chios, right next to the island's western ship dock.

When inside, follow the path and when you have the opportunity take a right. You'll arrive to a entrance blocked by crates you're going to move, and after going a little further ahead you'll find this tomb's Stele.

11: Tomb of Brizo

This tomb's entrance is to the north of the Kynthos Ruins in the Sacred Lands of Artemis.

This tomb is a little tricky. Head inside and follow the path, until you reach a room with a snake in the middle of it. Destroy the four pots located on the left side of the room, and slide through the hole.

Go down the next path, taking the left path the first chance you get. In the next room jump down the hole and find the next path blocked by a crate. After you've moved the crate you'll find a Stele behind a breakable wall.

12: Tomb of Polybotes

You're going to find this tomb to the south of the Herb Fishing Village in Pharmakeia Bay.

All you have to do is follow the path and destroy some pots blocking a small entrance. Continue forward and you'll locate the Stele in no time. Though you should mind the pressure plates as they're all over the floor in the final room.

13: Giant Heroes Burial Ground

Head to the far south of Apollonas in Marble Bay and you'll find this tomb's entrance in the foothills, covered in ivy.

Head inside and prepare to go under water again as you'll have to dive down to continue forward. Swim straight, take a left, and go into the next room to proceed to the surface. There's a create in the room you'll have to move, and you'll find the Stele just beyond that.

14: Alkaios Tomb

You can make your way to this tomb by going to the southwest of Paros Harbor in Sculptor's Elysium. Be careful when you arrive as there's a small bandit camp guarding the entrance. Deal with them, and then go inside.

Take the left turn and follow the hallway until you see a crate blocking a small entrance on the left side. Move this crate and you'll find the next Stele behind it.

15: Tomb of the Forgotten Hero

We're jumping all the way over to the Helot Hills where you're going to find the next tomb to the southeast of Akriai.

When you get inside, destroy the pots blocking the entrance on the right side and slide through. Go down the stairs and take another right, where you'll slide into another room with the Stele inside.

16: Pheidon's Tomb

You shouldn't have any trouble find this tomb entrance as it's located in the western part of Argos in the Argolis region.

Run straight into the tomb and take the first right you can. Take this path until you're facing a hallway full of pots. Destroy these and mind your footing as there's plenty of hidden pressure plates waiting for you! 

Take another right where you're seeing a hallway full of pots, but again, beware the pressure plates in this area. You'll find the Stele behind a breakaway wall.

17: Agamemnon's Tomb

This tomb is located to the northwest of the Phleious Military Camp in the Palace of Agamemnon area.

Inside this tomb you're going to want go left twice, before taking a right and you'll end up in a room full of pressure plates.

Your goal is to move the crate through the room and place it against the wooden barricade on the other side. You'll be able to jump over it when you're finished. Follow the hallway and you'll find the next Stele in a room with a massive hole in the floor.

18: Tomb of Eurypylos

You're going to have to go out of your way to find this tomb. It's located at the top of Mount Panachaikos.

Inside you'll follow the same path for awhile until you reach a room where you have to figure out another crate puzzle. This shouldn't take you too long to make it to the next room. Go down this hallway, where you'll slide into one more room where the Stele is located.

19: Tomb of the First Champion

This tomb is located to the west of Idean Cave in the Forgotten Swamp.

There's a small camp of bandits outside this tomb, so try sneaking in or killing them. The tomb entrance looks like a dried out fountain with a few pots at the bottom.

Once inside the first room will have you jump on a crate to the next level. Follow the new path and this will leave you to sliding into a room with a pressure plate with a breakable wall. Break the wall before the spikes shoot up and then continue.

As you make your way through the next hallway, keep on the look out for the next breakable wall. The Stele is hidden behind it.

20: Destroyed House of Oinomaos

Your next stop takes you to the southwest of Fort Koroibos in the Valley of Olympia.

The tomb's entrance is hidden in the side of the hill next to the destroyed home. Go down the path and you'll find the Stele immediately.

21: Tomb of the Daughter of Atlas

This little tomb is to the far southwest of the Teuthis Camp on Mount Psophis.

You're going to slide through to the first room and follow the path straight through the Stele should be in the back of the room with the large statue.

22: Waterfall of Styx

The final tomb is a little north of the synchronize point at Elikia Peak.

When you're inside, take a right as soon as you can and follow that path all the way back. The last Stele will be waiting for you at the end of the hallway. 


And there you have it, all twenty-two of the ancient tombs in Assassin's Creed: Odyssey broken down for you!

Keep it here at GameSkinny for more Assassin's Creed Odyssey guides and tips. If you haven't already, check out our review of the game.

5 Tips to Own the Early Game in Assassin's Creed Odyssey Tue, 09 Oct 2018 10:57:38 -0400 John Schutt

Assassin's Creed Odyssey is a long game, and there's some very aggressive experience gating as it nears its close. Plus, the endgame is where some of the best content lies and ensuring you're ready to hit it the instant you get there takes preparation. That preparation takes time.

While Odyssey is already a 40-50 hour experience, if you want to get the most out of it, you'll probably be pushing 60 hours. Be aware that there's some grinding involved so don't be surprised if you have to take a little time off of the main story to explore the world and do some side quests. That is what they're there for, you can't barrel through the main story all at once.

In any event, here are five important tips so you can get the most out of the early game in Assassin's Creed Odyssey.

1. Take bounties. Lots of them.

I mentioned in my Odyssey review that I really enjoyed the bounty system, as it's short, optional content that gives good rewards for relatively little effort.

Bounties are a blessing, because my biggest piece of advice for the first 5-10 hours of your time in Odyssey is to take at least two bounties for every bounty board you come across and complete them at your earliest convenience. That is, right away.

The experience and gold boost each give might be small potatoes individually, but it adds up quickly, and you'll need every inch of progress on that experience tracker if you're going to be properly leveled to jump right into the late game story content.

On an unrelated note, bounties will often take you to parts of the map you wouldn't otherwise go to, opening up optional locations where you can earn additional experience and loot. Some of the rewards you receive from these side treks will be better than what you already have, and you might even run into a sidequest or two for your trouble.

2. Dismantle everything

Much can be said about the material economy in Odyssey, but one of the best ways to sidestep some of it is to dismantle everything you no longer use.

Don't worry, the good stuff — Legendary itemscan't be dismantled, but if it's purple, blue, or grey, and it's not as good as what you've got on, get rid of it. Unless it's got sentimental value or seems to be tied to a story character (some items are), there's no reason to keep it around. 

Higher quality gear breaks down into higher quality materials, but every bit is important, especially if you want to level up your Legendary gear to use late game.

Don't concern yourself with the gold value of your items, as you can make every piece you need through bounties and looting world locations. Of course, Odyssey absolutely rains down loot on you, so selling a few items isn't ever out of the question, but it will never be the real money maker.

3. Upgrade the Spear

Leonidas's Spear is both a story item and a gameplay gating mechanic, as additional perks on the Abilities page require new Spear levels to activate. You'll need to hunt down members of the Cult of Kosmos for the items needed to actually do the upgrading, but enough members of the Cult are available early enough that you can make some significant progress before you have to go hunting too hard. 

Also, upgrading the Spear increases its damage and the main character's Adrenaline gauge, which you'll need to make use of the powerful abilities Odyssey offers. There are also a number of passive buffs that come with an upgraded Spear, and while I wouldn't call them "powerful," they can come in handy in a pinch and they make for a nice little power boost when you might need it most.

4. Don't Neglect the Warrior Tree

While the Assassin's Creed series has previously been a game based around stealth mechanics, in Odyssey you'll be getting into a lot of face-to-face fights too.

There are certainly plenty of opportunities to remain unseen, but unless you're vastly over-leveled for the area you're in, it's unlikely you'll be able to take down an enemy with a single stealth attack or bow headshot. And unless you want to let the entire area go back to being unalerted, you'll be facing off against at least a few guards in a head up fight.

So don't ignore the Warrior tree on the Abilities page. There are some powerful skills on there, all of which make your life easier when you're clashing swords. Offering everything from straight armor and damage upgrades to situational but still useful abilities, the Warrior tree should be a constant friend, no matter how you plan to play.

5. The Sparta Kick. Live It. Love It.

Yes, the meme lives on almost thirteen years later, and yes, you can channel Gerard Butler's Leonidas and kick your enemies down impossibly high places to their doom.

That isn't the main reason to love the Spartan Kick, however. Rather, its mechanics are its most important trait. There are a few things going for it: 

  1. Invincibility frames
  2. Attack interrupt
  3. Distance closing

You heard me. The Kick makes you invincible while it winds up, so as long as you have a good store of adrenaline, you can do a decent chunk of damage without fear of reprisal.

It also interrupts enemy attacks, including the unblockable ones, so a well-timed Kick can, and will, save you from some of the game's most damaging effects, fire and poison notwithstanding.

And while the final effect doesn't always go off, the Kick usually does a good job of closing the gap between you and your targeted foe so you don't have to waste a dodge or risk going through someone's spear to reach your intended victim.


Assassin's Creed Odyssey has a lot of content, and you'd do well to engage with most of it, especially early on. We at GameSkinny hope these tips help your early game experience be a little more fun and prepare you for what's to come later in the experience.

Stay tuned for more Assassin's Creed Odyssey guides and guides for all your favorite games, right here.

Space Hulk Tactics Guide: Best Starter Squad Compositions Tue, 09 Oct 2018 04:00:01 -0400 Sergey_3847

Regardless of the mode you want to compete in Space Hulk: Tactics, it is always a good idea to have an optimally balanced squad composition ready for both races of the Terminators and Genestealers.

Of course, you can try out many different options and see how each composition does for you, but if you're looking for a quick victory, then follow our guide for the best starter squad composition in Space Hulk: Tactics below.

Dark Angels Squad Composition

In case you're playing with the Terminators, the best starting chapter would be Dark Angels. It has some of the most powerful cards in the game, and the following composition makes the best out of each of them:

1x Sergeant

Here you have two choices: one with the Power Sword and Storm Bolter, and the other one with Thunder Hammer and Storm Shield. The first one is clearly on the offensive side, while the other one offers a more defensive approach.

Here it is recommended to choose Sergeant with the Storm Bolter. It allows you to control the area as far as 12 squares, so you won't even need to use melee or shield. This is clearly the best choice for your squad's leader.

3x Heavy Weapon Bearer

You can choose to play with Assault Terminators here, but Heavy Weapon Bearers have a better choice of weapons. Here are the weapon suggestions for all three of them:

  • 2x Assault Cannon
  • 1x Plasma Cannon

The Assault Cannons aren't as powerful as Storm Bolters, but they have the advantage of free shooting if your Terminator made a move this turn. The Cannons also are not limited by the number of squares, so if you see a Genestealer -- you will be able to shoot it no matter what.

The Plasma Cannon is an excellent choice against Blips or swarms of Genestealers. It affects all targets in the 3x3 area, which can deal with several aliens at once.

1x Librarian

Your last free slot can be reserved for either a Librarian or Apothecary. You can choose either of them, but Librarian is a slightly better choice. He can quickly transfer his AP to one of your other squad members and even reduce the number of Genestealers in a single Blip.

Genestealers Squad Composition

Creating a squad of Genestealers involves a slightly different strategy, since here you can't choose your leader. It's always the same and the only thing you can do is change its appearance.

But you can adjust the rest of the four slots with the following choices:

2x Bulwark Biomorph

Usually, Genestealers have 6 APs per turn, but Bulwarks have only 4. Here you pay the price of 2 AP for a superior evasive body of the Bulwark. The Terminators will have a hard time targeting and actually hitting this Genestealer.

On top of that, it allows you to play some exciting cards that guarantee three Genestealers within one Blip, which is a great deal. Lastly, it can significantly reduce the amount of damage dealt by Terminators in the melee combat.

2x Reaperfex Biomorph

In order to compensate for Bulwark's lack of APs you can opt for two Reaperfex Biomorphs that have 8 APs per turn. But that's not it, what makes them incredible in any battle is the ability to move through occupied squares which gives you a massive tactical advantage, saves you additional APs, and most importantly, it saves you time.

But if you think that two Reaperfex is too much, then you can go for 1x Reaperfex and 1x Broodlord. But never ever take Miasmic Biomorphs, as they are the weakest of all Genestealers.


Both squad compositions have shown excellent results during Skirmishes and Quick Matches in Space Hulk: Tactics. But be free to adjust them to your own liking, and come back soon for more related guides here at GameSkinny!

How To Level Up Fast In Assassin’s Creed Odyssey Fri, 05 Oct 2018 08:58:54 -0400 David Jagneaux

Assassin’s Creed Odyssey is an absolutely massive game. It’s the kind of game that you’ll likely spend weeks (or months) plowing through to uncover all of its secrets, legendary gear, and powerful abilities.

Even if you focus specifically on the main story you can easily spend upwards of 30 or more hours in this iteration of Ancient Greece and you can expect to double that if you venture off the beaten path more than a few times. And despite is length, its infectious stories and downright addictive gameplay make it a journey worth obsessing over.

But everyone that plays open world RPGs like Assassins Creed Odyssey knows that getting through it all is more about efficiency than brute force. There’s nothing more infuriating than that feeling that what you want to do is too far above your level so you’ve got to go grind until you’re strong enough. Since the game scales with you in level, hitting those sort of brick walls can and will happen if you’re not smart.

Luckily for you we’ve put together this quick and dirty guide on how to level up fast -- and efficiently -- in Assassin’s Creed Odyssey to become the most powerful mercenary this side of Mount Olympus.

Cassandra sits on a white horse overlooking a bay in Greece

Gather Quests In Bunches

This is a no-brainer for anyone that’s played an open world RPG before, but it’s worth repeating: you should gather quests in bunches. Meaning, when you discover a new town, scour the streets and surrounding area for quest bubbles, accept them all, and then knock them out in bunches. Hit the closest ones first and just follow the icons on your map like breadcrumbs.

A great way to pile up lots of quests quickly is to go to the message board in town (a black logo with white lines on your compass) and grab all of the bounties and side quests you can.

Many of these can be completed en route to larger quests or even sometimes as part of other quests naturally, such as collecting resources or killing a certain number of enemies.

Explore The Map and Unlock Fast Travel Points

One other likely known tidbit is to utilize fast travel as much as you can to cut down on travel time. Unlike in most other Assassin’s Creed games, you don’t need to climb to the top of a tower to synchronize an area.

Instead, the synchronization points are scattered about on a variety of landmarks such as Zeus, iconic trees, buildings, and even mountains themselves. Once you find one of these points, you’ll unlock fast travel for the future.

In addition to these points, don’t forget to hold down on the D-pad to call for your mount. You can keep running while you call your mount and you’ll automatically swing yourself up onto it without ever breaking stride. You can even tell the horse to automatically follow roads and go directly to your quest marker. That’s super helpful to travel efficiently.

Kassandra sneaks up behind and enemy in a cave

Clear Tombs, Caves, and Crypts

While you’re out exploring you’ll come across a ton of optional side content like caves, crypts, and tombs. If you go inside and explore these areas, finding all of the loot, and killing the enemies you can get a nice chunk of XP. But more importantly, some of them will even award you a free skill point if you find the Steles inside.

One crucial ability that you need to unlock as soon as possible is the Revelation ability. It’s the bottom right ability in the Assassin tree and when used emits a radar-like pulse around you that displays minerals, treasure, enemies, and much more.

It’s probably the single most useful ability in the game and helps make sure you don’t miss a thing.

Prioritize Higher XP Reward Quests

Not all quests are created equally in Assassin’s Creed Odyssey. If you check your quest tab of the main menu, you’ll see that the “XP” reward is color-coded. Gold-plated quests offer the most XP, followed by purple and then blue.

If you want to be as efficient as possible as you level, focus on them in that order. This menu will also show you the types of other rewards on the table such as how much money and which gear tier to expect.

A female warrior wearing gold armor and an axe stands in front of a fortress

Complete All Objectives at Forts and Bases

When you’re first approaching a base, you’ll probably notice that there are a ton of enemies wandering around, patrolling. It can be overwhelming at first.

But if you’re comfortable mixing your stealth, ranged, and melee abilities together, assaulting keeps and clearing them out can actually be some of the best content in the whole game. You’re free to approach them however you want. Sometimes getting your swords out and just taking on entire groups of enemies is a blast.

But actually killing enemies isn’t the best way to get XP, unfortunately. Instead, before entering a base, use ikaros to fly in and do some recon first. This way you can identify enemies, leaders, treasure chests, and key objectives.

When you’re near the base, hold down L3 and this will show your core objectives. If you complete all of those, then you get an enormous XP bonus that makes it all worthwhile.

Fight at the Arena

Around Level 20 you can head over to the Arena for a rough and tumble good time. When you kill your first mercenary you’ll automatically start the They Just Want Cruelty side quest that directs you to the Arena, found in southeastern part of the map in Pephka.

There are five champions at the Arena that you can fight over and over. The first champion is Level 22 and gives a beefy 16,000 XP bonus once defeated, or 8,000 XP bonus each time after that.

You’ll probably want to only challenge champions within two levels of your own level or else they’ll just be too powerful. We’d also advise that you focus on Warrior damage with your gear since Assassin and Ranged aren’t viable inside the Arena.

A female warrior stands over a soldier as she stabs him in the head

Conquest Battles

After you get to around Chapter 3, you’ll unlock Conquest Battles. These are large-scale skirmishes on the map that pit two armies against one another, such as Athens vs. Sparta. In most cases you’re actually free to pick sides and you can gain advantages by taking out enemy camps and forts before waging battle.

The fights themselves don’t yield a ton of XP, but if you’re quick about it, the big bonus at the end is certainly worth it.

Ubisoft Club Two Hour Boost

If you’re new to Assassin’s Creed Odyssey, you can actually register as a member of the Ubisoft Club for a special XP boost that will help you level up fast. 

All you need to do is spend 10 U coins (which you likely have saved up just from playing other Ubisoft games) and you’ll get a 25% XP boost for two hours.

Make sure you’ve got a lot of quests to do or turn in during that time to get the most out of it.

Worth noting as well, is that in addition to this XP boost, being a member of the Ubisoft Club has other perks for Assassin’s Creed Odyssey too. For example, you can get exclusive ship skins for your sails and even recruit lieutenants themed after characters from other games.

Buy The Permanent XP Boost With Real Money

Finally, since this is the world we live in now, the best way to quickly level up in Assassin’s Creed Odyssey is, frankly, to crack open your wallet and pay with actual cold hard cash. That’s right -- for 1,000 Helix Credits (or about $10) you can buy a permanent 50% increase to all of your XP gains. Everything. That’s borderline insanity.

Unless you intend on seeing just about everything this game has to offer, it’s actually a pretty good value for something like this. The time saved alone is pretty significant. But... you’re paying cash to level up faster in a $60 game you just got. Feels a bit slimy.


That's all you need to know to level up fast in Assassin's Creed Odyssey. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more tips and tricks on this new entry to the Ubisoft series, and be sure to read our review here

Best Limited Archetypes for Guilds of Ravnica in MtG Thu, 04 Oct 2018 12:48:46 -0400 Sergey_3847

Wizards of the Coast goes back to the plane of Ravnica in the latest Magic: The Gathering card expansion -- Guilds of Ravnica. It offers 259 cards that include a large number of bi-color cards belonging to five different guilds: Selesnya (green-white), Boros (red-white), Golgari (black-green), Izzet (blue-red), and Dimir (blue-black).

Among all the guilds, the House Dimir is undoubtedly the strongest with its Surveil mechanic, but depending on your proclivities and play style, you may want to go a different route. 

So when it comes to drafting a deck for your limited event, whether it be Draft or Sealed, you can obviously choose to go with one of the five established color pairs.

However, if you really want to be effective in this meta, then it's advisable to go for three colors instead of the usual two. In this guide, you will find several of the most effective triple-color archetypes that will have a huge impact on the Limited events throughout the Guilds of Ravnica season.

Grixis Control


The Grixis archetype can mostly rely on the blue-black color pair for control and include red cards for offensive purposes. The Dimir Surveil mechanic will help you re-arrange and optimize your draws, while a healthy dose of counterspells, such as Sinister Sabotage and Devious Cover-Up, should help your Crackling Drake and Fire Urchin grow in size.


If your draft contains at least 7-8 cards with Surveil, you can start considering putting in Enhanced Surveillance, and a 2-mana enchantment that will double the number of cards you Surveil. This will make your deck even more effective.

Another great enchantment to have in addition to Enhanced Surveillance is Disinformation Campaign. It'll keep your card draw engine going, and at the same time, it'll make your opponent discard cards from hand.


Lastly, don't forget to include as many relative dual lands into your deck as you can -- including the Locket artifacts -- since it'll be quite challenging to manage mana for all three colors of the Grixis archetype.

Abzan Midrange


Abzan colors in Guilds of Ravnica have a lot of exciting mechanics, including Convoke, Undergrowth, and Mentor to a certain extent. Together they make up some powerful combos.

For example, creatures like Conclave Cavalier and Emmara, Soul of the Accord can help cast bigger Convoke creatures and removals (e.g. Conclave Tribunal) using tokens.


Some of the white creatures with Mentor ability (e.g. Parhelion Patrol) can help buff your 1/1 tokens, and thus increase the overall power level of your deck.

Finally, Golgari creatures with Undergrowth can come onto the battlefield with increased power due to the number of creatures in your graveyard.


Together these mechanics can turn your Abzan deck into an endless stream of threats that not that many other decks will be able to deal with easily.

Jeskai Aggro


The Boros guild can do wonders on its own, using only white and red cards, but if you add blue to the party, then you can really start pushing some damage.

Utilize white-red creatures with Haste and Mentor and burn your opponent with blue-red spells. Together these two color pairs can deal excruciating amounts of damage.


Use a reasonable amount of combat tricks to activate such cards -- like Electrostatic Field -- that can deal passive damage and at the same time protect you from opponent's attackers.

Also, the Izzet guild offers a few spells, such as Hypothesizzle and Ionize, that in addition to countering or drawing, also deal damage at the same time.


In this case, it doesn't really matter which of the color pairs will prevail in your deck. But if you have more Boros spells, then opt for a more aggressive approach, and in case of a larger Izzet group, go for a slightly more controlish game plan.

Temur Ramp


One of the most interesting and definitely very powerful archetypes you can try out throughout Guilds of Ravnica limited events is Temur Ramp. With the help of cards like District Guide and Circuitous Route, you can quickly double up the amount of your mana on board and start churning out expensive green, blue, or red spells.


Most of the Draft and Sealed games will be rather slow, so you will have enough time to ramp up properly.

In red, you can find a lot of really expensive but super strong damage spells, such as Inescapable Blaze and Command the Storm, that can be used to either remove opponent's creatures or just straight up go face to face.


Here, all you have to do is to get the right amount of mana, and you can be almost sure that the outcome will be in your favor.


Hopefully, this guide will help you choose the type of deck that corresponds to your playstyle, whether you like to be aggressive or in control of your opponent's actions.

In any case, if you're looking for more Magic: The Gathering guides at GameSkinny, then check out the related content below:

How to Toggle Run/Walk in Pathfinder: Kingmaker Wed, 03 Oct 2018 20:34:48 -0400 Ty Arthur

Half classic isometric RPG and half kingdom management simulator, Pathfinder: Kingmaker features a host of quirks you'll have to get used to while adventuring across the Stolen Lands.

However, due to a strict adherence to the tabletop rules, many players are running into a major problem. Out of nowhere, your party will suddenly slow to an absolute crawl, and won't move faster than a snail's pace -- even when their lives depend on it during combat.

Your first instinct may be to look for a run/walk toggle button, like one you'd find in many other isometric RPGs. That's not the case here, however, and you haven't accidentally toggled the running option off like you might expect.

Toggling Run In Pathfinder: Kingmaker

In this rendition of the Pathfinder rules, your party always defaults to the fastest possible movement speed. There are three main reasons why your party has suddenly slowed to an absolute crawl.

The group will only stop running and start walking if you've run afoul of the exhaustion, movement, or weather mechanics. 

These mechanics are very unforgiving on the basic difficultly settings, and there aren't reliable notifications to let you know specifically when and why you've suddenly lost movement speed.

Below, we cover all three possibilities and explain how to get back to running again.

Party Weight Distribution

Instead of individual backpacks, your party uses a shared stash system in Kingmaker. This means you don't have to juggle objects to make room in each character's inventory. Instead, it has an adverse side effect.

If you hit medium or heavy load (indicated by the yellow and red bar at the bottom of the inventory screen), the entire party slows down significantly. That's a problem because medium load is hit almost immediately just by carrying a single suit of extra armor or a few looted weapons to sell.

This system causes huge problems when you enter your capital or Oleg's Trading Post, where the game automatically switches to the main character. When you enter those locations, you have no other companions in your party.

If you are carrying pretty much anything at all, you will automatically be at heavy load with only a single party member to hold the inventory's weight.

This weight load mechanic may be true to the pen and paper source material, but it's also extremely annoying in a video game when you just want to travel from Point A to Point B an get on with the next quest.

To avoid this issue entirely, go into the Options screen and navigate to the Difficulty tab. Scroll down and turn off the option marked "The party's speed depends on the weight you are carrying." Boom, problem solved.

If that feels like cheating to you, keep in mind you can buy bags of holding from merchants to lower your weight, but that won't always solve the problem when you go into the capital and only have one character. 

Fatigue / Exhaustion

This is hands down the most likely cause of a sudden reduction in movement speed. Traveling on the world map causes fatigue and then exhaustion, which gives you negative status penalties and also reduces walking speed.

The icons to indicate fatigue and exhaustion are extremely tiny, however, so it's very easy to miss them. Check on the small squares next to each character's portrait to see if these afflictions are in effect. Fatigue is a small blue icon, while exhaustion is a dull yellow / orange color.

To get moving at full speed again, just set up camp for the night to remove the fatigue/exhaustion conditions.

Weather Effects

Have you turned off the party movement speed option and rested but are still moving at an unacceptable speed? Take a look at the weather condition of your current location.

Yes, sometimes adverse weather effects will slow down your movement even if no one in your group is fatigued and you have a light load. In particular, be on the lookout for thunder storms, which force you to move slower than the normal run speed.


Need help upgrading your kingdom, finding advisors, or picking the right class for your play style? Check out our other Kingmaker guides here:

Advanced CrossCode Tips To Survive in CrossWorlds Wed, 03 Oct 2018 17:48:42 -0400 Zack Palm

CrossCode gives you control of a player navigating an MMO world. To make this feel like a genuine MMO game, the developers crafted several mechanics they want you to figure out as you continue to play the game.

This guide will reveal some helpful pieces of information you can use to carve a path through CrossCode in each new area and foe you encounter. Surviving in CrossWorld is not as hard as it seems.

Extend Your Jumping Distance

You'll find yourself exploring all of CrossCode's little side avenues by venturing off to the side paths through intricate platforming and carefully timing your jumps. Though, the developers never made getting these locations easy and it takes a degree of skill to traverse the environment. One way  you can make it easier to find all of the secrets in the game is by extending the length of your jump.

To do the larger jump you need to hit the melee attack button after you do your normal jump. After your attack registers, attempt to do a dash, cancel it immediately by bringing your guard up. You should land with the shield in front of you.

Preforming the larger jump takes a bit of practice. You may not notice you're going further until you to land on a location you traditionally cannot reach.

Level And Damage Reduction With Party Members

Like any good MMO, when you decide to squad up with your teammates, you're going to share XP among one another. This is great when the two of you are traveling around and completing a quest but reduces Lea's XP gains.

If you feel you're getting too roughed up by monsters in an area, you can go it alone for awhile and level up Lea and you'll gain more experience points because you're not sharing it.

Also, the more party members bring with you, the less damage you're going to do to your enemies. The damage scales based on how many party members you have.

When you have a total party of three running around, you're going to do around twenty to thirty percent less damage to monsters. If you've just entered a new area, this can prove problematic, as CrossCode is a game that leans heavily on what level you are.

Whenever you're having trouble in an area or want to have Lea gain a few levels, kick out a party member or everyone and go it alone for awhile. You'll notice you're going to gain experience much more quickly and do far more damage. 

Be warned, party members do not gain XP when not in use. It's great to drop party members for difficult boss battles in side quests you want to solo, giving you the opportunity to do more damage to them. 

Remember this moving forward, because you don't want them to be useless in each brand new area because they're significantly under leveled. Keep your party members around when you're simply going through areas to grind up levels. The larger the group, the more efficient they are because your companions make great tanks!

Taking Too Much Damage? Take Water Damage!

It's easy to get overwhelmed by new opponents who are a couple levels higher than you if you don't spend enough time grinding or hammering out the side quests. You may not catch this until you're in the middle of a fight, do a quick analysis, and compare their level to yours.

One way to avoid taking too much damage for your opponents is by jumping into a nearby water source to dodge an impending attack you know you're going to have time to dodge or counter. You're going to take damage doing this, but you'll probably take less than if you just let yourself get hit. 

Choosing to avoid an attack by jumping into water saves you more health points, plus, you'll respawn nearby in a new position, letting you get around your foes and get in your next series of hits.

If you're lucky enough, the attack you're dodging comes from a monster that charges at you. This way you'll only take a little damage, and partially damage your foes.

A Note on the Trader Achievement

Noticed you've visited every area but don't have the trophy for meeting every trader? You may need to go back and talk to them

Getting the trophy My Star Sign is Libra requires that you talk to the traders rather than just passing them by. By speaking to them, you're adding to them to your map and checking them off the trophy list. Simple, but easy to overlook.

Unlimited Dodge

Dodging foes in CrossCode is a great strategy and can help keep Lea alive when she's at low health. However, you're limited to only using the quick dodge three times before it goes on cooldown. Lea can still twirl around in direction, but she won't have as much distance.

You can bypass this by quickly bringing your shield up. After you preform three dashes, drop your shield for a second, and then proceed to dodge out of the way of your foes.

It takes a split second to perform. The shield immediately drops your dodge's cooldown and you can continue dodging to your heart's content.

Though, because you're going to bring your shield up this is not an invitation to waste your dodge. Several foes, especially bosses, follow you with their attacks and run you down. Even if you place your shield up, you're going to take a good chunk of damage.

You'll find this technique more useful when you use your shield to counter, which you can use when you block an opponent's attack just before it hits you. This is a great way to stun a foe and then dodge out of the way of the others you're fighting in a group.

There Are Two Endings

CrossCode certainly comes with several RPG elements. You can choose what attacks you use and what circuit path you want to go down to build Lea to reflect your playstyle. However, you cannot make any decisions in the game, except for what side quests you do and who you help out. Later on, this defines an important choice that changes the ending you receive.

In order to not ruin the ending for those who have not gotten there yet, this answer will remain vague. There's a portion of the game near the end where there's a clear tone change and you the player can complete select missions before wrapping up the story. Ignoring these side quests changes the ending you'll see. 

For those who'd rather experience the endings for themselves than watching it on YouTube, create two save files before completing the side quests to see how the different endings compare to one another. They do change certain aspects, and vary in emotional delivery. Go into those scenes prepared!


That wraps up the guide to help make your time in CrossCode easier as you grind your way up to discovering about the Ancients. Do you have a method not mentioned on here you don't think a lot of people know about? Share your knowledge below! 

For more on CrossCode, check out our review of the game, and stay tuned to Gameskinny.

How to Upgrade Your Capital in Pathfinder: Kingmaker Wed, 03 Oct 2018 09:50:44 -0400 Ty Arthur

There's more to Pathfinder: Kingmaker than just killing bandits and ridding the land of vicious trolls! Mixing together isometric RPG gameplay with a kingdom sim, you'll need to constantly keep a close eye on everything that goes on in your barony.

One crucial element to staying ahead of problems is to upgrade your capital from a village to a town so you earn more BP and have room for more buildings. 

Unfortunately, there's no button in the management screen for upgrading and no clear info on where to go to start the process. Advancing from village to town isn't tied to your barony stats like you'd expect, and isn't dependent on what buildings you've constructed in your capital.

To initiate this upgrade, you need to through a specific combination of adventuring and kingdom management elements. Let's get started!

Upgrading The Capital To A Town

After defeating the Stag Lord, claiming his fort as your capital, and being crowned baron or baroness of the area, you need to then fully claim two additional regions before the capital can be upgraded.

The first region is available to annexed almost immediately. After learning about the kingdom management screen and setting a few companions into the advisor roles, a project will pop up allowing you to start taking control of the Outskirts region to the north of your main area.

This process takes 14 days. Keep in mind if you are trying to upgrade your capital immediately that a curse starts taking effect 30 days after you begin your rule. You will take a -2 penalty to all barony stats while dealing with that issue, so be sure to keep an eye on all the events that pop up where your priests warn you about the curse's effects.

After annexing the Outskirts, go adventuring on the road for a few days and fill all five advisor slots (if you don't know where to find the treasurer, check out our guide here). When you return to the kingdom management screen, you will gain the ability to found a new settlement in the Outskirts.

Click "Events" (or any button besides the Maps section) and scroll up to the Outskirts, then click any of the flag icons there to select where you want the village to be built.

Set the village wherever you want a pick a name, which will start the official quest to upgrade your capital to a town. You still can't complete the task until you annex a second region and then build a village there as well.

The quickest way to get a third region is to head south from the ford over the River Skunk (the same area where Jubilost and his crew of gnomes are found) and go into the Dwarven Ruins.

Plunder the ruins and take care of the troll menace, and you can then spend another 14 days to annex that region. Note that you should take Harrim with you on this adventure, since he wants to know what happened to the dwarves in the area.

When the annexing process is finished, return to your capital and rest for 24 hours (or hit the Skip Day button when accessing the table in your throne room), which will allow enough time to trigger the next quest.

A new project will automatically pop up in the kingdom management screen prompting you to start the process of upgrading your capital from a village to a town.

That's all you need to know to upgrade your capital from a lowly village to a bustling town and start on the road to becoming a king of your own independent nation!

Need help with the rest of this unforgiving pen and paper-based RPG? Check out our other Kingmaker walkthrough material here:

How to Start an Avalanche in Ring of Elysium Tue, 02 Oct 2018 14:59:06 -0400 Zack Palm

Ring of Elysium presents a few wrinkles to the traditional battle royale formula, specifically in the late game where campers abound and helicopter shinanigans run rampant. However, it also presents an interesting twist in the form of avalanches. 

Although they look cool, Ring of Elysium's avalanches are more than just window dressing; they also offer strategic advantages by allowing you to level an area's buildings and crush any players hiding nearby.

However, you can only activate an avalanche in certain areas. To know where you can make avalanches happen, you'll need to look out for trigger points on the map. We'll cover what you need to know below.

Note: When you're doing this, you're definitely going to want to have the snowboarding equipment on hand to make a fast getaway. Trust me!

Go to the Outskirts Of The RoE Map

Go to the outskirts of the map and look for buildings partially covered and filled with snow. These are locations that you cannot spawn in during the early-game, so you'll need to seek them out.

They'll have broken windows and doors; in some ways, they'll look unfinished from a development perspective, which helps them stand out better. 

Make Some Noise to Trigger the Avalanche

The best way to start an avalanche is by making loud noises (which, in turn, make shockwaves). The most efficient way is to use guns and explosives

Pistols and rifles will make decent amounts of noise, but explosives, such as grenades, really set things off. 

Aim at the side of the mountain (or aim at the ground, depending on where you are) behind the buildings. Shoot or throw your explosives. After a few seconds, you'll hear the distinctive sound of rocks beginning to tumble, shortly by an incredible roaring sound.

Now Ride!

Now's the time to equip your snowboard and ride down the mountain to safety. You can take a second to free look behind you to see the rolling mountain of snow chasing you down the mountain, but make it quick. The avalanche will eliminate any player in the area, including you.

Damage Report

The avalanche lasts about fifteen seconds or so. Once it's finished, you can check out what it left behind. The area may not look like it had any snow added to it, but the environment does change.

You'll notice all of the buildings that were once standing in the area are nowhere to be seen. They were washed away by the white, roaring sea of death, although many of the trees still remain standing.

This may change in the future as the developers modify how the avalanche mechanics work, and what it leaves behind. But for now, you can use avalanches to destroy hiding spots and crush campers. 

It's not an entirely efficient strategy for climbing the ranks, but if you're in a pinch and need to escape -- or just want to devastate parts of the map -- this just might work. 


There you have it; that's how to start an avalanche in Ring of Elysium. 

Take your friends to a remote area of a map, find some hollowed out buildings, and then give them a good scare. Just be ready to run!

If you haven't already, check out our first impressions Ring of Elysium, as well as the landing guide that accompanies it. 

How to Find the Treasury Advisor in Pathfinder: Kingmaker Tue, 02 Oct 2018 10:28:08 -0400 Ty Arthur

The arrival of a fully functional Pathfinder Online may be nothing but a pipe dream, but fans of realm building in Paizo's fantasy world finally have something to keep them busy with single player cRPG Pathfinder: Kingmaker.

Running a kingdom takes more than just a strong sword arm, so you'll need a list of advisors to keep your fledgling realm going strong while battling troll kings and dealing with the fey.

One critical role is the treasurer, who impacts your kingdom's economy. Simply finding the treasurer has many players stumped, however, as he's super easy to miss if you don't know exactly where to look.

Below we show you exactly how to find the treasury advisor and initiate a new string of economic-based kingdom events. Wondering which of the classes or sub-class archetypes to pick instead for your would-be king or queen? Check out our full Pathfinder: Kingmaker class guide over here!

Where To Find The Pathfinder: Kingmaker Treasury Advisor

Note that before you can find the treasurer, you have to first take out the Stag Lord and officially begin your rule over the the area (by completing the Stolen Land quest). To get to that point, first you need to follow these steps:

  • Travel to the ancient hut to learn about the unnatural fog
  • Defeat the guardian beasts at the Temple Of The Elk to disperse the fog
  • Follow your rival to the ancient tomb
  • Travel to the old sycamore and gain the two halves of the relic from the mite and kobold factions
  • Confront your rival at the old sycamore
  • Travel to the Stag Lord's fort and defeat his gang

When you are on the overworld map, make sure to check the "Show Location Names" box at the top-right corner.

With this feature turned on you see red exclamation points that reveal when a new event is occurring in a specific location. It also reveals specific names of river ford locations. These features make it much, much easier to find the treasury advisor. 

After gaining access to the kingdom management screen, head to the ford across the Skunk River (southwest from your capital and heading towards the Dwarven Ruins).

At this location you will be able to find the gnome named Jubilost in his wagon after gaining the ability to appoint advisors. He's not exactly happy you haven't managed to protect his wagon, and starts off quite belligerent towards the main character.

Some players don't immediately find Jubilost's overturned wagon in the river ford on their first trip to the area. This isn't a bug as expected, but rather just an issue with the event not triggering until a set amount of time has passed.

If he doesn't appear at that location, simply wait a few days for the event to trigger and come back again (a red exclamation point should appear at the ford).

In particular, Jubilost seems to spawn most frequently after activating the troll-based quest segment. Some players also get him to spawn by talking to the dryad.

Even when he does spawn, Jubilost won't immediately join your party. You will need to defeat the troll king and then inform Jubilost of the development and take him to the Dwarven Ruins. After inspecting the area, he will offer to join the party.

Update: if you pass the skill checks to pull his wagon out of the river and then pick the nice dialog options, Jubilost will join you immediately if you pick the option to ask him to team up to explore the ruins and you don't actually have to take him there.

After recruiting him, head back to the kingdom management screen and assign him to the role of treasurer.

Besides helping your kingdom's economy, be on the lookout for occasional events to trigger as well while Jubilost is in the role of treasurer.

Need help with either the adventuring or kingdom management sides of this D&D kingdom simulation game? Check out our full list of Pathfinder: Kingmaker guides here.

MapleStory 2 Founder's Rewards Missing? Don't Panic! Mon, 01 Oct 2018 19:23:22 -0400 Ashley Shankle

MapleStory 2's Head Start began today for Founder's Pack holders, but if you're in Head Start for the sweet cosmetics, you may be wondering where your Founder's Pack rewards are.

Skimming the game's subreddit and watching in-game area chats scroll by, some players are not receiving all -- or even any -- of their Founder's Pack items. To confirm this, neither a friend nor I have received ours.

Unfortunately, there doesn't seem to be any set way to deal with this issue. Some players report that logging out and logging back in prompts the game to send their items, but this does not work in all instances and did not work for me.

All you can do is be patient and wait for Nexon to sort the issue out. In the meantime, do not delete the first character you logged into on that server. Your Founder's items will be sent to the first character with which you logged into MapleStory 2.

Just a heads up that you are not the only person having this problem: so don't freak out, and just enjoy the game for now. We'll be able to flaunt soon enough.

If you're still on the fence about whether to pick up a pack, you've got just eight more days to figure it out. You can still buy a MapleStory 2 Founder's Pack until October 9. The packs all come with some pretty sweet cosmetics, Blue Merets, and Premium Club membership.

Last but not least, don't forget to pre-register for MapleStory 2 whether you're getting a Founder's Pack or not for a special mount, hat, and name tag. You also have until October 9 to pre-register.

There are sure to be lots of surprises in store for players after the game hits full launch on October 10, but until then make sure you're pre-registered and don't be impatient if your Founder's Pack items are late!

Sea of Thieves Guide: How to Get to a Volcano Mon, 01 Oct 2018 10:07:52 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest free update for Sea of Thieves, titled Forsaken Shores, sends you into the unknown area of Devil's Roar full of mysteries and new types of challenges. In this DLC the players are also given a better chance to transfer the loot to their ships via rowboats.

The new Devil's Roar area is remarkable for its extremely dangerous conditions that include earthquakes, geysers, and volcanic eruptions. If you want to know how to safely venture through this area without getting killed too fast, then follow our step-by-step guide below.

Step 1: Go to Morrow's Peak Outpost

In order to start Forsaken Shore commendations you need to sail to the eastern part of the map where the new Devil's Roar biome is located. There you will find the Morrow's Peak Outpost in your map located in the center of the new area.

When you arrive at the outpost speak to Duke who will ask you to explore the islands of the Devil's Roar and uncover the locations of the five members of the alliance.

Step 2: Set Foot on Five Islands

Now follow the instructions below to uncover the locations of the five skeletons of the Forsaken Shore Alliance:

  1. Fetcher Farley. Located on top of the western hill at the Fetcher’s Rest island.
  2. Flintlock Bert. Located on the northern shore of the Flintlock Peninsula island.
  3. Ruby Carter. Located under the bridge in the center of the Ruby’s Fall island.
  4. Hepzibah Jones. Located in the center of the Forsaken Brink islands, inside a shelter.
  5. Old Coop. Located in the northern hills of the The Devil’s Thirst island.

You will easily find these islands in your ship's map.

Step 3: Surviving the Volcano

Most of the islands you'll be visiting in the course of the Forsaken Shores DLC are large islands that will surely have active volcanoes. These volcanoes erupt regularly within a certain time range.

As they erupt the volcanic rocks will shoot out into the sky and land all over the islan'ds surface and beyond potentially damaging your ship. So here are a few essential tips on how to survive the volcanic eruptions:

  • If you're approaching the volcanic island while it's in the process of eruption, then just stay away as far as possible until the eruption is over.
  • If the volcano started erupting after you landed on the shore, then either sail back to your ship using the rowboats, or find a cover on the island that will protect you from the falling rocks, such as caves and tunnels.
  • If the eruption is over, stay on guard as very soon it may start erupting again. The periods are random: it can be a long while, but at times it can start erupting again within 10 minutes.


That is all on how to reach volcanic islands in the Forsaken Shores DLC, and for other Sea of Thieves guides at GameSkinny, please see the list below:

Insomnia: The Ark Screen Resolution Bug Fix Fri, 28 Sep 2018 22:40:05 -0400 Jonathan Moore

As much as I like Insomnia: The Ark, it's currently full of aggravating, sometimes game-breaking, bugs and glitches. 

One particularly nagging issue appears when you set your screen resolution to something higher than 1920x1080. Doing so has several consequences, none of which are ideal. This is especially true if you're playing on a 2K or 4K monitor. 

When you start Insomnia: The Ark, the game automatically chooses the "best" screen resolution for your display. But on higher resolution monitors, that's never true 2K or 4K.

Naturally, you'll try fixing that only to find one of the following:

  • You can't click on the in-game menu at all
  • Your mouse cursor is confined to a 1920x1080 box in-game
  • Your cursor moves outside the game window and opens desktop apps, etc. 

Although this glitch was supposed to be patched by launch day, players are still running into it. In this quick guide, I'll lay out a way to get around this issue in a few simple steps. The only downside is that you still won't be able to get 2K or 4K resolutions until an official patch is released. 

How to Fix Insomnia: The Ark's Screen Resolution Issue

Your best bet is this: don't change the default resolution the game chooses when you boot up for the very first time. That completely circumvents the glitch

However, there's a chance you already changed your resolution, that's why you're here. If you have, you might find going back to 1920x1080 doesn't fix anything at all.

The solution is to set the game to fullscreen [in window].

You can also try to re-config the game's .ini file in order to create a custom resolution in either windowed or fullscreen mode. However, the Steam users that have tried this have not had success. 

I've Changed Resolution But I'm Still Stuck

There's also a chance you've changed the resolution by following the steps above OR chosen 1920x1080 fullscreen only to find you can't click anything at all. That's because Insomnia is registering a specific 1920x1080 window somewhere on your monitor -- but the in-game menu isn't in the same area of the screen. 

To get past this, hit "F11". By default, this will window the game further. You'll see the game window and your desktop. Now do the following: 

  • Find the invisible box 
    • Mine was in the upper left quadrant as seen above
  • Pull the Insomnia window into the invisible box
  • Reset the resolution to 1920x1080 and fullscreen [in window]

As of this writing, these are the only current fixes for Insomnia's screen resolution bug when using a 2K or 4K monitor. The developers are aware of this display glitch and are currently working on a patch per notes I received with the game's review code. 

However, there is no firm date on when that official patch will arrive. Until then, you simply won't be able to play the game at anything higher than 1080p. 

How to Skip Those Pesky Downloads in Dragalia Lost Fri, 28 Sep 2018 13:48:07 -0400 Ashley Shankle

Dragalia Lost is exactly what I wanted out of a Nintendo-published mobile title from Granblue Fantasy developer Cygames. It's got actual gameplay, some really nice character art, and plenty of content to play through.

No mobile RPG is perfect, though.

Dragalia Lost is no exception, and it does have a handful of problems both large and small -- the energy system is about as restrictive as the one in Fire Emblem Heroes, summon rates on 5-stars are low as heck, and summons yield a lot more than just characters. Nonetheless, the game is very fun. Mobage (mobile RPG) players know what they are getting into.

What may be considered the game's smallest issue is its habit of constantly prompting the player to download data. Even if your phone or tablet somehow downloads at incredibly high speeds, you're still going to be looking at that download screen.

I don't know about you, but I didn't sign up for a Cygames download simulator.

What you may not know is that you can actually make the constant download prompts a thing of the past; the game does have an option to download all of the its quest scenes and data. You don't have to download data every 10 minutes!

How to Start the Batch Download

  • Tap on the More button at the bottom right
  • Tap Options
  • Tap System
  • Scroll to the bottom
  • Tap Download Settings under the Batch Download

From here, you can choose to either download all of the game's data or to exclude the voices. The differences between these are:

  • All Data downloads all of the game's data to your mobile device, where it will stay until you uninstall Dragalia Lost. This option makes the game take up a fair amount of space on your device but the only download prompts you'll ever get are for patches.

  • Exclude Voices downloads everything but the voices, which you are prompted to download before story quests like usual. The downloads will be smaller and once you close the app, voice files for quests you've completed will be deleted to not take up space. This is the better option if you have limited space on your device.

Once you choose one option and tap the 'Download' button, the game will begin downloading.

If You Want to Use Japanese VAs...

If you're like me and prefer Japanese VAs, I recommend swapping your voice over language first so you don't have to do an extra download. You can do this in the System menu as well.

It's also worth mentioning that the Japanese voices take up more space than the English ones.

On launch day, the batch download size with English voices was over 500mb, while downloading with the Japanese voices took over 600mb. This gap is sure to widen as Dragalia Lost gets updates, so this is something to keep in mind!


The game is just in its infancy but the future looks bright for Dragalia Lost as it's already rushing up the top free games charts on both Google Play and iTunes.

If the record of Cygames is any indication, we're in for some great content updates over the coming years. I can't wait -- but I can wait to sit through more mandatory downloads.

Insomnia: The Ark Recipes & Schematics Locations Guide Thu, 27 Sep 2018 11:15:01 -0400 Jonathan Moore

As you'd expect with any sprawling sci-fi RPG, Insomnia: The Ark is filled to the brim with craftable items. Some are resources used for repairing your weapons and armor, while some are components for explosives and shell casings. 

However, to actually craft any of them, you'll first need to find their recipes and schematics strewn all across Object 6. The locations for many of these recipes and schematics are in out of the way places, so it can take a while to find them all. 

Although currently a work in progress, this guide will show you where to find all of them so you can quickly start using the workbench to craft some of the game's more important items, such as grenades and iron plates. 

The locations below are in sequential order. 

EMP Grenade Schematic

When you arrive at the garage in Vulture's Nest, go to the back of the area and take the elevator down. When you get off, turn left. The recipe will be in the lockers along the left wall, just behind Lashta

Gunpowder Recipe 1

After getting the EMP recipe, turn right and cross the bridge. Keep going straight, go up a set of stairs, and into the next large room.

Turn right and go through the doors in front of you. On the other side, turn right again, go through the weightlifting area, and through another door. 

Turn left and go through the dark barracks area with the beds. Go all the way to the end and turn right. In the nook with all the trash, you'll find the Gunpowder recipe. 

Microchip Device Schematic

From the Gunpowder recipe, go back to the bridge. Turn left and follow the path around until you reach a ramp leading down to the lower level on your right. Go down. 

Go left at the bottom, then right. You'll pass the two men talking in the street. Follow the street as it curves left and go into the door straight ahead. Inside, you'll find a dark engineering bay with a machine in the middle (it looks like a cross). 

The microchip device schematic will be in one of the shelves in the wall behind the machine. 

RGD Grenade Schematic

When you arrive at Outpost B-10/2 (after receiving your first orders from Captain Reibel), go straight ahead toward the barricade ahead, where angry Ghetters are throwing firebombs at the soldiers. 

Turn right and go toward Lieutenant Yarva, who is standing on stairs near the barricade. To her right are two tables with comms equipment. You will find this schematic there. 

Handmade Casings Recipe

You'll find this recipe in The Square of Glory, a story location that can't be missed. When you arrive in the area, select Square of Glory Station from the options. When you spawn, go straight and take the first right (underneath the hanging, sparking wires). 

Go straight and to the end of the area. There will be a wall with a tall red door to your right, a man sleeping on a mattress in the middle, and a door to your left with junk piled around it. Go into the left door and examine the junk pile to the right of Cron to find this recipe. 

Gun Powder Recipe 2

This recipe can be found in The Square of Glory's Movie Theater area. When you arrive in the area, select Movie Theater from the options. When you spawn, follow the path to the left and take your first left

Go right, past the dining area and down the hall. Go through the door at the end and into the theater itself. Go to the fifth aisle on the right -- it's on the fourth seat down

Sprinter-M Stimulant Recipe

From the Gun Powder 2 recipe in the movie theater, back track to the purple dining room. Take a right and go toward the Balls of Fun pleasure area. 

Go toward the bar. Halfway down the hallway on the right side you'll see a guy named Vis drinking his sorrows away. Exhaust his dialogue options, and he'll give you some "leftovers from the war". One of which is the Sprinter-M Stimulant recipe. 

Weapons Parts Schematic 1

Eventually you'll make it back to Reservation D-106 looking for Thyper. You could go here earlier, but it's just as easy to come back on the Bane of Mills quest. 

Go to the Administration building in the center of the area. Go to the second floor and find the Commissar. Across from his desk is a door. Go out onto the balcony and turn right. The schematic will be on the second chair at the end of the balcony. 

18.5mm Cartridges Recipe

This recipe is also in Reservation D-106. Go to Wanda's Studio in the upper left part of the map. When looking at her studio from the outside, go right, toward the large pile of grey crates

Take the stairs to the left and go right at the top. There will be a door to your right with a yellow poster on the wall next to it. Go inside and look for the backpack against the right wall

You'll find the recipe inside.  

Parts Diagram

From the 18.55mm Cartridges recipe, go up the stairs behind you and follow the path all the way down. Go to the upper level

There, turn right and go all the way down the hallway. Once you reach the room at the end, turn right and the Parts Diagram will be on the red control station against the wall. 

Weapons Parts Schematic 2

From the Parts Diagram above, fight your way into Thyper's apartment during the Bane of Mills questline. Once you've cleared it out, go to the firing range inside the apartment. 

There will be a table among all the scrap in the back of the room. This schematic will be on the table

Handmade Bullets Recipe

After you've met the mercenary in training room in Thyper's apartment, you'll receive a keycard to get into Thyper's living quarters

As soon as you enter the door, turn left. The recipe will be on the table

GS90 Grenade Schematic

This schematic is a bit different than the rest. As you travel from location to location, you'll come across (seemingly) random encounters in the world. 

As I was traveling between D-106 and The Square of Glory delivering a package from Voznek to Hastir, I came across an encounter where a battalion of soldiers was cleaning up a Crioma Bloom -- and they urged me to leave the area. 

If you come across this encounter, stay and look to the right just as you enter (before you cross the bridge). There will be a pile of junk in the corner with this schematic in it. 

Note: If I find this schematic in a more concrete location in Insomnia, I'll update this guide with that information. 


There are dozens more recipes and schematics to be found in Insomnia: The Ark. As we find more, we'll be constantly updating this guide, so be sure to bookmark it for quick reference. 

If you find any recipes or schematics that we don't have here, let us know where they are by leaving a comment below. We'll add them and credit you with the find. 

Pathfinder: Kingmaker Complete Class Guide Wed, 26 Sep 2018 17:28:24 -0400 Ty Arthur

Converting the Pathfinder tabletop rules to a single player cRPG for the first time, Kingmaker has no shortage of class options.

All the classes are quite similar to the pen and paper version of Pathfinder, so if you've been rolling d20s with your friends for years you already know the basics of what to expect.

In our full Pathfinder: Kingmaker class guide below, we break down each main class, as well as the three alternate class archetypes that swap out key features for more customization.

Like with the original Baldur's Gate, the game is over if the main character dies in Kingmaker, so survivability should be your focus. For new players, going with a fighter or barbarian is a good option. If you pick something squishy like a wizard or halfling bard, make sure to stay in the back row away from melee combat.

Starting companions

if you are looking for a well rounded party with no duplicate classes, companions are available from the beginning of the game with these starting classes:

  • Barbarian (Amiri)
  • Bard (Linzi)
  • Cleric (Harrim)
  • Fighter (Valerie)
  • Inquisitor (Jaethal)

Keep in mind however that the party splits in two early on based on your alignment and decisions in the prologue, so you can't have all the party members together at once.  

Primary Class: Alchemist

Main features: Throw Anything, Poison Resistance, Mutagen, Bomb

High saves: Fortitude and Reflex

Class skills: Trickery, Knowledge (Arcana), Knowledge (World), Perception, Use Magic Device

Alchemist is a hybrid class offering both spells and mutagens for temporarily increasing the physical stats, making this a great well-rounded option for melee or ranged combat.

The main draw here is the bomb feature, which can be changed and improved as you level up and gives a constant stream of steady damage-dealing opportunities from a distance.


This subclass gains martial weapon proficiency and replaces poison resistance with the precise bomb ability, so your bombs don't affect allies. This is critical when you are throwing bombs into crowds.


A more evil version of the class, Vivisectionist loses the bomb ability entirely and replaces it with sneak attack, leading to a rogue/alchemist hybrid based on dealing high damage output while hiding ins shadows.


More focused on healing, this sub-class replaces poison resistance with infused curative, which lets you use status effect removing infusions on other party members.

Primary Class: Barbarian

Main features: Fast Movement, Rage

High saves: Fortitude

Class skills: Athletics, Mobility, Lore (Nature), Perception, Persuasion

Barbarians are all about front line combat, activating rage and wading into melee. They gain new powers while raging at higher levels, and eventually get danger sense to avoid traps and damage reduction to act as the party tank.

Armored Hulk

An even tankier version of the barbarian, this sub-class gets heavy armor proficiency, and swaps out fast movement for bonuses to CMD and speed while wearing heavier armor.

Mad Dog

The mad dog doesn't get the normal rage ability until level 4, and gains fewer rage powers. In exchange, this version of the barbarian gets an animal companion and gains bonuses in combat when you fight alongside that companion.

Invulnerable Rager

Instead of danger sense to avoid traps, this sub-class gets damage reduction immediately, and gains resistance to fire and cold damage starting at third level.

Primary Class: Bard

Main features: Cantrips, Bardic Knowledge, Inspire Courage, Detect Magic

High saves: Will and Reflex

Class skills: All skills

The bard is your jack-of-all-trades class, with some minor spellcasting powers, the ability to buff the rest of the party, and big bonuses to skill checks.

If you want to do well on Knowledge checks and stay out of harm's way, bard is a good class to pick. Note that if you are going the chaotic good route, you can just use Linzi as your bard instead.


Instead of inspiring courage in other party members, the archaeologist gets luck bonuses on nearly all rolls.


This archetype swaps out the bardic knowledge feature for a bonus to Nature Lore rolls, and also gains the ability to deal sonic damage with a thunderbolt starting at third level.

Flame Dancer

Beginning at third level, the flame dancer gains abilities related to fire, such as granting fire resistance to allies. Eventually this archetype adds fire-related powers such as fireball to his list of available spells.

Primary Class: Cleric

Main features: Channel Energy, Divine Spells, Domain Selection, Detect Magic

High saves: Fortitude and Will

Class skills: Knowledge (Arcana), Knowledge (World), Lore (Religion), Persuasion

A cleric's focus can vary widely depending on their deity, but in general act as the healers and secondary front line fighters.

If you want to be able to deal with undead, help out the party, and still swing a mace at the bad guys, this is your best pick.


This archetype is more martial-focused and gains bonus fighter feats every five levels.

Herald Caller

The herald caller can swap out prepared spells to instead summon creatures associated with their deity.


The opposite of the crusader, this archetype loses weapon and armor proficiency and instead focuses on gaining bonuses through spells.

Primary Class: Druid

Main features: Nature Sense, Spontaneous Summoning, Nature Bond, Wild Shape, Detect Magic

High saves: Fortitude and Will

Class skills: Lore (Nature), Knowledge (World), Knowledge (Arcana), Perception, Athletics

The secondary healing class, druids have versatile spellcasting abilities, can summon magical allies, and eventually gain the ability to take on animal or elemental forms during combat.

Blight Druid

Focused on the destructive powers of decay, this archetype gains blight bond instead of nature bond, and eventually causes any enemies standing nearby to become automatically sickened during combat.

Defender Of The True World

This variant on the druid is focused around battling the fey, gaining damage bonuses against the children of the first world. This can be a big help in certain parts of the game where fey are plentiful enemies.


The opposite of the defender of the true world, this archteype revolves around supporting the fey. This sub-class gets fewer wild shape abilities, and instead gains enchantment and illusion spells. The feyspeaker also uses charisma instead of wisdom for spellcasting.

Primary Class: Fighter

Main features: Bonus Combat Feats, Bravery, Armor Training, Weapon Training

High saves: Fortitude

Class skills: Athletics, Knowledge (World), Lore (Nature), Persuasion

If you aren't sure what to pick, fighter is probably the best starting option due to the high hit points and ability to use the heaviest weapons and armor.

Fighters consistently gain bonuses to all armor and weapon options, so they scale well in combat-focused situations.

Aldori Defender

Instead of armor training, this archetype gains the defensive parry skill, which gives an armor class bonus when making full attacks with a sword.

Tower Shield Specialist

Instead of weapon training, this archetype gains major defensive bonuses while equipped with a tower shield, including the ability to defend allies from burst spells.

Two-Handed Fighter

Exactly what it sounds like, this fighter ditches armor training and instead gets big bonuses when wielding a two-handed weapon.

Primary Class: Inquisitor

Main features: Orisons, Stern Gaze, Detect Magic, Judgment

High saves: Fortitude and Will

Class skills: All skills

Somewhat like a hybrid of cleric and fighter, the inquisitor has fewer spell options, but gains bonuses to intimidation and pronounce judgment on specific enemies to gain bonuses in combat.

The inquisitor is focused on teamwork in combat as well, and can essentially give other party members free teamwork feats when they are in close proximity.

Monster Tactician  

Instead of the judgment ability, this archetype gains the ability to cast summon monster spells at each level.

Tactical Leader

This archetype loses stern gave and instead focuses on diplomacy over intimidation.

Sacred Hunstmaster

Instead of judgment, the huntsmaster gains an animal companion and has a bigger focus on teamwork feats to use with that companion.

Primary Class: Magus

Main features: Arcane Pool, Spell Combat, Detect Magic

High saves: Fortitude and Will

Class skills: Athletics, Knowledge (Arcana), Knowledge (World), Persuasion, Use Magic Device

A hybrid of fighter and wizard, the magus can channel spell energy to grant bonuses in combat, and can both cast spells and attack with a melee weapon in the same round.

Eldritch Scion

Essentially the sorcerer version of a magus, the eldritch scion gains arcane pool points based on charisma instead of intelligence.

Sword Saint

The sword saint is more focused on the melee side than the magic side, primarily using mystical abilities to pump up sword attacks. This archetype also gains access to some fighter-only features (at a slower rate than a normal fighter).

Eldritch Archer

This is essentially like the base magus, but using ranged attacks instead of a sword.

Primary Class: Monk

Main features: Flurry Of Blows, Improved Unarmed Strike, Stunning Fist, Armor Class Bonus, Ki Powers

High saves: Fortitude and Reflex

Class skills: Athletics, Mobility, Stealth, Knowledge (World), Lore (Religion), Perception, Persuasion

Monks are focused on up close combat but without any weapons or armor. They gain increasing abilities over time it they remain unarmored and don't equip melee weapons.

Eventually their standard fist attacks take on magical qualities, essentially bypassing the need for magic weapons.

Scaled Fist

Very similar to the base monk class, scaled fist swaps out the bonus feats available to grant access to feats like crane style and dragon style.


Somewhat of a monk/bard hybrid, the sensei gains the ability to grant bonuses to other party members like a bard's inspire courage power.

Traditional Monk

This archetype loses the ability to choose specific ki powers when leveling up, but gains larger bonuses from the powers it can take.

Primary Class: Paladin

Main features: Smite Evil, Divine Grace, Lay On Hands, Mercy, Aura Of Courage

High saves: Fortitude and Will

Class skills: Knowledge (Arcana), Knowledge (World), Lore (Nature), Lore (Religion), Persuasion

Another fighter/cleric hybrid, the paladin is restricted to lawful good alignment and must behave selflessly to use their powers.

They gain the ability to heal and remove negative status effects over time by adding mercies to their lay on hands power.

Divine Hunter

Instead of focusing on a sword and shield style, this archetype gains access to ranged combat feats and abilities.


The hospitaler gains additional healing abilities at the cost of a weakened smite evil feature.

Divine Guardian

The divine guardian archetype focuses on healing and guarding one particular party member at a time, rather than the group as a whole.

Primary Class: Ranger

Main features: Favored Enemy, Favored Terrain, Hunter's Bond

High saves: Fortitude and Reflex

Class skills: Athletics, Stealth, Knowledge (Arcana), Knowledge (World), Lore (Nature), Perception, Persuasion

The big draw to the ranger is the ability to focus on specific types of enemies, gaining big bonuses against those creatures.


Instead of taking a favored enemy, the freebooter can choose one enemy at a time to gain a bonus against, and grants that bonus to the whole party.


The flamewarden focuses on adding flame effects to melee weapons, and eventually swaps out some spells for fire-focused ones such as fireball.


The lightning version of the flamewarden, this archetype is also focused on ranged weapons over melee attacks.

Primary Class: Rogue

Main features: Sneak Attack, Trapfinding, Danger Sense

High saves: Reflex

Class skills: Mobility, Athletics, Persuasion, Trickery, Knowledge (World), Perception, Stealth, Use Magic Device

Your classic scoundrel, the rogue is all about disarming traps and dealing extra damage while remaining unseen.

Eldritch Scoundrel

This archetype slows down the sneak attack damage progression, but gains access to spells in exchange.

Knife Master

Instead of danger sense, the knife master gains a bonus against light blade attacks. Critically, this archetype loses trap finding, but rolls d8s for damage instead of d6s when using sneak attacks.


Instead of danger sense and trap finding, the thug focuses on demoralizing and intimidating opponents in combat.

Primary Class: Sorcerer

Main features: Spells, Bloodline, Detect Magic

High saves: Will

Class skills: Knowledge (Arcana), Persuasion, Use Magic Device

This charisma-based class has access to fewer spells than the wizard, but can cast them more times per day. You can also tweak your focus based on what bloodline you select.

If you want to cast lots of combat spells every day, this is the class to pick.

Empyreal Sorcerer

This archetype uses wisdom instead of charisma for spellcasting, and gains access to some cleric-style abilities like flame strike.

Sylvan Sorcerer

This archetype is a mashup of druid and sorcerer, gaining access to an animal companion and abilities like woodland stride.

Sage Sorcerer

This version of the sorcerer uses intelligence instead of charisma, and gains access to wizard abilities like magic missile and dimension door.

Primary Class: Wizard

Main features: Spells, Specialist School, Arcane Bond, Detect Magic

High saves: Will

Class skills: 

This is the classic spellcaster, using intelligence to channel magic. They have access to a much broader range of spells than the sorcerer, but can cast fewer spells per day.

Arcane Bomber

A mashup of wizard and alchemist, this archetype gains access to the bomb feature.

Thassilonian Specialist

This is the hyper focused version of the specialist wizard, ditching abilities from opposing schools of magic to get bonuses to a smaller number of schools.

Scroll Savant

The scroll savant loses access to bonus wizard feats every five levels, but instead gains increased powers when casting spells from scrolls.

What's your favorite Pathfinder class, and what sort of character do you intend to play while conquering the Stolen Lands? Sound off in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Pathfinder: Kingmaker guides here on GameSkinny!

Breathedge Early Access Guide: From Your First Scrapper to Suitcase Wed, 26 Sep 2018 16:53:25 -0400 Oscar Gonzalez

Unlike other survival games out there, Breathedge doesn't pit players against zombies or other monsters, but rather they fight against the clock. The oxygen clock, that is. As the case, players will have to readjust their behavior in order to reach the end of the first chapter available in the Steam Early Access.

Since outer space is so big (duh), it's easy to get frustrated with all there is to gather and explore. This guide will explain what to focus on first, how to build the most important tool in the game and where to find the blueprints to create the equipment that will help explore the farther areas in the chapter. 

Start Small

After investigating your room and the Processor, step out into space and proceed with the gathering.

Ignore the big chunks of metal and ice that float around during your initial excursions as you don't have a Scrapper to break those things apart. Focus instead on the smaller objects floating right around the door: nutritious goo, ice and metal.

Of the three, ice and metal will be the priority since ice makes water needed to quench your thirst as well combine with the goo to make nutrition package for when you're hungry although thirst depletes at a faster rate.

Metal is also important since it will help build the Scrapper. Gather these three resources in short trips in order to have enough water, food and a Scrapper or two to start off with.

How to make the Scrapper

The Scrapper is the most important tool to build in the early game. Once built it can be used to break apart the bigger balls of metal and other resources.

Where the Scrapper really comes into play are the other containers floating in space. Busting these containers open will reveal other important resources such as plastic, rubber and batteries.

  • The blueprint will be available once you create and use the Cryptographic Debugging Station on the Interphone
  • Grab four pieces of metal floating around the ship (there's no need to venture that far)
  • Use the Processor to make the Scrapper

The Search for More Air

Heading down from your room will lead to two important areas. The first is a spot where the "largest condom in the world" is located. Surprisingly, condoms do more than make sex safe since they're used to increase your oxygen reservoir as an oxygen balloon. This increases your oxygen capacity by 50.

When you explore the farther areas, an upgraded oxygen balloon blueprint can be found giving you even more air to breathe. This area also has the oxygen candle that can provide a boost of air when needed and will be used to help build the next important item.

Further down from large condom is an oxygen station. Not only will this room act as a rest stop to refill your air, but also the oxygen station blueprint is available here. These stations can be deployed anywhere in space and can, like that room, act as a pit stop to get more air.

Before you leave, also check the box with the light right next to the door into the oxygen room. There's a Scanner and examining it will give you the blueprint to build the tool. Use the Scanner to learn how to build more equipment needed for the chapter. 

Where to Find Your First Suitcase

At this point you'll be exploring more, which means your inventory space is probably getting a little tight.

Going straight from the door where the oxygen station was found is another wreckage some distances away.

It's here that there will several stacks of boxes. Use the Scrapper on them and one will contain a suitcase, which will act as a storage container you can carry with you providing even more space to carry equipment and resources.  

You Have the Power

Batteries are important to create the later equipment needed to complete the chapter. Several can be found in containers and radios found in multiple areas.

To make your own batteries in the Processor, you need the blueprint and  alkali, which can be found on asteroids.

You'll need a Grabber to extract alkali from asteroids. The blueprint for the Grabber becomes available once you examine your grandfather's back scratcher next to the bed. 


Acquiring these tools and pieces of equipment will make the rest of the chapter a breeze. A long breeze of about four hours or so. Expect to see Breathedge chapter two by the end of the year, look for guides on further chapters here on GameSkinny!

The Conjuring House Guide: Getting Past Robert & the Game Breaking Bug Wed, 26 Sep 2018 14:56:14 -0400 Kenneth Seward Jr.

One of the worst things a gamer can experience is a game breaking bug. Having to start a game over – possibly wasting hours of play time – because of something out of your hands is incredibly frustrating. This is certainly the case with The Conjuring House, a survival horror game with a decent number of glitches and bugs.

The Conjuring House has one bug that’ll ruin things early on. The fact that it happens so soon lessens the sting of a restart. Still, it does hinder one’s enjoyment of the game; not only will players have to replay portions of The Conjuring House, they’ll also have to re-watch the cutscenes that preceded the game breaking bug.

Thankfully, I’ve outlined a way to avoid this situation below.

Note: To describe the bug, I’ll need to share some information about The Conjuring House’s story. It won’t be enough to spoil anything important; I’ll be a vague as possible. That said, I wanted to give a heads up to those who want to go in completely blind.

Following Robert

In the Conjuring House, the main protagonist starts out searching for lost members of a paranormal research group sent there to investigate the house’s strange happenings. Unfortunately, things went awry, prompting our would-be hero to go looking for them. Fast forward about thirty minutes into the game (the mileage varies) and the story will have you following a ghost named Robert.

Robert will appear two times early on. The second time you see him, it’ll be at the end of a long hallway; you’ll know it by the brief interaction, ending with a raven flying through a window. Afterwards, he’ll lead you to a locked door. This is where the game breaking bug comes in.

Trapped in a Room

I recommend saving your game before opening the door. That way, if the bug is triggered, you won’t have to replay much to get back here.

Upon entering the room, you’ll see a table with a flashlight, a blood covered wall, and an open door at the opposite end. Walking up to the table and grabbing the flashlight will trigger a cutscene, starting the Padlock Quest.

After assessing the number written in blood, the camera will spin around as a window is slammed shut.

At this point, Robert will appear in the opposite corner of the room and bang his head against the wall. This is the part of the game that can glitch if you’re not careful.

Normally, you’d slowly walk up to Robert as the nameless protagonist calls out to him. Once you get close enough to seemingly reach out and touch him, the game will cue a cutscene. If everything goes well, you’ll be knocked to floor and the door you used to enter the room from will open.

If the game bugs out, you’ll only see half the cutscene – you won’t be pushed away – and both doors will remain locked, forcing you to restart the game.

If the bug is triggered, go ahead and restart the game. Hopefully, you remembered to save before entering the room. Go through the motions of following Robert into the room like before. Only this time, when he starts banging his head against the wall, turn off your flashlight.

For some reason, turning off the flashlight is the only way to circumvent this bug. When you approach Robert like normal, the entire cutscene should play out, allowing you to escape the room.

A few things to note

The Conjuring House doesn’t always crap out here. I’m sure plenty of people will play through this section and never have an issue. As someone who’s replayed this part over and over, I can say that the game glitched about half the time.

What I found out, though, was that if it glitched once, it’ll continue to do so even when loading up a previous save point. I found that the only was to correct this was with the flashlight trick or a complete restart of the game. As in, from the beginning.

Another thing to note is that the flashlight trick doesn’t always work. On one occasion, I had to redo that part three times before the trick would allow me to progress. Every other time it worked right away, though. The door flew open and a nice "Get Out" message was left behind. 

Lastly, The Conjuring House has seen several updates since we received our code. It’s also been updated since launching yesterday. It’s possible that this issue has or will be addressed soon.

The good news is that, with the above information, you should be able to progress in the offhand chance that the bug shows it's ugly mug!


Now you're fully equipped to circumvent one of The Conjuring House's "deadly" bugs. Hopefully, this issue, and some of the others plaguing this game, will be addressed in the near future.

In the meantime, feel free to check out our review of The Conjuring House here, as well as our other guides.  

Pathfinder: Kingmaker Won't Load After Install Fix Tue, 25 Sep 2018 15:32:40 -0400 Jonathan Moore

The first CRPG set in the celebrated Pathfinder universe is finally out. But before you can settle down and start adventuring, you're going to have to load Pathfinder:Kingmaker, a seemingly easy task that's proving difficult for some early players. 

If you're one of the unlucky few who's been stuck on the game's loading screen since you installed it, know that the developers have said they are working on an official fix. 

However, as of this writing, they haven't managed to push one out. So in lieu of that official patch, I've done a little bit of digging for some answers. While there's no guarantee these tips will work (as it seems these "solutions" are currently hit or miss), it can't hurt to give them a try. 

Pathfinder Takes a Long Time to Load

The very first thing you should know is that Pathfinder: Kingmaker takes an absurdly long time to load for some users. In fact, you may not even be experiencing a bug or glitch, but instead and ungodly long load time of four minutes or more. 

Taking a look at the game's Steam forum, it appears that even if you have the game installed on an SSD, the load times can be excruciatingly long. However, if you've been loading for 10 minutes or more -- especially with your load bar at 100% -- you're probably stuck

Before trying the fixes below

Before scrolling down and trying the solutions below, close the program and re-load.

Don't click anything or touch your keyboard as the game loads. Some users who have experienced the bug and tried this have gotten the game to load fine.  

Run Win 7 Compatibility & Change Time Zone

Steam user Wawi has worked out a potential fix that requires a bit of finesse to pull off. Although it, as of now, hasn't been confirmed to work for any other players, Wawi says they got the game to start after loading by following these steps: 

  • Run the .exe in compatibility with Win7 
  • Change your computer's timezone, date, and time to that of your computer's locale 

The second option is only applicable if your computer is set to a different locale from your local region.

How to Run in Win 7 Compatibility Mode

Here's how you can run Pathfinder: Kingmaker in Windows 7 compatibility mode if you are using Windows 8 or 10:

  1. Right-click Pathfinder: Kingmaker in your Steam library
  2. Click Properties
  3. Click the Local Files tab
  4. Click the Browse Local Files button
  5. Right-click the game's .exe file
  6. Click Properties
  7. Click the Compatibility tab
  8. Check the 'Run this program in compatibility mode for:' box
  9. Choose Windows 7 from the drop-down menu
  10. Click Apply or OK to apply the compatibility changes

Try once more to launch the game once you have completed these steps.

How to Change Your Time Zone

Changing your timezone is easy on Windows 10.

Right-click on the clock on your task bar and click Adjust date/time.

From here you can change your computer's timezone to your locale's timezone -- so if you've been playing some Japanese-locale games and have changed yours up, set your time to UTC+09 or whatever locale you have your PC set to.

For reference, here are the timezones for the United States:

  • Eastern Daylight Time (GMT -4)
  • Central Daylight Time (GMT -5)
  • Mountain Daylight Time (GMT -6)
  • Pacific Daylight Time (GMT -7)
  • Alaska Daylight Time (GMT -8)
  • Hawaii-Aleutian Standard Time (GMT -10)

If These Solutions Don't Work

If none of these potential fixes get Pathfinder: Kingmaker up and running for you, the developers would like you to send them your logs. You should include: 

  • All of your .txt files
  • All of your .log files

Per the developer, you should be able to find these files in C:/Users/[username]/Appdata/LocalLow/Owlcat Games/Pathfinder Kingmaker. If you cannot find them there, you may need to enable logging. You can do so by: 

  • Right clicking on Pathfinder: Kingmaker in your Steam library
  • Choosing "Properties" at the bottom of the drop down menu
  • Clicking "Set Launch Options" under the "General" tab
  • Typing "logging" in the text field and hitting OK. 

Once you have the .txt and .log files, send them to or

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Pathfinder: Kingmaker guides, as well as our review of the highly-anticipated CRPG. 

The Conjuring House Guide: Surviving The Troublesome Padlock Quest Tue, 25 Sep 2018 03:15:01 -0400 Kenneth Seward Jr.

The Conjuring House can be a difficult game to complete. This fact has less to do with the house’s demonic denizens and more to do with the random nature of its puzzles.

Offering a non-linear progression style, The Conjuring House allows players to tackle certain quests as they see fit. There are times, however, when a certain quest (and its accompanying puzzle) will need to be addressed in accordance with the game’s plot.

To keep the non-linear aspect going, these puzzles will sport random elements; though the solution will be similar each time, the actual answer may differ.

The Padlock Quest, which tasks players with finding a four-digit code written in blood, is a perfect example of this. This early quest is tricky for two reasons.

The first is that the numbers are always different – not just from one playthrough to the next, but between saves as well. If you saved your game after finding two numbers but die shortly after finding the third, the combo changes. The game will keep the first two (since you were able to save) and change the third.

The second issue is that the locations of each number also change. The good news: I’ve compiled a list of the places these bloody numbers can spawn.

Note: Aside from the first number’s location, the spawn points don’t follow any real order. I'm merely listing them based on their proximity to the quest’s starting point -- not when the padlock is found, but when the game allows the player to search for the code.

The First Number in the Padlock Quest

The first number is the only number that is always in the same place.

There’s a point in The Conjuring House when you’re forced to follow a ghost into a locked room; there will be a mini-cutscene that ends with a raven crashing through a window right before you get to the door.

Here you’ll find the first number painted on the far wall under a bloody padlock, both of which are illuminated by a flashlight. This is a major part of the story (and where the quest starts) so there’s no way to miss it.

Spawn Points for Numbers 2 & 3

Spawn Point 1

After finding the first number and escaping the room, you’ll need to flee from a demon. Once that ordeal is over, it’s time to exit the safe room to search for the second number.

I recommend heading toward the room with the lit fireplace; it has the rickety chandelier, creepy dolls on an unkempt couch, multiple paintings, and several chairs.

Just head through the door on the left, with the safe room to your back. As soon as you walk in, the spawn point will be straight ahead – above and to the right of the door directly in front of you.

Spawn Point 2

From there, head through the door on the right (right past the couch). Turn to the right and go through the door on the left, through the room with the unlit fireplace.

Go through the door in front of you and down the long hallway. Continue going, moving through the adjacent halls until you come to another couch – it’ll be on the right with a table to the left.

The spawn point here will be above the couch and to the left of the painting.

Spawn Point 3

Continuing down this hallway, you’ll end up in the hallway where the padlocked door is.

Instead of going to the door, head in the opposite direction and into the bathroom on the right.

Turn right and shine your flashlight on the wall to (hopefully) reveal a number in this spawn point.

Spawn Point 4

After you leave the bathroom, head back by the couch/second spawn point in the hall, take the door to the right.

At the end of this hallway is the second safe room. Before you get to that though, there’s a table on the right. The spawn point is right above the table; you’ll need your flashlight to see it.

Spawn Point 5

Standing in front of the table, turn around and run down this hallway. At the end, there will be an open area on the right.

It’ll be the one with the gramophone, a chair with another creepy doll, and three adjacent windows.

The spawn point is on the wall to the left of the creepy doll.

Spawn Point 6 (The Last Spawn Point)

From here, turn around and go back into the hallway.

Turn right and shine your light on the far wall, revealing the final spawn point.

As you can see, there are six different places for the numbers to spawn. Thankfully, you only need three of them to be correct (the first number is given to you).

One thing you’ll want to do is save after finding each number or else you’ll have to re-check each spot upon loading your game. 

Padlock Quest Glitch

Playing through the Padlock Quest, there seemed to be a one pesky glitch that kept the last number from spawning. I'll take a look at it below and tell you how to get past it. 

Finding a Certain Window After Finding the First Number

To find this window, head back to the hallway with the couch/second spawn point. Head to the right of the couch (when standing in front of it) and follow the hall to the left.

You’ll see a little area to the left with a window, one chair, and two lamps (on either wall). Walk up to the window to cue a creepy cutscene and a lamp will turn on, letting you know you’re at the right place. 

I’d recommend learning how to get to these places before starting the Padlock Quest.

This is possible after you’ve acquired the second key, which allows you to access each area mentioned above. Just avoid the first number area by not following the ghost into the locked room; you’ll know which encounter I’m speaking about when it happens.

Once you’ve learned where these places are, finding each number shouldn’t be too difficult. Completing the puzzle is another story, though; not only will you need to put the numbers in the right order once found (their order is always random) , you’ll have to occasionally flee from the demon that haunts the Conjuring House.

Reaching one of the two available safe rooms is the only way to survive. Once she leaves, it’s back to finding the bloody numbers.


The "Final" Spawn Point


Finding the final padlock number proved rather challenging. So much so, that I reached out to Rym Games (via my PR contact) to see if there were any other known glitches. The answer I got back was odd.

Apparently, the last number won’t show up on the walls in the normal locations. Instead one would need to grab the game's third key found in a safe (I’ve detailed how below). He also said that there are more than six spawnable locations in the house.

The thing is, another writer and I both saw all three numbers on walls during a single playthrough. And none of them were in any other place than what I’ve mentioned above.

There have been two updates since we received our codes for The Conjuring House. So, the Padlock Quest might have changed/been altered after our initial playthroughs; we were able to get past this section without using the key.

That said, I’ve since restarted the game and gone back through this section multiple times. I still couldn’t get the second and third numbers to spawn in any locations other than what’s listed above. I was able to get the fourth to spawn in a new location though…the one specified by the dev.

The first thing you’ll want to do, after finding the other numbers, is to head back to the hallway with the padlocked door. Again, you’ll go towards the bathroom, passing it on your right. At the end of the hallway will be a door (also on the right) that leads to the library. Once inside, you’ll want to head all the way to back left corner of the room where the safe is. Shine your flashlight above it to get the code to unlock the it and grab the key inside.

From here, you’ll want to go back out of the room and head towards Spawn Point 4. With your back against the table, you’ll walk down (like you’re going to Spawn Point 5) stopping at the first door on the right. You’ll be able to unlock it with your newly acquired key. Once inside, head to the left to the back of the room. There will be a “statue” on the left that’s covered by a white sheet. 

Upon its removal, and after a brief scare, you’ll find the last number.


That's all you need to know about completing the Padlock Quest in The Conjuring House. Although the numbers are mostly random, this guide should give you the tools necessary to get past the quest and move forward in the story. 

Be sure to check out our review of The Conjuring House here, as well as our other guides. 

NBA2K19 MyCareer Guide: Leveling Up Quickly Without Spending Real Money Mon, 24 Sep 2018 18:25:33 -0400 RobertPIngram

So, you launched up NBA 2K19's MyCareer mode, created the world’s greatest undrafted rookie, and now it’s time to take to the hardwood and show what you’re made of. There’s only one problem – you’re not actually any good. Your created pro comes out of the creation engine as a lowly 60-rated player, which means that whenever he’s on the court, he can count on being the worst player out there. For a game mode where you can only control one player, this is not ideal.

While the game does offer the opportunity to purchase VC to quickly improve, and those who purchased the $100 version at launch can begin their careers in the mid-70’s, if you’re not looking to break the bank just to learn how to hit a bank shot, you'll have to master leveling your player up quickly on the cheap.

Earn Your Badges

When you create your character, part of choosing a primary and secondary skill are the badges they award you. While these don’t provide benefits initially, they are a rapid way to improve your player and unlock new abilities which make your life easier. Check out the badges page of your pro to see what’s available to him. Badges are unlocked in two ways. First, you can complete tasks relevant to the badge during games, or you can participate in drills designed to improve the relevant skills. Once you’ve earned enough experience on a given badge it unlocks, granting your player new tricks to use on the court.

Making the Grade

Every game you play your teammates are watching you and judging you, and they’re not a particularly kind audience. Your teammates aren’t just an abstract concept to worry about, either, as their grade serves as a modifier to your earnings. Happy teammates mean more virtual currency to spend on becoming the kind of player who belongs on an NBA court. If you play selfishly, chucking up bad shots or making hero drives to try to pad your stat line, expect your teammate grade to suffer. Instead, particularly early in your career when everyone around you is more deserving of the big moment, play unselfishly to speed up your development.

  • When in doubt, pass the ball. Making a good pass is an easy way to get a small boost to your grade, and also means you don’t have the opportunity to earn a negative mark.
  • Keep things moving on offense. Holding onto the ball with no signs of offense can get you dinged. This can be frustrating, particularly in situations like holding for a last shot only for your teammates to get mad you aren’t forcing things, but it’s important to know so you avoid picking up dumb negatives.
  • Don’t be a chucker. If you have an open look, you get rewarded even if you miss. Throw up a shot under heavy contest from the opposition, on the other hand, and your grade is going down.
  • Screens are your friend. Whether you are on the ball or off, a screen is a useful tool in the box. Helping to screen an opponent gives teammates clean looks, while calling for a screen offers both the breathing room to get off a shot or an opportunity to hit the screener on a roll for an assist.
  • Avoid dishing the ball into heavy traffic. Turnovers are a massive hit to your grade, and it gets worse if the opposition scores off your bad play, so err on the side of not forcing the difficult ball. This is particularly important early in your NBA career, when your minutes are likely limited, leaving you less time to make amends.
  • Hit open spaces for each praise. Just finding an open spot on the floor can earn you a bump for good spacing if your team uses it well.
  • Don’t sleep on the defensive end. Getting beat for a bucket usually leads to a defensive breakdown which is a massive shift of your grade in the wrong direction.
  • Defensive posture and raising a hand up is a safe bet. By keeping your man in front of you with a hand in his face, you make it as difficult as possible to get clean looks. Particularly when you are new to defending, sometimes avoiding disaster is good enough to keep your grade up.
  • Don’t get spam happy with the steal button. Learning to time steals is an important skill for certain builds of guards, but if you just hammer steal over and over like you’re playing NBA Jam, you’ll be riding the pine in foul trouble before you know it.

Signing Your First Contract

Following the end of your run overseas and in the G-League, you finally get the opportunity for a cameo appearance in the NBA. After that game, the off-season begins and you’re in a position to sign on with an NBA team. Your contract is a vital part of developing your player, as it's money in your pocket to spend on new skills. There are a few things to keep in mind when negotiating your first contract.

The first tip is to not care where you play, if possible. If you’re really wedded to suiting up for your favorite team, by all means, do it. Games are here to be fun. However, limiting yourself to just one team does greatly reduce your negotiating ability. Your contract is negotiated in a simple process where you go back and forth a couple times, choosing wages, contract length, minutes and teammate grade bonuses. If you’re wedded to a team, you’ll have to be a bit conservative. You can angle for a bit more money, but push too hard and they’ll leave the table.

If you’re less tied to a given team, you have thirty possible teams to play for, so you can afford some more ambitious efforts as there are likely at least a few comparable offers at the top of your list.

It’s easy to see the benefit of your wages and bonus, but don’t overlook your contract length and playing time. Remember that playing well also earns you VC, so a team offering a slightly higher wage packet but with significantly lower minutes doesn’t just mean less playing time, you may even develop slower as your loss of minutes cancels out the higher wage.

Avoid locking yourself down in a long-term contract your first time. Your wages are not going to be great, but your goal is to develop greatly over the season, so ideally you’d like to be back on the market next summer. This is particularly helpful if you mess up with your chosen team. Lock up a one-year contract with the best room for growth, then try again with your dream organization after the season when you have more bargaining strength.

Don’t Sleep on Your Extracurricular Activities

Once you make it to the big show you’ll have a proper agent and can begin making use of your fancy new lifestyle. Endorsement deals make themselves available as you improve your player from game to game. With just a quick promotional appearance you get a free injection of some VC to pour into your player. You also unlock your personal court and training area.

In addition to helping you unlock badges, practice includes several fun modes which let you work on your skills so you’re ready to perform when it counts. Personal training and Gatorades keep your player at peak performance, improving his on-court stats when he’s tired. If you feel off, you may just be in need of a little extra work.

Have you been enjoying the MyCareer mode in NBA2K19? Where did you sign your first contract? Did you opt to play for your favorite team or did you prioritize finding the best contract available? Let us know in the comments below!


Related Content:

NBA 2K19 Review: A Facelift Can't Hide the Blemishes Underneath

NBA2K19 MyCareer Guide: Getting the Most From Creating Your Pro

NBA2K19 MyCareer Guide: Getting the Most From Creating Your Pro Mon, 24 Sep 2018 18:17:02 -0400 RobertPIngram

NBA 2K19 has dropped, and players are getting their chance to try out the latest edition in the single player campaign, MyCareer, which places you in control of a rookie player looking to build up from a non-league start into all-time greatness. Although the MyCareer mode is fun, it can be frustrating -- as players unwilling to spend money on virtual currency can find themselves in control of a vastly under-skilled player for several in-game months.

Just getting through the opening character creation with a player ready to perform is not guaranteed. Every decision you make after slapping a face on your character will have an effect on his effectiveness on the court. Don’t make the mistake of getting off on the wrong foot by building a player who has been set up to fail. The opening learning curve for your 60-rated created player is hard enough if you didn’t start with a VC injection already, so don’t make it even harder.

Choose the Right Archetype for Your Skills

Once you customize your character’s face, you start to develop his playing personality. This comes in the form of choosing both a primary and secondary playing style. Each style carries its own pros and cons, and you also have the option to double down on a particular skill set by choosing the same archetype for both. The most important thing when building your character in this section is to play to your personal strengths. While it may be tempting to make your character a specialist where you are weakest to make up for it, your badges and takeover abilities rely on succeeding in your player’s archetype, so doing so can actually greatly hinder your development.

Driving & Finishing

If you dream of being the player who cuts opposing teams apart in the lane, this is the archetype for you. It focuses on inside scoring, with layups and dunks receiving large boosts, as well as high speed and acceleration ratings. As a trade-off, these players struggle with jump shots, as their mid- and long-range shooting is poor.

Shot Creating

This can be a confusing name as it is easy to think this means your player will be a distributor of the ball, creating shots for teammates. Instead, it's an ability to create shots in tight windows for himself that makes a shot creator, which brings forth excellent mid and close-range scoring as well as serviceable efforts from deep.

3PT Shooting

The modern NBA is all about the deep ball, so you can’t go wrong with making a player that can knock ‘em down. It speaks volumes about the modern style that even centers have the ability to focus on making it rain from downtown in 2K19. These shooters rely on others to help them get looks, if not supported with a secondary type, as they are not great dribblers or passers.

Passing & Ball-Handling

This is the way to go if you want to be the engine that keeps your teammates running. In addition to good pace, these players can dribble and pass with the best of them. Unfortunately, they struggle when it comes to getting points themselves, with low-to-mid ratings across all scoring fields.


You can’t win a championship on offensive output alone, and that’s where the lockdown defenders come into the mix. Choosing this option is a massive sacrifice on the offensive end, with nearly all of your offensive stats neglected. On the other hand, it boosts everything you need to keep the other team off the board, from blocks and steals to turn the ball over to speed and lateral quickness. If you want to be a strong defender you’ll need to invest at least a secondary archetype into defense.


Cleaning the board may be thankless work, but it can swing games. Earning second chances at one end, and denying them at the other, gives you the advantage of extra possessions, and put back buckets are a great way to run up your scoring. If you go this route with your big man, your home is by the bucket, as you will have limited speed and outside scoring ability. What you get by the bucketful is rebounding ability, raw strength, and jumping ability to put it to work.

Post Scoring

If you want to dig down in the trenches but with a little more personal glory, the post scorer is your guy. Just like the rebounder, he utilizes strength more than speed, but his focus is on making shots, not grabbing misses. Post scorers are terrors laying it off the glass, and capable of throwing down a thunderous dunk or hitting a mid-range jumper if the situation calls for it.

Your Build Matters

In many games, the character creation section is a purely aesthetic endeavor. This is not the case with NBA 2K19, as the decisions you make when creating your player will affect his on-court abilities. There are three decisions to be made, and each comes with its own trade-offs.


If there’s one thing everybody knows about basketball players, it’s that they're tall, so it's tempting when creating your player to just make him as tall as possible. Unfortunately, it’s not quite that simple. While height will improve your ability to grab rebounds and get shots off without being blocked, shorter players are given better ball handling abilities to make-up for their smaller stature.


As with height, more is not necessarily better. When choosing your weight you are ultimately making a decision of strength versus speed. The heavier your player is, the more equipped he’ll be to use his muscle, but he will also be worse off on speed-based skills and agility.


There are two main decisions being made when you decide just how lanky your player is. The longer your arms are, the better you can handle contested shots and the more effective you’ll be at swiping the ball. On the flip side, players with shorter arms are much harder to dispossess, and excel at nailing open looks.

Putting it All Together

With so much to consider when creating your MyCareer player, it is easy to feel overwhelmed. The key to creating a player you’ll be happy with is approaching the entire process as a single act, not a series of smaller choices.

  1. Choose the type of player you want to be. It’s important to know exactly how you want to play before you make your first decision. This allows you to make choices for skills and build which work together cohesively. It’s generally not wise to put all of your skills into driving and scoring then making your player as short as possible, for example. If you know the type of player you want to be, choose measurements which compliment it. If you know how you want to look, find a play style which matches your body.
  2. Diversify your player’s abilities. There is a strong temptation when doing character creation to double-down on your primary skill by making it your secondary skill as well. While this can pay off if you really know what you’re doing, this leads to a character who is usually very poor at everything but his specialty. Newer players are much better suited to choosing a secondary skill which assists their primary a little, but also boosts some of the attributes your primary missed.
  3. Play to your strengths. When in doubt on a choice, err on the side of the ability you are most confident in being able to carry out. The more effective your player is at his primary skills, the faster he’ll earn VC to improve his abilities. While neglected areas may get lower caps due to your archetype selections, you can actually upgrade them faster by scoring well with a player you’re better at playing than you can by giving them an initial boost then being dragged down by poor performances.

Have you had a chance to try out the MyCareer mode yet? We’d love to hear about your pro! Are you a slasher who can make it rain, or a rim protector who dominates the boards? Let us know in the comments below!


Related Content:

NBA 2K19 Review: A Facelift Can't Hide the Blemishes Underneath

NBA2K19 MyCareer Guide: Leveling Up Quickly Without Spending Real Money

How to Share Games on the Nintendo Switch Sun, 23 Sep 2018 12:03:17 -0400 Oscar Gonzalez

On September 18, Nintendo joined Microsoft and Sony by offering an online service for the Switch console.

Nintendo Switch Online allows users to make cloud saves, play classic NES games, and of course, compete with others online. Along with the rollout of the online service, there was one feature that snuck its way onto the console via a firmware update: game sharing.

The ability to share games on the Nintendo Switch is not much different than it is on the other consoles and Steam. All that's required is a Nintendo account.

How to share games on the Nintendo Switch

Let's go over how to share games on your Switch step by step.

  • Step 1: Link a Nintendo account to a Nintendo Switch console.
  • Step 2: Open the Nintendo eShop on the Switch and choose the Nintendo account. 
  • Step 3: Once the account is selected, this console will be considered the primary Switch console for the account. 
  • Step 4: On a second Nintendo Switch, create a new profile.
  • Step 5: Link the new profile to the same Nintendo account from the primary Nintendo console.
  • Step 6: Once linked, the second Nintendo Switch, or non-primary console, will have access to the Nintendo accounts games.

When finished, the same Nintendo account will be available on two Nintendo Switches although one is considered the primary console. Games purchased on the main Nintendo account can now be played on both consoles.

Rules and Limitations

As the case with using the same account on multiple consoles, there are some rules that come with having one account on two consoles.

To start, the non-primary console will have to access the internet in order to download the game and play downloadable content. Downloaded games can then be played offline.

If the primary console attempts to play the same game as the non-primary console, the game on the non-primary console will be paused allowing the primary console access to the game.

If both consoles are playing different games then the games will not be paused

How to play the same game at the same time

If two people want to share the one Nintendo account to play the same game at the same time, they can either keep both Switches offline after the initial check is done with the game.

Alternatively, a second profile can be used on the primary console to play the same game.

Since this is a brand new feature for the Switch, do not be surprised if Nintendo makes some changes in the future of how game sharing works. Check back here on GameSkinny for any changes to Nintendo Switch game sharing!

Dead By Daylight Bloodpoint Farming Guide Sat, 22 Sep 2018 12:15:05 -0400 Ty Arthur

There's a lot more strategy and progression than you might think while cleaving your way through horny co-eds as a masked killer in Dead By Daylight.

Bloodpoints are the game's currency for progressing along the Bloodweb so you can unlock new abilities, items, offerings, and so on. If you want to try out different builds and play in new ways, you need to earn Bloodpoints fast.

Below we cover everything you need to know to earn the most Bloodpoints per match as either the survivor or the killer.

Survivors and killers earn Bloodpoints in very different ways, but no matter which you play, make sure to complete the daily rituals for a huge boost in points.

Note that some players don't like being in a match with farmers, as you have different end goals. The fastest way to go about this is to work together with a group of friends rather than going into a random lobby.

Survivor Bloodpoint Farming Strategy

As a survivor, you gain Bloodpoints from the following:

  • Remaining alive throughout the match
  • Repairing generators
  • Landing good and great skill checks
  • Tracking an objective with the map
  • Searching chests
  • Unlocking the exit gate
  • Interacting with the killer (struggling, escaping a bear trap, etc.)
  • Hiding near the killer
  • Helping other survivors (pulling them off hooks, healing them, etc.)

When starting the match, let someone else draw the killer away, then immediately head out to cleanse a totem, open a chest, or repair a generator to start accruing points.

From there, your goal is to be as helpful to other players as possible while hindering the killer. Always help survivors off hooks (but hide nearby first and make sure the killer isn't standing there waiting to attack you as well).

Keep going back and forth between repairing generators, cleansing totems, and helping survivors. To make this strategy work, you are going to need a few perks in particular.

Start with David King as your primary survivor so you can use the We're Gonna Live Forever perk, which provides a 25% stackable bonus to Bloodpoint gains whenever you rescue a survivor or take a hit while protecting another player.

If you use this perk four times in a match, you'll be doubling your Bloodpoint gains. Getting David to level 30 lets you teach the perk to any other survivor and keep the Bloodpoint gains no matter which character you prefer.

To maximize Bloodpoint gain you're going to interact with the killer frequently, which means you'll need to heal often. Claudette Morel's Self-Care perk lets you heal yourself without a med-kit, and can be taught to other survivors at level 40.

Two other perks in particular are helpful for farming Bloodpoints by getting to locations faster and avoiding the killer.

First up is Sprint Burst (obviously for increasing your speed), followed by Borrowed Time for dealing with a killer who hangs out by the hook to snag altruistic players trying to help their buddies.

Killer Bloodpoint Farming Strategy

For the killer, getting Bloodpoints quickly is all about harassing survivors in every possible way. As a killer, you gain Bloodpoints from:

  • Chasing and catching survivors
  • Destroying objects like pallets and wounding survivors
  • Interrupting survivors mid-animation (note that killer interrupt animations were shortened with the Shattered Bloodline DLC)
  • Placing survivors on hooks
  • Deviousness, AKA using your killer's power effectively (Bloodpoints granted for the Wraith using Stalker and Surprise Attack were increased by 100% with the Shattered Bloodline DLC)
  • Staying in a match after survivors disconnect early

As the killer, to maximize your points you don't want to kill all the survivors immediately. Instead, let them stay alive to be hooked repeatedly, and make sure to damage the generators and pallets.

If you get a group of survivors who are willing to play along, you can net a ton of points just by chasing and hooking and then purposefully letting them go free.

Using the Bloody Party Streamers offering gives all players in the match a 100% bonus to Bloodpoints, so that's a very nice thing for the killer to do for everyone to have fun.

In terms of perks, the Cannibal's unique ability Barbecue & Chili gives you a big Bloodpoint bonus the first time you hook a survivor.

This perk is teachable when the Cannibal hits level 35, so you want to do that quickly if you intend on farming with a different killer.

The generic perk Distressing is also critical to effective Bloodpoint farming, as it gives a 100% bonus to all Bloodpoint gains from the deviousness category!

If you've mastered how to use one particular killer's power, this perk should be a no-brainer.



What's your most effective Dead By Daylight Bloodpoint farming strategy? Let us know your preferred technique below, and be sure to check out our other guides here: 

Dead By Daylight Shattered Bloodline Guide: Surviving As Adam Francis Fri, 21 Sep 2018 13:19:54 -0400 Ty Arthur

New Dead By Daylight DLC means its time to try out both another killer and a brand new survivor!

This time we've got the tough as nails Adam Francis, who is all about self-sufficiency and making the best of a bad situation.

You'll be forgiven if his fondness for tweed, a job as a teacher, and sudden relocation to Japan make you think a black Robert Langdon somehow got stuck in The Grudge.

Below we cover everything you need to know to survive a match as Adam. Wondering how to get a total party wipe as new killer The Spirit instead? Check out our Spirit guide here.

Adam Francis Survivor Guide

Adam is a high risk and reward type survivor. To properly utilize his perks, you want to be in danger and often remain close to the killer or be on the move to heal injured players or pull them off hooks.

That means staying cool under pressure (avoid sprinting) and staying hidden near the killer. You've got a leg up in this area over the other survivors.

Even his normal outfit is fairly dark, but picking up the grey business trench coat outfit is amazing for stealth as you can easily blend to into many environments.

Unless the killer is playing with their brightness settings through their video card utility, you can often avoid detection just by staying close to objects of a similar coloration.

Beyond his ability to blend in, Adam has three unique new perks to consider leveling up, and all have their pros and cons.

Diversion has the potential to be awesome, but it really only works if the killer doesn't have any active perks for seeing auras or otherwise wallhacking.

You need to keep the killer in your sight but not panic and run or draw their attention in any way (so look out for crows that may flutter away and reveal your position).

This perk also has a super long cooldown, and if the killer is an advanced player who knows to ignore diversionary sounds, it won't make much of a difference anyway.

Deliverance is a bit of a game-changing perk because it has the potential to scare killers away from trying to hook you. 

When players get used to Adam's abilities, they will know its likely you will get an automatically successful escape attempt. 

The big downside is that you have to unhook another player first, and it's easy to get stuck in a loop where the killer hangs around a hook to keep re-attaching wriggling survivors.

Autodidact is an odd perk that's hard to master but becomes very powerful. If you get to five tokens, 80% of the healing progress bar is filled up in a single attempt. That can make Adam the go-to healer in a match.

Since you are meant to be in close proximity to the killer, picking the general perk Spine Chill can be very helpful for Adam. This also doubles as an effective way to counter the Spirit killer introduced in the Shattered Bloodline DLC, since it will give you a warning when she is viewing you while invisible.

There is one big problem with Adam right now that may nix him as your choice for a while. At Coldwind Farm, in particular, Adam sometimes will spawn in the same room as the killer.

This is obviously going to be patched out, but for now be aware its a possibility. A nice player will let you run out to safety to give you a fair shot. A not so nice player, on the other hand, will get himself a free kill immediately.

Have you tried out Adam Francis yet, and what do you think of his survivor perks? Sound off with your survival strategy below, and check out the rest of our Dead By Daylight guides here.

Ring of Elysium Landing Guide Fri, 21 Sep 2018 12:15:07 -0400 Zack Palm

Choosing your first location in Ring of Elysium isn't the easiest. The massive map dares you to choose a starting spot you're going to feel comfortable with and ultimately know in a standard battle royale. Yet, this game proves to show you something different. You're going to need to pick something other than your standard choice to survive in this impressive arena.

There's plenty of choices for you to pick from. Each one gives you a fairly good idea of what you need to do to start out there, and where you need to go, but when you first start out you may not know what to do first. Here's a list of some great landing choices for you to pick from!

Start Off Small

What Should You Do First?

How mobile do you want to be during this first section? Do you want to pick the least immediately mobile class, the rock-climbing gear, and then choose from choices you know can traverse mountains, or pick an obvious choice and see what happens with a snowboard or a glider?

Any option is viable!

A choice can thrive based on the type of snow gear you take with you. For example, if you start off on the face of a mountain, away from a small town and you have a snowboard, you can slide straight into the village and see who's left. But, make the same choice with rock-climbing gear and you may find yourself a small, moving target on a massive white slope as you're forced to walk down the mountain. 

Remember this when you're making your choice, or when any location is recommended in this guide. 

The Hottest Locations

Without a doubt, almost every game you're going to see these locations filled up. For whatever reason players have decided these are the most ideal starting locations, and if you want in on the action you have to get there fast!

Sigel Castle

The entire city takes up only six of the tiny grid squares, but these spots always get filled up within the first couple seconds of matchmaking. Starting here almost certainly means you're going to start firing your weapon as soon as you're in, but if you're trigger happy, have at it!

Dione Police Station

If you're forced to get stranded in a snowy town about to get overrun by a massive storm, the police station is a great place to get stuck at -- especially if you're going to have to compete against the other occupants. There's usually a few vehicles nearby you can use to go further north, too.

Wagner City

Because it's one of the larger cities on the map, there are a good two dozen or so buildings you can check out for some great gear. For those who love urban warfare, this is the place to go. The one problem I have with this place is it's easy to get caught out by someone who wants to camp inside a building and wait for you to enter.

Fort Tyrfing

Much like the police station, Fort Tyrfing can provide you with a great spot to find some gear and get used to the map. Though, because it's located on the corner of the map, if you can't find a vehicle quick enough the storm may take your life -- don't worry, someone will probably get you before that happens.

Sidera Lodoicea Ski Resort

This is likely my favorite spot to start out, especially when I have a snowboard. If I get lucky and notice no one else spawns close to me, I can raid a handful of well-equipped houses and make off a like a bandit. However, if I see plenty of people around me, I normally take my snowboard and go straight down the ski resort to Ring Mountain City, where I loot a few outlying houses and then move on. Having a snowboard in this area is really great!

Reasonable Choices

These locations are a little out of the way from your typical highlights, but they're great to loot some gear and then move on towards the next safe zone. You'll probably have to do some running so I hope you brought your podcasts!

Tiny Village

Located at the very top of the map, right in the middle, you can see this little village location you can spawn at. It's a good location if you want to start out somewhere away from other people, get a few houses in, and then go in whatever direction you need to go to survive. If you see anyone spawning close by, get to the nearest house! They might not get as lucky as you, giving you your first kill.

Valley Town

Located to the left of Sigel Castle, Valley Town is a small little area of homes really good two people or a squad willing to share resources. Because it's small, not as many people plan to go towards it. Plus, it's on the other side of a mountain from Sigel Castle, meaning whoever survived that hot spot won't immediately have their sights on you. Additionally, this location is near the center of the map giving you a degree of freedom to choose where you want to go next without feeling too pressured.

Herschel Academy

There's plenty of big buildings here for you to loot. It's kind of like the school from PUBG: people are going to end up here, but if you can survive you're going to get some excellent starting gear. Due to it being at the bottom of a small mountain and near a lake, you're limited on choices of where to go next. Keep that in mind.

Snowflake Town

Much like Herschel Academy, this lake town forces you to go north or south after you've finished looting and survived anyone else who dropped with you. It's a good place to go if you and a friend want to grab some gear and talk for most of the not. You won't see as many other competitors during the start of the much, but you'll have a memorable night talking to each other as you trek across the map, which is the most important part.

Cedar Forest / Moose Woods Sawmill

I rarely see anyone drop here during my games, which makes it a great location to go if you want to get some solid gear. I normally recommend for newcomers to start out in Cedar Forest because, based on where they hear gunshots, they change their plans without too much effort. They can go down to the Lumberjack's House, Skadi City, or Moose Woods Sawmill to grab what they need and continue through the match. It varies on each game, and you're going to have to run to the next safe location if you want to survive, but it's going to be a great time. Bring your running shoes!


Those are some of our favorite locations to go to when we're playing Ring of Elysium. Know a location you and a buddy love to start out in no one else goes to? Share it with us!

We're going to have more guides for Ring of Elysium going up in the future, so stay tuned to Gameskinny to hear more!